JP6130002B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine that can perform variable display of identification information in a first variable display means or a second variable display means and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player.

  As a gaming machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game ball wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something to be done. Further, a variable display unit capable of variably displaying the identification information (also referred to as “fluctuation”) is provided, and a predetermined game value is obtained when the display result of the variable display of the identification information in the variable display unit becomes a specific display result. Are configured to give the player.

  The game value is the right that the state of the variable winning ball apparatus provided in the gaming area of the gaming machine becomes advantageous for a player who is easy to win, and the right for becoming advantageous for a player. In other words, or a condition for winning a prize ball is easily established.

  In a pachinko machine, a specific display mode determined in advance is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display of a special symbol (identification information) that is started in the variable display unit based on the winning of a game ball at the start winning opening. If this happens, a “big hit” will occur. Note that the derivation display is to stop and display a symbol (excluding stop before so-called re-variation). When the big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big hit gaming state where the hit ball is easy to win. And in each open period, if there is a prize for a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the big prize opening, the big prize opening is closed. And the number of times the special winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the big winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each special winning opening may be referred to as a round.

  In the variable display section, the symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left and right middle symbols) continue for a predetermined time and stop, swing, There is a possibility that a big hit will occur before the final result is displayed due to the state of scaling or deformation, or multiple symbols changing synchronously with the same symbol, or the position of the display symbol being switched An effect performed in a continuing state (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) is referred to as reach effect. Further, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the variable display device is not a specific display result, it becomes “out of” and the variability display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

JP 2007-236540 A

The present invention aims to provide a game machine which can improve the interest in the Yu technique.

A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that performs variable display of identification information in the first variable display means or the second variable display means, and can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to the player, the first variable display means and Including variable display means for effecting variable display of the identification information for effect corresponding to the variable display of the identification information in the second variable display means, and information relating to the variable display time even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped Game control means comprising storage means capable of holding stored contents for a predetermined period, game control means for controlling the progress of the game, and effect control means for controlling the variable display means for effect based on a command from the game control means The variable display of the identification information is based on the storage contents stored in the storage means when the power supply to the gaming machine is restored after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped during the variable display of the identification information. And resumable recovery means, and a variable display special state control means controllable to easily execute the special state of the identification information, presentation control means, the power supply to the gaming machine in the variable display of the effect identification information Including a recovery screen display means for displaying a recovery screen without restarting the variable display of the identification information for performance when the power supply to the gaming machine is recovered after stopping, and whether to control to an advantageous state Extraction means for extracting an advantageous state determination random number for determining and a variable display determination random number for determining a variable display pattern of performance identification information, and extraction of variable display of identification information that has not started yet Determines whether or not to control to the advantageous state using the advantageous storage state determining random number and the variable display determination random number extracted by the means as the reservation storage means and the advantageous state determination random number. Do A determination unit, a determination result of the determination unit, a holding storage number stored in the holding storage unit when starting variable display of identification information, a value of a random number for determining variable display extracted by the extraction unit, and a determination value Based on the variable display pattern determining means for determining the variable display pattern of the identification information for presentation, and based on the value of the random number for determining the advantageous state extracted by the extracting means before the determination by the variable display pattern determining means Determining means for determining whether or not the state is controlled, and determining whether or not a specific variable display pattern is obtained based on at least the value of the random number for determining variable display extracted by the extracting means and the determination value And a variable table of identification information as a determination target when it is determined by the determination means that it is controlled to be in an advantageous state or when it is determined that a specific variable display pattern is obtained. Prior to the start of the presentation, the notice effect execution means capable of executing the notice effect, and the power supply to the gaming machine is restored after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped while being controlled in the special state. A restriction means for restricting execution of the notice effect, and at least a part of the determination value corresponding to the specific variable display pattern is stored in the storage means when the variable information is displayed. regardless of the storage number, the same determination value is set, determine the constant means, by the value of the extracted variable display determination random number to determine whether they meet the same determined value by extracting means, a particular variable display It is characterized by determining whether it becomes a pattern. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the Yu technique.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit configuration of an effect control board, a lamp driver board and an audio output board. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of a power supply board. It is a timing diagram which shows typically the state of a reset signal and a power-off signal. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the microcomputer for game control. It is a figure which shows an example of the address map in the microcomputer for game control. It is a figure which illustrates the main part of a program management area and a built-in register. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting content in a header and function setting. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting content in 1st random number initial setting, 2nd random number initial setting, and interruption initial setting. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting content in security time setting. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of an internal information register. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of a random number circuit. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of a random number sequence change register. It is explanatory drawing which shows the change operation | movement of the random number update rule by a random number sequence change circuit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the change operation | movement of the random number update rule by a random number sequence change circuit. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of a random value acquisition register. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of a random number latch selection register. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a random value register. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of a random number latch flag register. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of a random number interrupt control register. It is a figure which shows the structural example in case a random number circuit is externally attached to the microcomputer for game control. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of an input port register. It is a flowchart which shows the security check process which CPU in a main board | substrate performs. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which CPU in a main board | substrate performs. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a random number circuit setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a random number circuit abnormality test | inspection process. It is a flowchart which shows a 4 ms timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a power-off process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a power-off process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern of the production | presentation symbol prepared beforehand. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit determination table, a small hit determination table, and a big hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for big hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for deviation. It is explanatory drawing which shows a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a deviation variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the determination result designation command at the time of winning. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the determination result designation command at the time of winning. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the determination result designation command at the time of winning. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the determination result designation command at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a pending | holding buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the effect process at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a display result designation | designated command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol display control process. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation control main process which CPU for presentation control performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a command reception buffer. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the determination result memory buffer at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows continuous notice effect determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows continuous notice effect determination processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the table for continuous notice determination. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a continuous notice allocation table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a continuous notice allocation table. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation start process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the stop symbol of an effect symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of process data. It is a flowchart which shows the process during effect design change. It is explanatory drawing which shows the handling when the change display of a 2nd special symbol interrupts when performing the continuous notice effect based on the determination result at the time of winning with respect to the start winning to a 1st start winning opening. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit display process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end effect process. It is a flowchart which shows a 4th symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a 4th symbol fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart which shows the 4th symbol variation process. It is a flowchart which shows a 4th symbol fluctuation | variation stop process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the aspect of the variable display of a 4th pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the aspect of the variable display of a 4th pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the aspect of the variable display of a 4th pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the movable aspect of a movable member. It is explanatory drawing which shows the other specific example of the movable aspect of a movable member. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of a continuous notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of a continuous notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of a continuous notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of a continuous notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of a pseudo | simulation ream. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution timing of a continuous notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect timing in the case of interrupting a continuous notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect timing in the case of interrupting a continuous notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production | presentation timing of the variation display of an effect symbol, and the variation display of a 4th symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production | presentation timing of the variation display of an effect symbol, and the variation display of a 4th symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production | presentation timing of the variation display of an effect symbol, and the variation display of a 4th symbol. It is a timing chart for demonstrating operation | movement in a random number circuit. 7 is a timing chart for explaining a read operation of a random value register, and the like. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the operation | movement etc. at the time of the fall of a power supply voltage. It is explanatory drawing which shows the allocation state of the determination value in the variation pattern classification determination table for deviation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the other example of the allocation state of the determination value in the fluctuation pattern classification determination table for deviation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the further another example of the allocation state of the determination value in the variation pattern classification determination table for deviation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the allocation state of the judgment value in the fluctuation pattern classification judgment table for deviation when it sees paying attention also to the fluctuation pattern classification including the fluctuation pattern with a pseudo-continuity as a fluctuation pattern other than the fluctuation pattern with a super reach. is there. It is explanatory drawing which shows the allocation state of the determination value in the variation pattern classification judgment table for deviation | shift when it sees paying attention also to the variation pattern classification containing the variation pattern with a pseudo | simulation series. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of allocation in the range to which the variation pattern classification with super reach is allocated.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as seen from the front.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be opened and closed. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape that is provided in the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (games to be described later) attached to them. A structure including the board 6).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2 is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. Under the hitting ball supply tray 3, there are provided a surplus ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3, and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hitting ball. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 7 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down.

  An effect display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 7. The display screen of the effect display device 9 includes an effect symbol display area for performing variable display of the effect symbol in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Therefore, the effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of effect symbols. The effect symbol display area includes a symbol display area for variably displaying, for example, three decorative (effect) effect symbols of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The symbol display area includes “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas, but the position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed on the display screen of the effect display device 9. Three areas of the display area may be separated. The effect display device 9 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the first special symbol display 8a is executing variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display device 9 to execute the effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol display 8a executes the second special display. When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed on the symbol display 8b, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 9 along with the variable display, so that the progress of the game can be easily grasped. .

  Further, in the effect display device 9, symbols other than the symbol that will be the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left and right middle symbols) have continued for a predetermined time, and the jackpot symbol (for example, the left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol) Stops, swings, scales, or deforms in a state that matches the symbol combination), or multiple symbols fluctuate synchronously in the same symbol, or the position of the display symbol is switched Thus, an effect performed in a state where the possibility of occurrence of a big hit (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) before the final result is displayed is referred to as reach effect. Further, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. And when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the effect display device 9 is not a big hit symbol, it becomes “out” and the variation display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  Note that, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which the effect symbol display is performed as a liquid crystal display effect in the effect display device 9, but the effect performed in the effect display device 9 is the one shown in this embodiment. For example, an effect having a predetermined story characteristic may be executed, and an effect may be executed in which the result of the story is displayed based on the determination result of the jackpot determination or the variation pattern. For example, perform a battle effect where professional wrestling or soccer matches and enemy characters fight, perform an effect to win the game or battle if it is a big hit, and perform an effect to defeat the game or battle if it is off Also good. Further, for example, instead of displaying the result such as winning or losing, an effect may be executed in which a predetermined story such as a story is developed in order.

  In the upper right part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, there are provided fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d for displaying a fourth symbol after the effect symbol, a special symbol described later, and a normal symbol. In this embodiment, a fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol described later, There is provided a fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  In this embodiment, the variation display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol (however, to be precise, the variation display of the effect symbol is varied on the effect control microcomputer 100 side). This is done by measuring the variation time recognized based on the pattern command.) When performing an effect using the effect display device 9, for example, the effect content including the change display of the effect symbol disappears from the screen for a moment. There are a variety of effects such as effects being performed and effects in which movable objects shield all or part of the screen. For this reason, even if the display screen on the effect display device 9 is viewed, it may be difficult to recognize whether or not the current variation display is in progress. Therefore, in this embodiment, whether or not the state of the present variation is being displayed by confirming the state of the fourth symbol by further displaying the variation of the fourth symbol on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9. It is possible to reliably recognize whether or not. Note that the 4th symbol is always variably displayed with a constant operation and does not disappear from the screen or is not shielded by a shielding object, so that it can always be visually recognized.

  The 4th symbol for the first special symbol and the 4th symbol for the 2nd special symbol may be collectively referred to as the 4th symbol, and the 4th symbol display area 9c for the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol The 4th symbol display area 9d for symbols may be collectively referred to as a 4th symbol display area.

  The variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol is realized by continuing the state where the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are repeatedly turned on and off at a predetermined time interval in a predetermined display color (for example, blue). . The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 8a is synchronized with the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. The variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is synchronized with the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol. Synchronous means that the variable display start time and end time are the same, and the variable display period is the same. When the big win symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the fourth special symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol is kept lit in a display color (for example, red) reminiscent of the big hit. . When the big win symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the fourth special symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol is kept lit in a display color reminiscent of the big hit (for example, red).

  In this embodiment, the case where the 4th symbol display area is provided on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is shown, but a light emitter such as a lamp or LED is used separately from the effect display device 9. Thus, the fourth symbol display area may be realized. In this case, for example, the variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol may be realized by continuing the state in which the two LEDs are alternately lit, and any of the two LEDs is stopped. Whether or not the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed may be indicated depending on whether or not it is displayed.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which separate fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are provided corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively, but the first special symbol and the second special symbol are provided. A fourth symbol display area common to the symbols may be provided in a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9. Moreover, you may make it implement | achieve the 4th symbol display area common with respect to a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol using light-emitting bodies, such as a lamp | ramp and LED. In this case, when executing the variation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol, and when executing the variation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol, For example, the display of different display colors at certain time intervals may be performed by distinguishing and executing the variation display of the fourth symbol by performing display that repeatedly turns on and off. In addition, when the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol, and when the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol, for example, The display of the fourth symbol may be distinguished and executed by performing a display that repeatedly turns on and off at different time intervals. In addition, for example, when the stop symbol is derived and displayed corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol, and when the stop symbol is derived and displayed corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol, the same big hit symbol is obtained. However, you may make it stop-display the stop symbol of a different aspect.

  On the left side of the lower part of the game board 6, a first special symbol display (first variable display portion) 8a for variably displaying the first special symbol as identification information is provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. In other words, the first special symbol display 8a is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. On the lower right side of the game board 6, a second special symbol display (second variable display portion) 8b for variably displaying the second special symbol as identification information is provided. The second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the second special symbol display 8b is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9.

  The small display is formed in a square shape, for example. In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both 0 to 9), but the types may be different. Further, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be configured to variably display numbers (or two-digit symbols) of, for example, 00 to 99, for example.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b are collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator (variable display unit). There are things to do.

  Although this embodiment shows a case where two special symbol indicators 8a and 8b are provided, the gaming machine may be provided with only one special symbol indicator.

  For the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition, which is the variable display execution condition, is satisfied (for example, the game ball has the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening) 14 after passing (including winning)), the variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0 and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed) The state is started and the big hit game is not executed), and when the variable display time (fluctuation time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Note that the passing of a game ball means that the game ball has passed through a predetermined area such as a prize opening or a gate, and that includes a game ball entering (winning) a prize opening. It is. Deriving and displaying the display result is to finally stop and display a symbol (an example of identification information).

  A winning device having a first start winning port 13 is provided below the effect display device 9. The game ball won in the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the first start opening switch 13a.

  A variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning port 14 through which a game ball can be won is provided below a winning device having a first starting winning port (first starting port) 13. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second start opening) 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the second start opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by a solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the game ball can be awarded to the second starting winning port 14 (it is easier to start winning), which is advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state, it is easier for the game ball to win the second start winning opening 14 than the first starting winning opening 13. In addition, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second start winning opening 14. Therefore, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, it is easier for the game ball to win the first starting winning port 13 than the second starting winning port 14. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the closed state, it may be configured that the winning is possible (that is, it is difficult for the gaming ball to win) although it is difficult to win a prize.

  Hereinafter, the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a start winning opening or a starting opening.

  When the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball heading for the variable winning ball device 15 is very likely to win the second start winning port 14. The first start winning opening 13 is provided directly under the effect display device 9, but the interval between the lower end of the effect display device 9 and the first start winning opening 13 is further reduced, or the first start winning opening is set. The nail arrangement around the first start winning opening 13 is made difficult to guide the game balls to the first starting winning opening 13 so that the winning rate of the second starting winning opening 14 is increased. It is also possible to make the direction higher than the winning rate of the first start winning opening 13.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 that opens and closes only the second start winning opening 14 is provided. Any of the start winning ports 14 may be provided with a variable winning ball device that performs an opening / closing operation.

  On the side of the first special symbol display 8a, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 13, that is, the first reserved memory number (the reserved memory is also referred to as the start memory or the start prize memory) is displayed. A first special symbol storage memory display 18a comprising four displays is provided. The first special symbol storage memory indicator 18a increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  On the side of the second special symbol display 8b, a second special symbol hold memory display 18b comprising four displays for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14, that is, the second reserved memory number. Is provided. The second special symbol storage memory display 18b increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 every time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  Also, at the lower part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, there are provided a first reserved memory display unit 18c for displaying the first reserved memory number and a second reserved memory display unit 18d for displaying the second reserved memory number. ing. In addition, you may make it provide the area | region (sum total pending | holding memory display part) which displays the total number (sum total pending memory count) which is the sum total of the 1st pending memory count and the 2nd pending memory count. As described above, if the summation pending storage display section for displaying the total number is provided, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that are not satisfied with the variable display start condition.

  The effect display device 9 is for decoration (for effects) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. A variable display of the effect symbol as the symbol is performed. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display device 9 reminds the jackpot The combination of is stopped and displayed.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, the game control microcomputer 560 that controls the change display of the special symbol transmits a change pattern command that can specify the change time, and the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the change pattern command. The variation display of the effect symbol is controlled according to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command. Therefore, since the variation time is specified based on the variation pattern command, the variation display of the special symbol and the variation display of the effect symbol should be executed in synchronization in principle. However, in the unlikely event that the data of the variation pattern command is garbled, the variation time recognized on the game control microcomputer 560 side and the variation time recognized on the effect control microcomputer 100 side There may be a gap between them. For this reason, when an unexpected situation such as garbled command data occurs, there is a possibility that the special symbol variation display and the production symbol variation display are not completely synchronized.

  On the left side of the decorative portion around the effect display device 9, a movable member 78 that is attached to the rotating shaft of the motor 86 and moves when the motor 86 rotates is provided. In this embodiment, the movable member 78 operates when a pseudo-series effect or a notice effect (movable object notice effect) is executed. Further, in the decorative portion around the effect display device 9, a blade-shaped movable member (hereinafter referred to as an effect blade accessory) that is attached to the rotating shaft of the motor 87 and moves when the motor 87 rotates is provided below the left and right. 79a and 79b are provided. In this embodiment, the production blade actors 79a and 79b operate when a notice production (production blade production notice production) is executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 20 is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The special variable winning ball apparatus 20 includes an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b. When the open / close plate is controlled to be open by the solenoid 21 in the specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when the symbol is derived and displayed, the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  The game area 6 is also provided with winning ports (ordinary winning ports) 29, 30, 33, 39 for paying out a predetermined number of premium game balls determined in advance based on winning of the game balls. The game balls won in the winning openings 29, 30, 33, 39 are detected by the winning opening switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a.

  A normal symbol display 10 is provided on the right side of the game board 6. The normal symbol display 10 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, “◯” and “x”) called normal symbols.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. In this embodiment, variable display is performed by alternately lighting the upper and lower lamps (the symbols can be visually recognized when turned on). For example, if the lower lamp is turned on at the end of the variable display, it is a hit. . When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In other words, the state of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is a state that is advantageous from a disadvantageous state for the player when the normal symbol is a stop symbol (a state in which a game ball can be awarded at the second start winning port 14). To change. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol holding storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time there is a game ball passing through the gate 32, that is, every time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol storage memory display 41 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Each time variable display on the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one. In addition, a probability variation state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit compared to the normal state is high (a state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit as a result of fluctuation display of special symbols is increased compared to the normal state). Then, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased. Even in the short state (the game state in which the variable display time of the special symbol is shortened) when the symbol variation time is shortened although it is not the probability variation state, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased.

  On the left and right sides of the game area 7 of the game board 6, there are provided decorative LEDs 25 that are displayed blinking during the game, and at the lower part there is an outlet 26 for taking in a hit ball that has not won. In addition, two speakers 27 that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 7. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided.

  The members constituting the hitting ball supply tray 3 are provided with operation buttons 120 as operation means that can be operated by the player. The operation button 120 is provided with a push button switch that can be pressed by the player. The operation button 120 is provided not only with a push button switch that can be pressed by the player, but also with a dial that can be rotated by the player. The player can perform a predetermined selection (for example, selection of effects) by rotating the dial.

  In the gaming machine, a ball striking device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to a player operating the batting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the driving motor to launch a gaming ball to the gaming area 7. ) Is provided. A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, 1), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started on the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the first start winning opening 13. If the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be started, the first reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning opening 14 and is detected by the second start opening switch 14a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the special symbol variable display ends, 2), the second special symbol display 8b starts variable display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the effect display device 9 starts variable display of the effect symbol. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the second start winning opening 14. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  In this embodiment, when the probability variation is a big hit, the game state is shifted to a high probability state, and the game ball is easily started and won (that is, in the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b and the effect display device 9). It shifts to a high base state, which is a gaming state controlled so that a variable display execution condition is easily established. In addition, when the gaming state is shifted to the short time state, the state is shifted to the high base state. In the high base state, for example, the frequency at which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is increased or the time in which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is extended compared to the case in which the high base state is not in the high base state. It becomes easier to win a start.

  Instead of extending the time during which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state (also referred to as the open extended state), the normal symbol display unit 10 shifts to a normal symbol probability changing state in which the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display unit 10 will be a hit symbol is increased. Depending on the situation, the high base state may be entered. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In this case, by performing the transition control to the normal symbol probability changing state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the frequency at which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened is increased. Therefore, if the normal symbol probability changing state is entered, the opening time and the number of opening times of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased, and a state where it is easy to start a winning (high base state) is achieved. That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 can be increased when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol or the stop symbol of the special symbol is a probabilistic symbol. It changes to an advantageous state (a state where it is easy to win a start). It should be noted that increasing the number of times of opening is a concept including changing from a closed state to an open state.

  Moreover, you may transfer to a high base state by shifting to the normal symbol time short state where the fluctuation time (variable display period) of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is shortened. In the normal symbol short-time state, the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened, so that the frequency of starting the variation of the normal symbol increases, and as a result, the frequency of hitting the normal symbol increases. Therefore, when the frequency that the normal symbol is hit increases, the frequency that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened is increased, and the start winning state is easily set (high base state).

  In addition, the change time of special symbols and production symbols will be shortened by shifting to the short time state when the variation time (variable display period) of special symbols and production symbols is shortened. The frequency of being played (in other words, the digestion of the reserved memory becomes faster), and the situation where an invalid start prize is generated can be reduced. Therefore, an effective start winning is likely to occur, and as a result, the possibility of a big hit game being increased.

  Furthermore, by shifting to all the states shown above (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state), it will be easier to win a start (shift to a high base state). May be. In addition, it is easier to win a start (high base) by shifting to any one of the above states (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state). Transition to a state). In addition, it is easier to win a start by shifting to any one of the above states (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state). You may make it move to a base state.

  FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. FIG. 2 also shows a payout control board 37, an effect control board 80, and the like. On the main board 31, a game control microcomputer (corresponding to a game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program, a control clock generation circuit 111, and a random number clock generation circuit 112 are mounted. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as a storage means used as a work memory, and a CPU 56 for performing a control operation in accordance with the program. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or built-in. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 509 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by the hardware circuit).

  Here, the control clock generation circuit 111 generates a control clock CCLK that becomes an oscillation signal of a predetermined frequency outside the game control microcomputer 560. The control clock CCLK generated by the control clock generation circuit 111 is supplied to the clock circuit 502 via a control external clock terminal EXC of a game control microcomputer 560 as shown in FIG. The random number clock generation circuit 112 generates a random number clock RCLK that is an oscillation signal having a predetermined frequency different from the oscillation frequency of the control clock CCLK, outside the game control microcomputer 560. The random number clock RCLK generated by the random number clock generation circuit 112 is supplied to the random number circuit 509 via a random number external clock terminal ERC of a game control microcomputer 560 as shown in FIG. As an example, the oscillation frequency of the random number clock RCLK generated by the random number clock generation circuit 112 may be equal to or lower than the oscillation frequency of the control clock CCLK generated by the control clock generation circuit 111. Alternatively, the oscillation frequency of the random number clock RCLK generated by the random number clock generation circuit 112 may be higher than the oscillation frequency of the control clock CCLK generated by the control clock generation circuit 111.

  The RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power source created on the power supply substrate 910. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 is stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). In particular, at least data (a special symbol process flag or the like) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means, and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 55 is backed up.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, so that the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

  Further, an input driver circuit 58 for supplying detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the start port switch 13a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a to the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. Yes. The main board also includes an output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15 and the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20 that forms a big winning opening in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 560. 31.

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b that variably displays special symbols, a normal symbol display 10 that variably displays normal symbols, and a first special symbol hold memory. Display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol storage memory display 18b, and the normal symbol storage memory display 41 is performed.

  An information output circuit (not shown) that outputs an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 31.

  Between the main board 31 and the effect control board 80, for example, by performing serial communication only in a single direction from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 77, various effect control commands are sent. Is transmitted. In this embodiment, the effect control means (configured by the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 instructs the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. An effect control command is received, and display control of the effect display device 9 for variably displaying effect symbols is performed.

  The effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80 controls the display of the decoration LED 25 provided on the game board and the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side via the lamp driver board 35. The sound output from the speaker 27 is controlled via the sound output board 70.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 3, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70, only the effect control board 80 may be provided for effect control.

  The effect control board 80 includes an effect control CPU 101 and an effect control microcomputer 100 including a RAM for storing information related to effects such as effect symbol process flags. The RAM may be externally attached. In this embodiment, the RAM in the production control microcomputer 100 is not backed up. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives an effect control command via the relay board 77. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 that performs display control of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the production control microcomputer 100, and maps a VRAM therein. VRAM is a buffer memory for developing image data. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9 via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 101 outputs to the VDP 109 a command for reading out necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The CGROM stores character image data and moving image data displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols (including effect symbols), and background image data in advance. ROM. The VDP 109 reads image data from the CGROM in response to the instruction from the effect control CPU 101. The VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

  The effect control CPU 101 drives the motor 86 to operate the movable member 78 via the output port 106. Further, the effect control CPU 101 drives a motor 87 for operating the effect blades 79 a and 79 b via the output port 106.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 inputs a signal from the operation button 120 via the input port 107 in response to a pressing operation of the operation button 120 by the player.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the LED to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. Further, the production control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the output port 104.

  In the lamp driver board 35, a signal for driving the LED is input to the LED driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED driver 352 supplies a current to a light emitter provided on the frame side such as the frame LED 28 based on a signal for driving the LED. Further, an electric current is supplied to the decoration LED 25 provided on the game board side.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The voice synthesizing IC 703 generates voice or sound effect according to the sound number data, and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplification circuit 705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data showing the output form of the sound effect or sound in a time series in a predetermined period (for example, the changing period of the effect design).

  Next, the configuration of the power supply substrate 910 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. The power supply board 910 is provided with a power switch 914 for executing or shutting off power supply to each electrical component control board and mechanism component in the gaming machine. Note that the power switch 914 may be provided outside the power supply board 910 in the gaming machine. When the power switch 914 is in a closed state (on state), AC power (AC 24 V) is applied to the input side (primary side) of the transformer 911. The transformer 911 is for electrically insulating the AC power supply (AC24V) and the inside of the power supply substrate 910, and its output voltage is also AC24V. A varistor 918 as an overvoltage protection circuit is installed on the input side of the transformer 911.

  The power supply board 910 is installed independently of the electric component control board (the main board 31, the payout control board 37, the effect control board 80, etc.), and generates a voltage used by each board and the mechanical parts in the gaming machine. In this example, AC24V, VSL (DC + 30V), VLP (DC + 24V), VDD (DC + 12V) and VCC (DC + 5V) are generated. Further, a capacitor 916 serving as a storage holding means for holding the stored contents in the backup power supply (VBB), that is, the backup RAM, is charged from DC + 5V (VCC), that is, a power supply line that drives an IC or the like on each substrate. Further, a backflow prevention diode 917 is inserted between the + 5V line and the backup + 5V (VBB) line. Note that VSL is generated by rectifying and boosting AC 24 V with a rectifying element in the rectifying and smoothing circuit 915. VSL becomes a solenoid driving power source. VLP is a lamp lighting voltage, and is generated by rectifying AC24V with a rectifier element in the rectifier circuit 912.

  The DC-DC converter 913 serving as a power supply voltage generation unit has one or a plurality of switching regulators (two regulator ICs 924A and 924B are shown in FIG. 4), and generates VDD and VCC based on VSL. Relatively large capacitors 923A and 923B are connected to the input sides of the regulator ICs (switching regulators) 924A and 924B. Therefore, when the power supply to the gaming machine from the outside is stopped, the direct current voltages such as VSL, VDD, VCC, etc., decrease relatively slowly.

  As shown in FIG. 4, AC24V output from the transformer 911 is supplied to the connector 922B as it is. The VLP is supplied to the connector 922C. VCC, VDD and VSL are supplied to connectors 922A, 922B and 922C.

  The cable connected to the connector 922A is connected to the main board 31. VBB is also supplied to the connector 922A. The cable connected to the connector 922B is connected to the payout control board 37. Note that VBB may also be supplied to the connector 922B. That is, backup power may be supplied to the payout control board 37, and a power-off process described later may be executed. The cable connected to the connector 922C is connected to the lamp driver board 35. Each voltage is supplied to the effect control board 80 and the audio output board 70 via the lamp driver board 35.

  In addition, a clear switch 921 having a push button structure is mounted on the power supply board 910. Since the power supply board 910 is mounted, the power supply system extending from the power supply board 910 to the main board 31 can be integrated into one system, and the clear signal wiring from the clear switch 921 can be easily separated from the power supply system. it can. When the clear switch 921 is pressed, a low level (ON state) clear signal is output and output to the main board 31 via the connector 922A. If the clear switch 921 is not pressed, a high level (off state) signal is output. The clear switch 921 may have a configuration other than the push button structure. Further, the clear switch 921 may be provided other than the power supply board 910 in the gaming machine. The clear signal is sent to the payout control board 37 via the main board 31.

  Further, the power supply board 910 generates a reset signal for the microcomputer mounted on the electric component control board, amplifies the reset signal from the power supply monitor circuit 920 that outputs a power-off signal, and the power supply monitor circuit 920. In addition, an output driver circuit 925 that outputs to the main board 31 and the payout control board 37 via the connectors 922A and 922B, amplifies the power-off signal, starts the connector 922A, and outputs it to the main board 31 is mounted. The power-off signal is sent to the payout control board 31 and the effect control board 80 via the main board 31.

  The power supply monitoring circuit 920 is a circuit that realizes a power supply monitoring unit that outputs a power-off signal and a reset signal generation unit that generates a reset signal. Can do. The power supply monitoring circuit 920 has a predetermined period of time during which a predetermined voltage (for example, + 24V) used in the gaming machine is equal to or less than a predetermined value (for example, + 5V, but may be other values such as + 18V). For example, a power-off signal is output if it continues for 56 ms or longer. Specifically, the power-off signal is turned on (low level). If + 18V is set, as will be described later, it is possible to reliably prevent erroneous detection of the switch when the power supply is stopped.

  For example, the power supply monitoring circuit 920 sets the reset signal to a low level when VCC becomes +4.5 V or less. In this embodiment, the function of outputting the power-off signal and the function of outputting the reset signal are realized by one power supply monitoring circuit 920, but they may be realized by different circuits. In that case, a watchdog timer built-in IC can be used as a circuit for outputting a reset signal. In such an IC, in order to prevent the CPU from malfunctioning or running away due to a momentary power supply voltage interruption or instantaneous interruption, a period in which a clock signal is not input to the clock input terminal (CK terminal) ( (The period set according to the capacitance of a single capacitor connected to the capacitor connection terminal (TC terminal), and the timer monitoring time can be changed according to the resistance connected to the detection voltage variable terminal (VS terminal)) If the reset signal exceeds a predetermined time, the reset signal is changed from a high level to a low level (the level at which the CPU is stopped) for a certain period (the low level period is set according to the capacitance of the capacitor connected to the capacitor connection terminal A watchdog function that repeats the setting of the watchdog timer (RCT terminal) input level This function can be stopped by setting the ground level to the same level as the input level of the GND terminal). For example, when VCC (operable voltage +0.8 V or more) is +5 V, VCC becomes +4.2 V or less. It has a hysteresis characteristic that changes the detection voltage value for inverting the level of the reset signal depending on whether the reset signal is low level and VCC is high or low, and the reset level is low level. In addition to a certain reset signal (output from the RESET terminal), a system reset IC that can output a reset signal (output from the RESET terminal) having a high reset level can be used. When the reset circuit is mounted on each electric component control board, the voltage value that causes the power-off signal to be low may be made different (for example, the case of the main board 31 is made highest). The power-off signal is input to the game control microcomputer 560 the earliest.)

  When the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the power supply monitoring circuit 920 sets the reset signal to a low level on condition that a predetermined period has elapsed since the power-off signal was output (set to a low level). The predetermined period is a time sufficient for the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31 to execute a power-off process described later. That is, the power monitoring circuit 920 outputs an operation stop signal (low level of the reset signal) after the game control microcomputer 560 completes the power-off process after outputting the power-off signal as the voltage drop detection signal. To do. The power monitoring circuit 920 also serves as first power monitoring means for outputting a voltage drop detection signal and second power monitoring means for outputting an operation stop signal. In addition, when power supply to the gaming machine is started and VCC exceeds +4.5 V, for example, the reset signal is set to high level.

  In this embodiment, the power supply monitoring means monitors the output of the power supply of a predetermined potential, and the voltage from the outside of the gaming machine (this implementation) In this embodiment, it is used that the predetermined DC voltage created from AC24V) is equal to or lower than the predetermined value. However, the detection condition is not limited to this. Other conditions may be used. For example, the AC wave itself may be monitored and the AC wave may be detected as a detection condition, or the signal obtained by digitizing the AC wave may be monitored and the AC signal may be stopped when the digital signal becomes flat. May be used as a detection condition. Further, for example, a + 12V power supply voltage or a + 5V power supply voltage may be monitored, and it may be detected that the voltage has dropped to a predetermined value and a power-off signal is output. However, in order to prevent a malfunction of a switch operating at + 12V, it is preferable to monitor a voltage of + 12V or higher.

  In this embodiment, the power supply monitoring unit is mounted on the power supply board 910, but the power supply monitoring unit may be mounted on the payout control board 37. When mounted on the payout control board 37, the path of the power-off signal from the power monitoring means to the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer 370 is shortened, and noise may be applied to the power-off signal. Can be reduced.

  FIG. 5 is a timing diagram schematically showing the states of the AC 24 V, VSL, VCC, reset signal, and power-off signal when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started and when power supply is stopped. is there. As shown in FIG. 5, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, VSL and VCC gradually reach specified values (DC + 30V and DC + 5V). At this time, when VCC exceeds the first predetermined value, the power supply monitoring circuit 303 stops outputting the reset signal (sets it to a high level) and turns it off. When VSL exceeds the second predetermined value, the power supply monitoring circuit 303 stops outputting the power-off signal (sets it to a high level) and turns it off. On the other hand, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, VSL and VCC gradually decrease. At this time, when VSL falls to the second predetermined value, the power supply monitoring circuit 303 outputs the power-off signal as an ON state (sets it to a low level). When VCC decreases to the first predetermined value, the power monitoring circuit 920 outputs the reset signal as an ON state (sets it to a low level).

  FIG. 6 shows a configuration example of the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. A game control microcomputer 560 shown in FIG. 6 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes an external bus interface 501, a clock circuit 502, a specific information storage circuit 503, a reset / interrupt controller 504, a CPU (Central Processing Unit). ) 56, ROM (Read Only Memory) 54, RAM (Random Access Memory) 55, CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) 508, random number circuit 509, PIP (Parallel Input Port) 510, and serial communication circuit 511. And an address decoding circuit 512.

  FIG. 7 shows an example of an address map in the game control microcomputer 560. As shown in FIG. 7, the area from address 0000H to address 1FFFH is allocated to the ROM 54 and includes a user program area and a program management area. FIG. 8A shows an example of the usage and contents of the main part of the program management area in the ROM 54. The area from address 2000H to address 20FFH is a built-in register area assigned to the built-in register of the game control microcomputer 560. FIG. 8B shows an example of the usage and contents of the main part of the built-in register area. An area from address 7E00H to address 7FFFH is a work area assigned to the RAM 55, and can be assigned to an I / O map or a memory map. An area from address FDD0H to address FDFBH is an XCS decode area allocated to the address decode circuit 512.

  The program management area is a storage area for storing information necessary for the CPU 56 to execute the user program. As shown in FIG. 8A, the program management area includes a header KHDR, a function setting KFCS, a first random number initial setting KRS1, a second random number initial setting KRS2, an interrupt initial setting KIIS, a security time setting KSES, and the like. It is.

  A header KHDR stored in the program management area indicates a setting for reading internal data in the game control microcomputer 560. FIG. 9A illustrates the correspondence between setting data and operation in the header KHDR. Here, in the game control microcomputer 560, a ROM read prevention function and a bus output mask function can be set. The ROM read prevention function is a function for permitting or prohibiting the read operation for the data stored in the ROM 54 included in the game control microcomputer 560. When the read prohibition is set, the data stored in the ROM 54 cannot be read. The bus output mask function is an address bus output, data bus output and control signal in the external bus interface 501 when an external device connected to the external bus interface 501 makes a read request for the internal data of the game control microcomputer 560. This function makes it impossible to read internal data from an external device by masking the output. As shown in FIG. 9A, the operation combination of the ROM read prevention function and the bus output mask function is set differently in accordance with the setting data of the header KHDR. Of the setting data shown in FIG. 9A, the setting data for which ROM reading is permitted and the bus output mask is valid is also referred to as bus output mask valid data. Further, the setting data (all “00H”) in which ROM reading is prohibited and the bus output mask is valid is also referred to as ROM reading prohibiting data. The setting data for which ROM reading is permitted and the bus output mask becomes invalid is also referred to as bus output mask invalid data.

  The function setting KFCS stored in the program management area indicates operation settings of a watch dog timer (WDT) in the game control microcomputer 560 and use settings of various function shared terminals. FIG. 9B shows an example of setting contents in the function setting KFCS.

  The bit number [7-5] of the function setting KFCS indicates, for example, the operation permission / prohibition of the watchdog timer that can be set as an interrupt factor in the reset / interrupt controller 504, and the cycle when it is permitted. The bit number [4] of the function setting KFCS indicates that the predetermined function shared terminal (first shared terminal) in the game control microcomputer 560 is the second channel transmission terminal TXB used by the serial communication circuit 511 or is address decoded. This is a TXB terminal setting that designates whether the circuit 512 uses the chip select output terminal XCS13. In the example shown in FIG. 9B, if the bit value in the bit number [4] of the function setting KFCS is “0”, the first shared terminal is used for the second channel transmission in the serial communication circuit 511. This is the setting for the 2-channel transmission terminal TXB. On the other hand, if the bit value is “1”, the first dual-purpose terminal is set to the chip select output terminal XCS13 used in the address decode circuit 512. In this embodiment, by setting the bit number [4] of the function setting KFCS to “0” and setting the first shared terminal to the second channel transmission terminal TXB, serial communication with the effect control board 80 is performed. to enable.

  The bit number [3] of the function setting KFCS indicates that a predetermined function shared terminal (second shared terminal) in the game control microcomputer 560 is the first channel transmission terminal TXA used by the serial communication circuit 511, or is address decoded. This is a TXA terminal setting that indicates whether the circuit 512 uses the chip select output terminal XCS12. In the example shown in FIG. 9B, if the bit value in the bit number [3] of the function setting KFCS is “0”, the second shared terminal is used for the first channel transmission in the serial communication circuit 511. 1 channel transmission terminal TXA is set. On the other hand, if the bit value is “1”, the second dual-purpose terminal is set to the chip select output terminal XCS12 used in the address decode circuit 512. In this embodiment, by setting the bit number [3] of the function setting KFCS to “0” and setting the second shared terminal to the first channel transmission terminal TXA, serial communication with the payout control board 37 is performed. to enable.

  The bit number [2] of the function setting KFCS indicates that the predetermined function shared terminal (third shared terminal) in the game control microcomputer 560 is the first channel reception terminal RXA used by the serial communication circuit 511, or the PIP 510 This is an RXA terminal setting indicating whether to use the input port P5. In the example shown in FIG. 9B, if the bit value in the bit number [2] of the function setting KFCS is “0”, the third shared terminal is used for the first channel reception in the serial communication circuit 511. 1 channel receiving terminal RXA is set. On the other hand, if the bit value is “1”, the third shared terminal is set to the input port P5 used in the PIP 510. In this embodiment, by setting the bit number [2] of the function setting KFCS to “0” and setting the third shared terminal to the first channel receiving terminal RXA, serial communication with the payout control board 37 is performed. to enable.

  The bit number [1] of the function setting KFCS is a predetermined function shared terminal (fourth shared terminal) in the game control microcomputer 560 is used as an external non-maskable interrupt terminal XNMI connected to the CPU 56 or the like, or is used by the PIP 510 This is an NMI connection setting indicating whether to set the input port P4. In the example shown in FIG. 9B, if the bit value in the bit number [1] of the function setting KFCS is “0”, the external non-maskable interrupt terminal XNMI whose fourth shared terminal is connected to the CPU 56 or the like is set. (CPU connection). On the other hand, if the bit value is “1”, the fourth shared terminal is set for the input port P4 used in the PIP 510 (CPU disconnected).

  The bit number [0] of the function setting KFCS is a predetermined function shared terminal (fifth shared terminal) in the game control microcomputer 560 used as an external maskable interrupt terminal XINT connected to the CPU 56 or the like, or used by the PIP 510 The XINT connection setting indicates whether the input port is P3. In the example shown in FIG. 9B, if the bit value in the bit number [0] of the function setting KFCS is “0”, the external maskable interrupt terminal XINT whose fifth shared terminal is connected to the CPU 56 or the like is set. (CPU connection). On the other hand, if the bit value is “1”, the fifth shared terminal is set for the input port P3 used in the PIP 510 (CPU disconnected).

  The first random number initial setting KRS1 and the second random number initial setting KRS2 stored in the program management area indicate the initial setting of the random number circuit 509. FIG. 10A shows an example of setting contents in the first random number initial setting KRS1. FIG. 10B shows an example of setting contents in the second random number initial setting KRS2.

  The bit number [3] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 is a random number circuit use setting indicating whether to use the random number circuit 509 or not. In the example shown in FIG. 10A, if the bit value in the bit number [3] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 is “0”, the random number circuit 509 is not used (unused), but “1”. "Is set to use the random number circuit 509 (use). In this embodiment, the bit number [3] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 is set to “1”, and the random number circuit 509 is set to be usable.

  The bit number [2] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 uses the random number update clock RGK (see FIG. 13) used for updating the numerical data that becomes the random number value in the random number circuit 509 as the internal system clock SCLK or for the random number. This is a random number update clock setting indicating whether the clock RCLK is divided by two. In the example shown in FIG. 10A, if the bit value in the bit number [2] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 is “0”, the internal system clock SCLK is set to be used as the random number update clock RGK. If it is 1 ″, the random number clock RCLK is divided by two and used as the random number update clock RGK. In this embodiment, the bit number [2] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 is set to “1”, and the random number clock RCLK is divided by two to be used as the random number update clock RGK.

  The bit number [1-0] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 is a random number update rule setting indicating whether or not to change the random number update rule in the random number circuit 509 and the change method in the case of the change. In the example shown in FIG. 10A, if the bit value in the bit number [1-0] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 is “00”, the random number update rule is not changed, and if it is “01”. The setting for changing the random number update rule by software is made after the second round, and if it is “10”, the random number update rule is automatically changed after the second round.

  The bit number [3-2] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 is set to a fixed bit value “00”. Note that “B” of “00B” in FIG. 10B indicates binary display. The bit number [1-0] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 indicates the setting relating to the start value in the numerical data that becomes the random value in the random number circuit 509. In the example shown in FIG. 10B, if the bit value in the bit number [1] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 is “0”, the start value is set to a predetermined default value 0000H, while “1”. In this case, a value based on the ID number, which is unique identification information assigned to each game control microcomputer 560, is set as the start value. In the example shown in FIG. 10B, if the bit value in the bit number [0] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 is “0”, the start value is not changed every time the system is reset. When it is 1 ″, the start value is changed every time the system is reset. When the start value is set to a value based on the ID number, a part or all of the operations such as a predetermined scramble process for the ID number and the addition / subtraction / multiplication / division using the ID number are performed. It is only necessary to execute and use the calculated value as the start value. When the bit value [0] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 is “1”, the count value in a predetermined free-run counter (for example, the free-run counter 554A shown in FIG. 14) every system reset. A value set based on the above may be used as the start value. Further, when the bit values [1] and [0] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 are both “1”, a value set based on the ID number and the count value in the free-run counter is set. It may be used as a start value.

  Note that when two systems (corresponding to the first and second channels) for generating numerical data to be a random number value are provided in the random number circuit 509, the first shown in FIGS. 10 (A) and 10 (B). The bit number [3-0] of the random number initial setting KRS1 and the bit number [3-0] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 are used to indicate the initial setting in the first channel. On the other hand, the bit number [7-4] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 and the bit number [7-4] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 (omitted in FIGS. 10A and 10B), the second It may be used as an indication of the initial setting in the channel.

  Interrupt initial settings KIIS stored in the program management area indicate initial settings related to handling of maskable interrupts generated in the game control microcomputer 560. FIG. 10C shows an example of setting contents in the interrupt initial setting KIIS.

  In the bit number [7-4] of the interrupt initial setting KIIS, the upper 4 bits of the interrupt vector are set. In the bit number [3-0] of the interrupt initial setting KIIS, a combination of maskable interrupt factor priorities is set. In the example shown in FIG. 10C, if any of “00H” to “02H” and “06H” is specified by the bit number [3-0] of the interrupt initial setting KIIS, the maskable interrupt factor from the CTC 508 is determined. A combination of priorities to be given the highest priority is set. On the other hand, if any one of “03H” and “07H” is specified, a combination of priorities that gives the highest priority to the maskable interrupt factor from the random number circuit 509 is set. If either “04H” or “05H” is designated, a combination of priorities with the highest priority given to the maskable interrupt factor from the serial communication circuit 511 is set. Note that even if the priority combination has the highest priority for maskable interrupt factors from the same circuit, if the specified value is different, the type of maskable interrupt factor that has the highest priority, the priority combination in the second or lower order, etc. will differ. ing.

  The security time setting KSES stored in the program management area is the frequency at which an abnormality is detected when monitoring the frequency of the random number clock RCLK, the time of the security mode in which the game control microcomputer 560 shifts to the start of operation, etc. Indicates settings related to (security time). Here, when the operation mode of the game control microcomputer 560 is the security mode, a predetermined security check process is executed to check whether or not the content stored in the ROM 54 has been changed. FIG. 11A shows an example of setting contents in the security time setting KSES.

  Bit number [7-6] of security time setting KSES is a random number clock abnormality detection setting indicating a frequency at which an abnormality is detected when the frequency of random number clock RCLK is monitored. FIG. 11B shows an example of setting contents in the bit number [7-6] of the security time setting KSES. The bit number [7-6] of the security time setting KSES designates a reference value (determination value) at which the frequency of the random number clock RCLK is detected as abnormal based on the frequency of the internal system clock SCLK. Whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the input state of the random number clock RCLK by comparing the input state of the random number clock RCLK with the internal system clock SCLK based on the setting in the bit number [7-6] of the security time setting KSES. It is possible to determine whether. The bit number “5” of the security time setting KSES is set to a fixed bit value “0”.

  The bit number [4-3] of the security time setting KSES indicates a time setting when the security time is extended by a random time every system reset. FIG. 11C shows an example of setting contents in the bit number [4-3] of the security time setting KSES. In the example shown in FIG. 11C, if the bit value in the bit number [4-3] of the security time setting KSES is “00”, the random time extension is not performed. On the other hand, if the bit value is “01”, the short mode is set, and if the bit value is “10”, the long mode is set. Here, when the short mode or the long mode is designated, for example, the count value of the free run counter built in the game control microcomputer 560 is set to a predetermined value provided in the game control microcomputer 560 when a system reset occurs. Store in the built-in register (variable security time register). Then, the security time can be reduced by using the stored value of the variable security time register as it is at the time of initial setting, or by using the value obtained by substituting the stored value into a predetermined arithmetic function (for example, a hash function). What is necessary is just to determine the extension time at the time of extending at random. As an example, when the frequency of the internal system clock SCLK is 6.0 MHz, the extension time is randomly determined in the range of 0 to 680 μs (microseconds) in the short mode, and in the range of 0 to 348, 160 μs in the long mode. The extension time is determined at random. As another example, when the frequency of the internal system clock SCLK is 10.0 MHz, the extension time is randomly determined in the range of 0 to 408 μs in the short mode, and in the range of 0 to 208,896 μs in the long mode. The extension time is determined at random. The variable security time register only needs to be backed up using a backup power source common to the backup location on the main board 31, such as a backup area in the RAM 55 of the game control microcomputer 560. Alternatively, the variable security time register may be backed up by a power source provided separately from a backup power source used for a backup area in the RAM 55 or the like. In this way, the variable security time register is backed up by the backup power supply, so that the stored value of the variable security time register is saved for a predetermined period even when the power supply is stopped. The timing at which the count value in the free-run counter is read and stored in the variable security time register is not limited to when a system reset occurs, but may be any predetermined timing. Alternatively, the free run counter may be backed up by a backup power source, and the extension time for extending the security time using the stored value read from the free run counter at the initial setting may be determined at random.

  Further, the short mode or the long mode is set by the bit value in the bit number [4-3] of the security time setting KSES, and the bit value in the bit number [2-0] of the security time setting KSES is set to other than “000”. Thus, it is possible to set an extension time to be added to the fixed time. In this case, both the extension time corresponding to the bit value in the bit number [2-0] and the extension time randomly determined based on the bit value in the bit number [4-3] are fixed times. By adding, the security time during which the game control microcomputer 560 is in the security mode is determined.

  The external bus interface 501 provided in the game control microcomputer 560 shown in FIG. 6 includes an interface function between the external bus and the internal bus of the chip constituting the game control microcomputer 560, an address bus, a data bus, and each control signal. A bus interface having a direction control function and the like. For example, the external bus interface 501 is connected to an external memory or an external input / output device externally attached to the game control microcomputer 560, and an address signal, a data signal, various control signals, etc. are connected to these external devices. As long as it transmits and receives. In this embodiment, the external bus interface 501 includes an internal resource access control circuit 501A.

  The internal resource access control circuit 501A controls access to the internal data of the game control microcomputer 560 from an external device via the external bus interface 501, and for example, a game control program (game control processing program) stored in the ROM 54 And a circuit for limiting inappropriate external reading of internal data such as fixed data. Here, a circuit analysis device such as an in-circuit emulator (ICE; InCircuit Emulator) may be connected to the external bus interface 501 as an external device.

  As an example, switching between prohibiting or permitting reading of stored data in the ROM 54 can be switched according to the contents of the header KHDR stored in the program management area of the ROM 54. For example, when the header KHDR is bus output mask invalid data, the ROM 54 can be read by an external device, and external reading of internal data is permitted. On the other hand, when the header KHDR is the bus output mask valid data, the ROM 54 from the external device by masking the address bus output, data bus output, and control signal output in the external bus interface 501, for example. Is disabled, and external reading of internal data is prohibited. In this case, when reading of internal data is requested from an external device connected to the external bus interface 501, a predetermined fixed value is output so that the internal data cannot be read from the external device. . Further, when the header KHDR is ROM read prohibition data, the ROM 54 itself may not be read, and reading of stored data in the ROM 54 may be prevented. For example, in a ROM at the manufacturing stage, by making the header KHDR ROM read prohibition data, the ROM itself is made unreadable, and if it is a development ROM, bus output mask invalid data is written in the header KHDR, Allows verification of internal data by an external device. On the other hand, if the ROM for mass production is used, the bus output mask valid data is written in the header KHDR, so that the ROM 54 can be read in the game control microcomputer 560 by the CPU 56 or the like, while the external device It is only necessary to prevent the ROM 54 from being read.

  As another example, the internal resource access control circuit 501A is requested by an external device connected to the external bus interface 501 to read out internal data of the game control microcomputer 560 such as all or a part of data stored in the ROM 54. Detect that. When this read request is detected, the internal resource access control circuit 501A determines whether or not to permit reading of internal data of the game control microcomputer 560. For example, it is assumed that all or part of the stored data in the ROM 54 is encrypted. In this case, if the read request from the external device is a read request for an encryption processing program or key data stored in the ROM 54, the internal resource access control circuit 501A rejects the read request, and the game control micro Reading of internal data of the computer 560 is prohibited. In the external bus interface 501, a switch element is provided between the output port from which data stored in the ROM 54 is output and the internal bus. When the internal resource access control circuit 501 A prohibits reading of the internal data, the switch element May be controlled to be turned off. As described above, the internal resource access control circuit 501A reads the internal data depending on whether or not the read request from the external device requests reading of predetermined internal data (for example, a predetermined area of the ROM 54). You may make it determine whether it prohibits or permits.

  Alternatively, the internal resource access control circuit 501A may determine whether or not a predetermined authentication code has been input from an external device when detecting a read request for internal data. In this case, for example, a predetermined code pattern serving as an authentication code may be stored in advance in the internal resource access control circuit 501A or in a predetermined area of the ROM 54. When an authentication code is input from an external device, the authentication code is compared with an internally stored authentication code. If they match, a read request is accepted and the internal data of the game control microcomputer 560 is read. To give permission. On the other hand, if the authentication code input from the external device does not match the authentication code stored internally, the read request is rejected and reading of the internal data of the game control microcomputer 560 is prohibited. As described above, the internal resource access control circuit 501A determines whether to prohibit or permit reading of the internal data depending on whether or not the authentication code input from the external device matches the authentication code stored internally. You may make it do. As a result, it is possible to read out the internal data of the game control microcomputer 560 using a correct authentication code known in advance by an inspection organization or the like, and properly inspect the validity of the internal data. become.

  As yet another example, a read prohibition flag is provided in the internal resource access control circuit 501A, and reading of the ROM 54 by an external device is prohibited if the read prohibition flag is on. On the other hand, when the read prohibition flag is in the off state, reading of the ROM 54 by the external device is permitted. Here, the read prohibition flag is off in the initial state, but once the read prohibition flag is turned on, the read prohibition flag cannot be cleared and returned to the off state. That's fine. That is, the read prohibition flag can be irreversibly changed from the off state to the on state. For example, the internal resource access control circuit 501A does not have a function of clearing the read prohibition flag to turn it off, and is set so that the read prohibition flag cannot be cleared by any instruction. Just do it. Then, the internal resource access control circuit 501A determines whether or not the read prohibition flag is on when the external device requests to read the internal data of the game control microcomputer 560 such as the data stored in the ROM 54. At this time, if the read prohibition flag is on, the read request from the external device is rejected, and reading of the internal data of the game control microcomputer 560 is prohibited. On the other hand, if the reading prohibition flag is off, the reading request from the external device is accepted and reading of the internal data of the game control microcomputer 560 is permitted. With such a configuration, a provider who creates a game control processing program for game control and stores it in the ROM 54 can load a program that has been debugged from the ROM 54 with the read prohibition flag turned off from the external device. Can be read. Then, when shipping after the debugging work is completed, by setting the read prohibition flag to the on state, external reading of the ROM 54 can be restricted thereafter, and by the user of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like Reading of the ROM 54 can be prevented. As described above, the internal resource access control circuit 501A may determine whether to prohibit or permit reading of internal data depending on whether an internal flag such as a read prohibition flag is off or on. .

  Note that the read prohibition flag is not set irreversibly but can be changed from the on state to the off state, while the read prohibition flag is changed from the on state to the off state to permit reading of internal data. In this case, external reading of the ROM 54 may be restricted by erasing the data stored in the ROM 54 (for example, flash erasure).

  The clock circuit 502 included in the game control microcomputer 560 is a circuit that generates the internal system clock SCLK by, for example, dividing the oscillation signal input to the control external clock terminal EXC by two. In this embodiment, the control clock CCLK generated by the control clock generation circuit 111 is input to the control external clock terminal EXC. The internal system clock SCLK generated by the clock circuit 502 is supplied to various circuits such as the CPU 56 that control the progress of the game in the game control microcomputer 560. The internal system clock SCLK is also supplied to the random number circuit 509 and used to monitor the frequency of the random number clock RCLK supplied from the random number clock generation circuit 112. Further, the internal system clock SCLK may be output from the system clock output terminal CLKO connected to the clock circuit 502 to the outside of the game control microcomputer 560. It is desirable that the internal system clock SCLK is not output to the outside of the game control microcomputer 560. As described above, by limiting the external output of the internal system clock SCLK, it becomes difficult to specify the operation cycle of the internal circuit (such as the CPU 56) of the game control microcomputer 560 from the outside, and numerical data that becomes a random value Can be prevented from being specified from the outside when the software is updated by software.

  The unique information storage circuit 503 included in the game control microcomputer 560 is a circuit that stores a plurality of types of unique information that is internal information of the game control microcomputer 560, for example. As an example, the unique information storage circuit 503 stores three types of unique information such as a ROM code, a chip individual number, and an ID number. The ROM 54 code is a 4-byte numerical value generated from stored data in a predetermined area of the ROM 54, and four numerical values with different generation methods may be prepared. The chip individual number is a 4-byte number assigned when the game control microcomputer 560 is manufactured, and indicates a different value for each chip constituting the game control microcomputer 560. The ID number is an 8-byte number assigned when the game control microcomputer 560 is manufactured, and shows a different numerical value for each chip constituting the game control microcomputer 560. Here, the chip individual number may be read from the user program, while the ID number may be set so as not to be read from the user program. The unique information storage circuit 503 may be included in the ROM 54 by using a predetermined area of the ROM 54, for example. Alternatively, the unique information storage circuit 503 may be included in the CPU 56 by using a built-in register of the CPU 56, for example.

  A reset / interrupt controller 504 provided in the game control microcomputer 560 is for controlling various reset and interrupt requests generated inside and outside the game control microcomputer 560. Resets controlled by the reset / interrupt controller 504 include system resets and user resets. The system reset is a reset that occurs when a low level signal is input to the external system reset terminal XSRST for a certain period. The user reset is a reset that occurs due to a predetermined factor, such as a watchdog timer (WDT) time-out signal is generated or an out-of-designated area travel prohibition (IAT) is generated.

  Interrupts controlled by the reset / interrupt controller 504 include a non-maskable interrupt NMI and a maskable interrupt INT. The non-maskable interrupt NMI is an interrupt that is unconditionally accepted even when the CPU 56 is in an interrupt disabled state, and is an interrupt that is generated when a low level signal is input to the external non-maskable interrupt terminal XNMI (also used as the input port P4) for a certain period. is there. The maskable interrupt INT is an interrupt that can permit / prohibit acceptance of an interrupt request by a setting instruction of the CPU 56, and multiple interrupts can be executed by setting priority. The cause of the maskable interrupt INT is that a low level signal has been input to the external maskable interrupt terminal XINT (also used as the input port P3) for a certain period of time, a time-out has occurred in the timer circuit included in the CTC 508, A plurality of types of interrupt factors are determined in advance, such as the occurrence of an interrupt factor due to data reception or data transmission in the serial communication circuit 511 and the occurrence of an interrupt factor due to fetching of numerical data as a random value in the random number circuit 509. It only has to be done.

  The reset / interrupt controller 504 includes an interrupt mask register IMR (address 2028H), an interrupt wait monitor register IRR (address 2029H), among interrupted registers included in the game control microcomputer 560 as shown in FIG. The monitor register ISR (address 202AH), the internal information register CIF (address 208CH), etc. are used to control interrupts and manage resets. The interrupt mask register IMR is a register that sets what is used and what is not used among maskable interrupts INT caused by a plurality of different factors. The interrupt wait monitor register IRR is a register for confirming the generation state of a maskable interrupt request signal for each maskable interrupt factor set by the interrupt initial setting KIIS. The in-interrupt monitor register ISR is a register for confirming the processing state of the maskable interrupt request signal for each maskable interrupt factor set by the interrupt initial setting KIIS. The internal information register CIF is a register for managing the reset factor generated immediately before and recording the frequency abnormality of the random number clock RCLK.

  FIG. 12A shows a configuration example of the internal information register CIF. FIG. 12B shows an example of setting contents in each bit of the internal information data stored in the internal information register CIF. The internal information data CIF4 stored in the bit number [4] of the internal information register CIF is a random number clock abnormality instruction indicating the presence or absence of a frequency abnormality in the random number clock RCLK. In the example shown in FIG. 12B, when the frequency abnormality of the random number clock RCLK is not detected, the bit value of the internal information data CIF4 becomes “0”, whereas when the frequency abnormality is detected, the bit value is “1”. The internal information data CIF2 stored in the bit number [2] of the internal information register CIF is a system reset instruction indicating whether or not the reset factor generated immediately before is a system reset. In the example shown in FIG. 12B, when the immediately preceding reset factor is not a system reset (system reset has not occurred), the bit value of the internal information data CIF2 is “0”, whereas when the system reset is a system reset (system reset) When the reset occurs), the bit value becomes “1”. As a first example of the operation using the internal information data CIF2, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 checks the bit value of the internal information data CIF2 when the power is turned on, and the bit value is “1” (set). If not, it is determined that the power is not turned on normally. At this time, for example, by transmitting a predetermined effect control command to the effect control board 80, an illegal signal input action is performed aiming at a big hit gaming state immediately after power-on in the pachinko gaming machine 1. You may notify that there exists possibility with a production | presentation apparatus etc. Further, as a second example of the operation using the internal information data CIF2, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 notifies the probability variation state only when the power is turned on and does not inform the probability variation state normally, the game control microcomputer 560 when the power is turned on. The CPU 56 or the like may check the bit value of the internal information data CIF2, and if the bit value is not “1” (set), the gaming state may not be notified.

  The internal information data CIF1 stored in the bit number [1] of the internal information register CIF is a WDT timeout instruction indicating whether or not the reset factor generated immediately before is a user reset due to a watchdog timer (WDT) timeout. . In the example shown in FIG. 12B, when the previous reset factor is not a user reset due to a watchdog timer timeout (timeout has not occurred), the bit value of the internal information data CIF1 becomes “0”, while the watchdog When a user reset is caused by a timer timeout (timeout occurs), the bit value becomes “1”. The internal information data CIF0 stored in the bit number [0] of the internal information register CIF is an IAT generation instruction indicating whether or not the reset factor generated immediately before is a user reset due to prohibition of travel outside the designated area (IAT). . In the example shown in FIG. 12B, when the reset factor immediately before is not a user reset due to the occurrence of travel outside the designated area (no IAT occurrence), the bit value of the internal information data CIF0 is “0”, while When the user reset is caused by the occurrence of out-of-area travel (the occurrence of IAT), the bit value becomes “1”.

  The CPU 56 included in the game control microcomputer 560 executes a user program (game control processing program for game control) based on the control code read from the ROM 54, thereby executing a game control in the pachinko gaming machine 1. CPU. When such game control is executed, the CPU 56 temporarily stores fixed data from the ROM 54, the CPU 56 temporarily stores various data in the RAM 55, and temporarily stores the data in the RAM 55. The CPU 56 temporarily stores the data in the RAM 55. The CPU 56 receives a variety of signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 560 via the external bus interface 501, the PIP 510, the serial communication circuit 511, and the like. A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 560 via the external bus interface 501 and the serial communication circuit 511 is also performed.

  As described above, in the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

  The ROM 54 provided in the game control microcomputer 560 stores a control code indicating a user program (game control processing program for game control), fixed data, and the like. The ROM 54 stores a security check program 54A. The CPU 56 reads the security check program 54A stored in the ROM 54 when the game control microcomputer 560 shifts to the security mode in response to the power-on of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the occurrence of a system reset. A security check process is executed to check whether or not the change has been made. The security check program 54A may be stored in a built-in memory different from the ROM 54. Further, the security check program 54A may correspond to a security check process for inspecting the storage content of an external memory externally attached to the game control microcomputer 560 via the external bus interface 501, for example.

  The RAM 55 provided in the game control microcomputer 560 provides a work area for game control. Here, at least a part of the RAM 55 may be a backup RAM that is backed up by a backup power source created in the power supply board 910. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, at least a part of the contents of the RAM 55 is stored for a predetermined period.

  The CTC 508 provided in the game control microcomputer 560 includes, for example, three channels (PTC0 to PTC2) of 8-bit programmable timers, and includes a timer circuit capable of generating a real-time interrupt and measuring time. Each programmable timer PTC0-PTC2 has a timer value that is updated in response to a change in the count clock signal generated based on the internal system clock SCLK (for example, a falling timing that changes from a high level to a low level). If it is. The CTC 508 may incorporate, for example, an 8-bit programmable counter with 4 channels (PCC0 to PCC3). Each of the programmable counters PCC0 to PCC3 only needs to have its count value updated in response to a signal change of the internal system clock SCLK or occurrence of a timeout in any of the programmable counters PCC0 to PCC3. The CTC 508 may include a free-run counter used to randomly determine an extension time (variable setting time) for extending the security time for each system reset. Alternatively, such a free-run counter may be included in an internal circuit of the game control microcomputer 560 different from the CTC 508, for example, a backup area of the RAM 55.

  A random number circuit 509 provided in the game control microcomputer 560 is a circuit that generates numerical data that is a random value having a predetermined update range, such as a 16-bit random number. In this embodiment, the hardware random number generated by the random number circuit 509 is used as a big hit determination random number (random R) for determining whether or not to make a big hit. Note that the CPU 56 uses the random counter different from the random number circuit 509 based on the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 509 to process or update various numerical data by software so that all the random values used in the game can be obtained. Alternatively, numerical data indicating a part may be counted. Alternatively, the CPU 56 may count (update) a part of numerical data indicating a random value such as a big hit determination random number by software without using the random number circuit 509. As an example, numerical data extracted by the CPU 56 from the random number circuit 509 serving as hardware is processed by software to update the numerical data indicating the random number for jackpot determination (random R), and other random values (for example, The numerical data indicating the jackpot type determination random number, the variation pattern type determination random number, and the variation pattern determination random number) may be updated by software using the random counter or the like.

  FIG. 13 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the random number circuit 509. As shown in FIG. 13, the random number circuit 509 includes a frequency monitoring circuit 551, a clock flip-flop 552, a random number generation circuit 553, a start value setting circuit 554, a free-run counter 554A, a random number sequence change circuit 555, and a random number sequence change setting circuit. 556, latch flip-flops 557A and 557B, random number latch selectors 558A and 558B, and random number value registers 559A and 559B. Note that the random value register 559A and the random value register 559B are a random value register R1D (address 2038H-2039H) and a random value register R2D included in the built-in register of the game control microcomputer 560 as shown in FIG. (Addresses 203AH-203BH).

  The frequency monitoring circuit 551 is a circuit for monitoring the input state of the random number clock RCLK generated by the random number clock generation circuit 112 to the random number circuit 509 and detecting the occurrence of an abnormality. The frequency monitoring circuit 551 monitors, for example, an oscillation signal input to the random number external clock terminal ERC, and compares it with the internal system clock SCLK to set contents in the bit number [7-6] of the security time setting KSES (see FIG. 11 (B)), the bit number [4] of the internal information register CIF is set to “1”. In this embodiment, the random number clock RCLK generated by the random number clock generation circuit 112 is input to the random number external clock terminal ERC.

  The clock flip-flop 552 is configured using, for example, a D-type flip-flop, and the random number clock RCLK from the random number external clock terminal ERC is input to the clock terminal CK. Further, in the clock flip-flop 552, the negative phase output terminal (inverted output terminal) Q bar is connected to the D input terminal. The random number update clock RGK is output from the positive phase output terminal (non-inverted output terminal) Q, while the latch clock RC0 is output from the negative phase output terminal (inverted output terminal) Q bar. In this case, when the signal state of the random number clock RCLK input to the clock terminal CK changes a predetermined state, the clock flip-flop 552 has a positive phase output terminal (non-inverted output terminal) Q and a negative phase output terminal ( Inverted output terminal) Changes the signal state in the output signal from the Q bar. For example, the clock flip-flop 552 rises when the signal state of the random number clock RCLK changes from a low level to a high level, or rises when the signal state of the random number clock RCLK changes from a high level to a low level. The input signal at the D input terminal is captured at any one of the falling timings. At this time, from the positive phase output terminal (non-inverted output terminal) Q, the input signal captured at the D input terminal is output without being inverted, while the negative phase output terminal (inverted output terminal) Q bar is output. From the input signal captured by the D input terminal is inverted and output. Thus, the random number update clock RGK having an oscillation frequency (for example, 10 MHz) that is ½ of the oscillation frequency (for example, 20 MHz) of the random number clock RCLK from the positive phase output terminal (non-inverted output terminal) Q of the clock flip-flop 552. Is output from the negative phase output terminal (inverted output terminal) Q bar, that is, the reverse phase signal (inverted signal) of the random number update clock RGK, that is, the same frequency as the random number update clock RGK and the phase of the random number update clock RGK is A different latch clock RC0 is output by (= 180 °).

  The random number update clock RGK output from the clock flip-flop 552 is input to the clock terminal of the random number generation circuit 553 and used for incrementing the count value in the random number generation circuit 553. The latch clock RC0 output from the clock flip-flop 552 is branched into the latch clock RC1 and the latch clock RC2 at the branch point BR1. Therefore, the latch clock RC1 and the latch clock RC2 have the same oscillation frequency, and the signal state changes with a common cycle. Here, examples of changes in the signal state in the latch clock RC1 and the latch clock RC2 include a rising edge that changes from a low level to a high level and a falling edge that changes from a high level to a low level. The latch clock RC1 is input to the clock terminal CK of the latch flip-flop 557A, and becomes a random number acquisition clock used to generate the start winning latch signal SL1. The latch clock RC2 is input to the clock terminal CK of the latch flip-flop 557B and becomes a random number acquisition clock used to generate the start winning latch signal SL2.

  Here, the oscillation frequency of the random number clock RCLK and the oscillation frequency of the control clock CCLK generated by the control clock generation circuit 111 are different from each other, and one of the oscillation frequencies is the other. It is never an integral multiple of the oscillation frequency. As an example, while the oscillation frequency of the control clock CCLK is 11.0 MHz, the oscillation frequency of the random number clock RCLK may be 9.7 MHz. Therefore, both the random number update clock RGK and the latch clocks RC1 and RC2 are oscillation signals whose signal states change at a different period from the control clock CCLK supplied to the CPU 56. In other words, the clock flip-flop 552 is based on the random number clock RCLK generated by the random number clock generation circuit 112, and the random number update clock RGK for updating the count value and the latch clock that is used as a plurality of random number acquisition clocks. As RC1 and RC2, oscillation signals whose signal states change with a period different from the control clock CCLK and the internal system clock SCLK (the control clock CCLK divided by two) are generated.

  The random number generation circuit 553 is composed of, for example, a 16-bit counter and the like, based on an input such as a random number update clock RGK output from the clock flip-flop 552, from a predetermined initial value within a predetermined range in which numerical data can be updated. It is a circuit that cyclically updates to a predetermined final value. For example, the random number generation circuit 553 responds to the falling edge of the random number update clock RGK, which is an input signal to a predetermined clock terminal, from the initial value set within the range from “0” to “65535” to “65535”. The numerical data is counted up so that “1” is added to “1”. Then, after counting up to “65535”, the numerical data is updated cyclically by counting up from “0” to a numerical value that becomes a final value that is 1 smaller than the initial value.

  The start value setting circuit 554 sets the start value in the count value generated by the random number generation circuit 553 according to the bit value (see FIG. 10B) in the bit number [1-0] of the second random number initial setting KRS2. Set. For example, the start value setting circuit 554 sets the start value to the default value “0000H” if the bit number [1-0] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 is “00”, and if it is “10”. A value based on the ID number is set. If “01”, the value is set based on the count value in the free-run counter 554A which is changed every time the system is reset. Set to a value based on the count value. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 13, a free-run counter 554A is built in the random number circuit 509. When the start value is changed at every system reset, the count value of the free-run counter 554A is used as it is at the initial setting, or the count value is substituted into a predetermined arithmetic function (for example, a hash function). The start value may be determined at random by using the obtained value. The free-run counter 554A only needs to be backed up using a backup power source common to the backup location on the main board 31, such as a backup area in the RAM 55 of the game control microcomputer 560. Alternatively, the free-run counter 554A may be backed up by a power source provided separately from a backup power source used for a backup area in the RAM 55 or the like. In this way, the free-run counter 554A is backed up by the backup power source, so that the count value in the free-run counter 554A is stored for a predetermined period even when the power supply is stopped.

  The free-run counter 554A is not limited to the one backed up by the backup power supply. For example, when a system reset occurs, the count value of the free-run counter 554A is stored in a predetermined built-in register (for example, a random number start value register). May be backed up by a backup power source. Then, the initial value is randomly determined by using the stored value of the random number start value register as it is or by using the value obtained by substituting the stored value into a predetermined arithmetic function. Also good. In this case, the timing at which the count value in the free-run counter 554A is read and stored in the random number start value register is not limited to when a system reset occurs, but may be any predetermined timing. The free-run counter 554A may be a dedicated free-run counter built in the random number circuit 509 and used to randomly determine the start value of numerical data. That is, the free-run counter 554A may be provided as a separate configuration from the free-run counter used for random determination of the extension time when extending the security time. Alternatively, as a free-run counter 554A, a free-run counter incorporated in the game control microcomputer 560 but provided outside the random number circuit 509 and used for random determination of the extension time when extending the security time. A common one may be used. In this case, in the process of determining the start value of the numerical data and the process of randomly determining the extension time in the security time, for example, the calculation function for substituting the count value is different from each other, or one of the determinations is made In the process, the count value is used as it is, while in the other determination process, the value obtained by substituting the count value into a predetermined arithmetic function is used. It may be different.

  Thus, the free-run counter 554A is not limited to the one built in the random number circuit 509, and may be included in the CTC 508, for example. Alternatively, it may be included in an internal circuit of the game control microcomputer 560 different from the CTC 508, for example, a backup area of the RAM 55. In addition, the free-run counter 554A may be the same counter as the free-run counter used for randomly determining the extension time for extending the security time for each system reset, or provided separately. It may be a counter.

  The random number sequence change circuit 555 is a circuit that allows the permutation of numerical data generated by the random number generation circuit 553 to be changed to a permutation according to a predetermined random number update rule. For example, the random number sequence change circuit 555 executes bit scramble processing such as bit replacement or transposition in numerical data output from the random number generation circuit 553. Further, the random number sequence change circuit 555 can change the permutation of numerical data, for example, by changing a bit scramble key or a bit scramble table used for bit scramble processing.

  The random number sequence change setting circuit 556 changes the random number update rule in the random number sequence change circuit 555 according to the bit value (see FIG. 10A) in the bit number [1-0] of the first random number initial setting KRS1. It is a circuit for setting. For example, if the bit number [1-0] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 is “00”, the random number sequence change setting circuit 556 sets the random number update rule not to change after the second round, while “01” If so, the random number update rule is changed in response to a change request by software after the second round, and if it is “10”, the random number update rule is automatically changed.

  When the random number update circuit 556 changes the random number update rule by software in response to the bit number [1-0] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 being “01”, FIG. Among the built-in registers included in the game control microcomputer 560 as shown, the random number update rule RDSC (address 2034H) is used to control the change of the random number update rule. FIG. 14A shows a configuration example of the random number sequence change register RDSC. FIG. 14B shows an example of setting contents in each bit of the random number sequence change request data stored in the random number sequence change register RDSC. The random number sequence change request data RDSC0 stored in the bit number [0] of the random number sequence change register RDSC indicates the presence / absence of a random number sequence change request when the random number update rule is changed by software. In the example shown in FIG. 14B, when there is no random number sequence change request by software, the bit value of the random number sequence change request data RDSC0 is “0”, while when there is a random number sequence change request, The bit value is “1”.

  FIG. 15 shows an operation example when the random number update rule is changed by software. In this case, when the count value permutation RCN output from the random number generation circuit 553 is cyclically updated from a predetermined initial value to a predetermined final value, the response is that the random number sequence change request data RDSC0 is “1”. Then, change the random number update rule. In the operation example shown in FIG. 15, the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555 is “0 → 1 →... → 65535”. Thereafter, it is assumed that “1” is written to the bit number [0] of the random number sequence change register RDSC at a predetermined timing by the CPU 56 executing the user program stored in the ROM 54.

  In response to the bit number [1-0] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 being “01”, the random number sequence change setting circuit 556 reads the random number sequence change request data RDSC0 and the bit value is “1”. In response to "," a setting for changing the random number update rule is made. At this time, the random number sequence change setting circuit 556, according to the count value permutation RCN output from the random number generation circuit 553 reaching a predetermined final value, for example, any one of a plurality of types of random number update rules prepared in advance. The random number update rule is changed by selecting. In the operation example shown in FIG. 15, the random number sequence change circuit 555 outputs numerical data “65535” corresponding to the final value in the count value permutation RCN output from the random number generation circuit 553, and then responds to the random number sequence change request data RDSC0. Change the random number update rule. Thereafter, the random number sequence change circuit 555 outputs “65535 → 65534 →... → 0” as the random number sequence RSN according to the changed random number update rule. The random number sequence change register RDSC is initialized when the random number sequence change setting circuit 556 reads the random number sequence change request data RDSC0. Therefore, until the bit value “1” is written to the bit number [0] of the random number sequence change register RDSC again, the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555 is “65535 → 65534 →... → 0”. Become.

  When the CPU 56 executes the user program stored in the ROM 54 and the bit value “1” is written again to the bit number [0] of the random number sequence change register RDSC, the random number update rule is changed again. In the operation example shown in FIG. 15, when the random number sequence change circuit 555 outputs the numerical data “0” corresponding to the final value in the random number sequence RSN, the bit value “1” is written as the random number sequence change request data RDSC0. Change the random number update rule accordingly. Thereafter, the random number sequence changing circuit 555 outputs “0 → 2 →... → 65534 → 1 →... → 65535” as the random number sequence RSN according to the changed random number update rule.

  FIG. 16 shows an operation example when the random number update rule is automatically changed. In this case, in response to the count value permutation RCN output from the random number generation circuit 553 being cyclically updated from a predetermined initial value to a predetermined final value, the random number sequence change setting circuit 556 automatically changes the random number update rule. To change. In the operation example shown in FIG. 16, the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555 first is “0 → 1 →... → 65535”.

  When the random number sequence RSN output from the random number change circuit 555 reaches a predetermined final value, the random number sequence change setting circuit 556 follows a predetermined order from among a plurality of types of update rules prepared in advance. The update rule may be changed by selecting the update rule. Alternatively, the random number sequence change setting circuit 556 may change the update rule by selecting an arbitrary update rule from among a plurality of types of update rules. In the operation example shown in FIG. 16, the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555 becomes “65535 → 65534 →. Thereafter, due to the second change in the random number update rule, the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555 becomes “0 → 2 →... → 65534 → 1 →. In the operation example illustrated in FIG. 16, the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555 is “65534 → 0 →... → 32768” due to the third change in the random number update rule. When the fourth random number update rule change is performed, the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555 becomes “16383 → 49151 →... → 49150”. When the fifth random number update rule change is performed, the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555 becomes “4 → 3 →... → 465553”.

  Thus, the random number sequence change circuit 555 changes the count value permutation RCN output from the random number generation circuit 553 based on the random number update rule determined in advance by the setting of the random number sequence change setting circuit 556, so that the numerical value A random number sequence RSN in which data is updated by a predetermined procedure can be output.

  Each of the latch flip-flops 557A and 557B is configured using, for example, a D-type flip-flop. In the latch flip-flop 557A, a wiring from the input port P0 included in the PIP 510 is connected to the D input terminal, and a wiring for transmitting the latch clock RC1 is connected to the clock terminal CK. In this embodiment, the first start winning signal SS1 from the first start port switch 13a is input to the input port P0. The latch flip-flop 557A takes in the first start winning signal SS1 in response to the falling edge of the latch clock RC1, and outputs it as the start winning latch signal SL1. Accordingly, in the latch flip-flop 557A, the first start winning signal SS1 is output as the start winning latch signal SL1 in synchronization with the falling edge of the latch clock RC1. In the latch flip-flop 557B, a wiring from the input port P1 included in the PIP 510 is connected to the D input terminal, and a wiring for transmitting the latch clock RC2 is connected to the clock terminal CK. In this embodiment, the second start winning signal SS2 from the second start port switch 14a is input to the input port P1. The latch flip-flop 557B takes in the second start winning signal SS2 in response to the falling edge of the latch clock RC2, and outputs it as the start winning latch signal SL2. As a result, the latch flip-flop 557B outputs the second start winning signal SS2 as the start winning latch signal SL2 in synchronization with the falling edge of the latch clock RC2.

  The first start winning signal SS1 and the second start winning signal SS2 are not limited to those directly transmitted from the first start port switch 13a and the second start port switch 14a. As an example, the time when the output signal from the first start port switch 13a and the output signal from the second start port switch 14a are in the on state is measured, and the measured time becomes a predetermined time (for example, 3 ms). Sometimes, a timer circuit for outputting the first start winning signal SS1 and the second starting winning signal SS2 may be provided.

  The random number latch selector 558A is a circuit that takes in the start winning latch signal SL1 transmitted from the latch flip-flop 557A and the random number latch request signal by software, and selectively outputs one as the random number latch signal LL1. The random number latch selector 558B is a circuit that takes in the start winning latch signal SL2 transmitted from the latch flip-flop 557B and the random number latch request signal by software, and selectively outputs one as the random number latch signal LL1. The random number latch selector 558A and the random number latch selector 558B are a built-in register included in the game control microcomputer 560 as shown in FIG. (Address 2030H) is used to control the output of the random number latch signal LL1 and the random number latch signal LL2. The random value acquisition register RDLT is a register used for acquiring numerical data in the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555 into the random value register 559A or the random value register 559B by software. The random number latch selection register RDLS receives the numerical data in the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555 into the random number value register 559A or the random number value register 559B by software, or by signal input to the input ports P0 and P1. It is a register indicating a fetching method of fetching.

  FIG. 17A shows a configuration example of the random value fetch register RDLT. FIG. 17B shows an example of the setting contents in each bit of the random value take-in designation data stored in the random value take-in register RDLT. The random value acquisition specification data RDLT1 stored in the bit number [1] of the random value acquisition register RDLT indicates whether or not the random value acquisition specification for the random value register 559B serving as the random value register R2D is present. In the example shown in FIG. 17B, when there is no specification of random number acquisition to the random number register R2D by software, the bit value of the random value acquisition specification data RDLT1 is “0”, while the random value acquisition is not performed. The bit value is “1” when an instruction is included. The random value acquisition specification data RDLT0 stored in the bit number [0] of the random value acquisition register RDLT indicates whether or not the random value acquisition specification is specified for the random value register 559A serving as the random value register R1D. In the example shown in FIG. 17B, when there is no specification of random number acquisition to the random value register R1D by software, the bit value of the random value acquisition specification data RDLT0 is “0”, while the random value acquisition is not performed. The bit value is “1” when an instruction is included.

  FIG. 18A shows a configuration example of the random number latch selection register RDLS. FIG. 18B shows an example of setting contents in each bit of the random number latch selection data stored in the random number latch selection register RDLS. The random number latch selection data RDLS1 stored in the bit number [1] of the random number latch selection register RDLS indicates a method of taking in the random number value register 559B serving as the random number value register R2D. In the example shown in FIG. 18B, when the numerical value data that becomes the random number value is loaded into the random number value register R2D in response to the writing of the random number value loading designation data RDLT1 by the software, the bit value of the random number latch selection data RDLS1 is set to “ 0 ”. On the other hand, when the numerical value data to be a random number value is taken into the random value register R2D in response to the signal input to the input port P1, the bit value of the random number latch selection data RDLS1 is set to “1”. The random number latch selection data RDLS0 stored in the bit number [0] of the random number latch selection register RDLS indicates a method of taking in the random number value register 559A serving as the random number value register R1D. In the example shown in FIG. 18B, when the numerical data that becomes the random number value is loaded into the random value register R1D in response to the writing of the random value fetch designation data RDLT0 by software, the bit value of the random number latch selection data RDLS0 is set to “ 0 ”. On the other hand, when the numerical value data to be a random number value is taken into the random value register R1D in response to the signal input to the input port P0, the bit value of the random number latch selection data RDLS0 is set to “1”.

  The random value registers 559A and 559B are registers for storing numerical data in the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence changing circuit 555 as random number values. FIGS. 19A and 19B show a configuration example of a random value register 559A serving as the random value register R1D. FIG. 19A shows the lower byte R1D (L) of the random value register R1D, and FIG. 19B shows the upper byte R1D (H) of the random value register R1D. FIGS. 19C and 19D show a configuration example of a random value register 559B serving as the random value register R2D. FIG. 19C shows the lower byte R2D (L) of the random value register R2D, and FIG. 19D shows the upper byte R2D (H) of the random value register R2D. Each of the random value registers 559A and 559B is a 16-bit (2-byte) register and can store a 16-bit random value.

  The random value register 559A takes in the numerical data in the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555 as a random value in response to the random number latch signal LL1 supplied from the random number latch selector 558A being turned on. Store with. When the register read signal RRS1 supplied from the CPU 56 is turned on, the random value register 559A is in a readable (enable) state and outputs the stored numerical data to an internal bus or the like. On the other hand, when the register read signal RRS1 is in the off state, the same value (for example, “65535H” or the like) is always output, and the reading is disabled (disabled). Further, the random value register 559A may be in a state in which the register read signal RRS1 cannot be received when the random number latch signal LL1 is in the ON state. Further, the random number register 559A may be configured to be in a state in which the random number latch signal LL1 cannot be received when the register read signal RRS1 is in the on state before the random number latch signal LL1 is in the on state. Good.

  The random value register 559B takes in the numerical data in the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555 as a random value in response to the random number latch signal LL2 supplied from the random number latch selector 558B being turned on. Store with. When the register read signal RRS2 supplied from the CPU 56 is turned on, the random value register 559B is in a readable (enable) state and outputs stored numerical data to an internal bus or the like. On the other hand, when the register read signal RRS2 is in the OFF state, the same value (for example, “65535H” or the like) is always output, and the reading is disabled (disabled). Further, the random value register 559B may be in a state in which the register read signal RRS2 cannot be received when the random number latch signal LL2 is in the ON state. Further, the random value register 559B may be configured to be in a state in which the random number latch signal LL2 cannot be received when the register read signal RRS2 is in the on state before the random number latch signal LL2 is in the on state. Good.

  The random value register 559A and the random value register 559B are a random number latch flag register RDFM (address 2033H) and a random number interrupt control register RDIC (of the built-in registers included in the game control microcomputer 560 as shown in FIG. 8B). Address 2031H) and enable operation management and interrupt control at the time of random number latching. The random number latch flag register RDFM is a register for storing a random number latch flag indicating whether or not numerical data to be a random number value is latched corresponding to each of the random number value register 559A and the random number value register 559B. For example, in the random number latch flag register RDFM, data indicating the state (ON or OFF) of the random number latch flag corresponding to each of the random number value register 559A and the random number value register 559B is stored, and numerical values are stored in the random number value register 559A and the random number value register 559B. When the data is fetched and stored, the corresponding random number latch flag is turned on and storage of new numerical data is restricted, while the numerical data stored in the random value register 559A or the random value register 559B is read. The corresponding random number latch flag is turned off, and storage of new numerical data is permitted. The random number interrupt control register RDIC is a register that sets permission / prohibition of an interrupt that occurs when numerical data that becomes a random value is latched in the random value register 559A or the random value register 559B.

  FIG. 20A shows a configuration example of the random number latch flag register RDFM. FIG. 20B shows an example of setting contents in each bit of the random number latch flag data stored in the random number latch flag register RDFM. The random number latch flag data RDFM1 stored in the bit number [1] of the random number latch flag register RDFM becomes a random number latch flag indicating whether or not numerical data has been taken into the random number value register 559B serving as the random number value register R2D. In the example shown in FIG. 20B, when the numerical value data is not taken into the random number value register R2D (no random number value is taken), the bit value of the random number latch flag data RDFM1 becomes “0” and the random number latch flag is set. On the other hand, when the numerical data is fetched (with random number fetching), the bit value becomes “1” and the random number latch flag is set to the on state while clearing to the off state. The random number latch flag data RDFM0 stored in the bit number [0] of the random number latch flag register RDFM becomes a random number latch flag indicating whether or not numerical data has been taken into the random number value register 559A serving as the random number value register R1D. In the example shown in FIG. 20B, when the numerical value data is not taken into the random value register R1D (no random value is taken), the bit value of the random number latch flag data RDFM0 becomes “0” and the random number latch flag is set. On the other hand, when the numerical data is fetched (with random number fetching), the bit value becomes “1” and the random number latch flag is set to the on state while clearing to the off state.

  When each random number latch flag is on, storage of new numerical data in the random number value register R1D or the random number value register R2D associated with each random number latch flag is restricted (prohibited). That is, when the bit value of the random number latch flag data RDFM0 indicating whether or not the numerical value data is taken into the random number value register R1D is “1” and the random number latch flag is in the ON state, the numerical value stored in the random number value register R1D Data cannot be changed, and storage (import) of new numerical data is restricted (prohibited). Further, when the bit value of the random number latch flag data RDFM1 indicating whether or not the random number value data is taken into the random number value register R2D is “1” and the random number latch flag is in the ON state, the random number value register R2D is stored in the random number value register R2D. Numerical data cannot be changed, and storage (import) of new numerical data is restricted (prohibited). On the other hand, when each random number latch flag is off, storage of new numerical data in the random number value register R1D or the random number value register R2D associated with each random number latch flag is permitted. That is, when the bit value of the random number latch flag data RDFM0 is “0” and the random number latch flag is in the OFF state, the numerical data stored in the random value register R1D can be changed, and new numerical data is stored ( Import) is allowed. Further, when the bit value of the random number latch flag data RDFM1 is “0” and the random number latch flag is in the OFF state, the numerical data stored in the random value register R2D can be changed, and new numerical data can be stored ( Import) is allowed.

  Note that the bit values of the random number latch flag data RDFM0 and the random number latch flag data RDFM1 are set to “0” when the corresponding random number latch flag is cleared to “off”, while being set to “1”. It is not limited to a positive logic type, and it may be a negative logic type that turns on when a corresponding random number latch flag is turned off when it is “1”. That is, each random number latch flag is turned on when numerical data is stored in the corresponding random value register R1D or random value register R2D, and the storage of new numerical data is restricted (prohibited), while the corresponding random value Any register may be used as long as it is turned off when reading of the register R1D or the random number register R2D is performed and storage of new numerical data is permitted.

  FIG. 21A shows a configuration example of the random number interrupt control register RDIC. FIG. 21B shows an example of setting contents in each bit of random number interrupt control data stored in the random number interrupt control register RDIC. The random number interrupt control data RDIC1 stored in the bit number [1] of the random number interrupt control register RDIC permits or prohibits an interrupt that occurs when numerical data is taken into the random number value register 559B serving as the random number value register R2D. Indicates the interrupt control setting for In the example shown in FIG. 21 (B), when interrupting at the time of fetching into the random value register R2D is prohibited (interrupt disabled), the bit value of the random number interrupt control data RDIC1 is set to “0”, while this interrupt is When enabling (interrupt enabled), the bit value is set to “1”. The random number interrupt control data RDIC0 stored in the bit number [0] of the random number interrupt control register RDIC allows or prohibits an interrupt that occurs when numerical data is taken into the random number value register 559A serving as the random number value register R1D. Indicates the interrupt control setting for In the example shown in FIG. 21 (B), when the interrupt at the time of fetching into the random value register R1D is prohibited (interrupt disabled), the bit value of the random number interrupt control data RDIC0 is set to “0”, while this interrupt is When enabling (interrupt enabled), the bit value is set to “1”.

  In the configuration example shown in FIG. 6, the random number circuit 509 is built in the game control microcomputer 560. On the other hand, for example, as shown in FIG. 22, the random number circuit 509 may be externally attached to the game control microcomputer 560 as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 560. In this case, the first start winning signal SS1 from the first start port switch 13a is branched inside the switch circuit 114, and one is input to the input port P0 of the PIP 510 provided in the game control microcomputer 560, and the other May be input to the D input terminal of the latch flip-flop 557A included in the random number circuit 509. Further, the second start winning signal SS2 from the second start port switch 14a is branched inside the switch circuit 114, and one is input to the input port P1 of the PIP 510 provided in the game control microcomputer 560, and the other is input. What is necessary is just to make it input into D input terminal of the flip-flop 557B for latch with which the random number circuit 509 is provided. Between the game control microcomputer 560, for example, the frequency monitor circuit 551 provided in the random number circuit 509 includes the internal system clock SCLK output from the clock circuit 502 provided in the game control microcomputer 560 via the system clock output terminal CLKO. The random number value register R1D and the random number value register R2D are input to the clock flip-flop 552 or via an address bus, data bus, control signal line, etc. connected to the external bus interface 501 provided in the game control microcomputer 560. The numerical data stored in the data may be read out.

  In addition, when the random number circuit 509 is externally attached to the game control microcomputer 560, as shown in FIG. It is only necessary to limit (prohibit) or permit storage of new numerical data in the. Among the built-in registers shown in FIG. 8B, for example, the random number latch selection register RDLS, the random number interrupt control register RDIC, the random number value fetch register RDLT, the random number latch flag register RDFM, the random number sequence change register RDSC, the random number value register R1D, random Various registers used by the random number circuit 509, such as the numerical register R2D, may not be built in the game control microcomputer 560 but may be built in the random number circuit 509 externally attached to the game control microcomputer 560. . In this case, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 may write and read various registers built in the random number circuit 509 via, for example, the external bus interface 501 or the like.

  A PIP 510 provided in the game control microcomputer 560 shown in FIG. 6 is, for example, a 6-bit input dedicated port, and an input port P0 to input port P2 serving as a dedicated terminal, and an input port P3 to input port serving as a function shared terminal. P5 is included. The input port P3 is also used as an external maskable interrupt terminal XINT connected to the CPU 56 or the like. The input port P4 is also used as an external non-maskable interrupt terminal XNMI connected to the CPU 56 and the like. The input port P5 is also used as the first channel reception terminal RXA used by the serial communication circuit 511. The use setting of the input port P3 to the input port P5 is instructed by the function setting KFCS stored in the program management area.

  The PIP 510 uses the input port register PI (address 2090H) among the built-in registers included in the game control microcomputer 560 as shown in FIG. 8B to manage the status of the input port P0 to the input port P5. Do. The input port register PI is a register that stores a bit value indicating the input state of the external signal corresponding to each of the input port P0 to the input port P5.

  FIG. 23A shows a configuration example of the input port register PI. FIG. 23B shows an example of setting contents in each bit of the input port data stored in the input port register PI. The input port data PI5 stored in the bit number [5] of the input port register PI indicates the terminal state (ON / OFF) at the input port P5 that is also used as the first channel receiving terminal RXA. The input port data PI4 stored in the bit number [4] of the input port register PI indicates the terminal state (ON / OFF) at the input port P4 that is also used as the external non-maskable interrupt terminal XNMI. The input port data PI3 stored in the bit number [3] of the input port register PI indicates the terminal state (ON / OFF) at the input port P3 that is also used as the external maskable interrupt terminal XINT. The input port data PI2 stored in the bit number [2] of the input port register PI indicates the terminal state (ON / OFF) at the input port P2. The input port data PI1 stored in the bit number [1] of the input port register PI indicates the terminal state (ON / OFF) at the input port P1. The input port data PI0 stored in the bit number [0] of the input port register PI indicates the terminal state (ON / OFF) at the input port P0.

  The serial communication circuit 511 included in the game control microcomputer 560 is a circuit that handles communication data in, for example, full duplex, asynchronous, standard NRZ (Non Return to Zero) format. As an example, the serial communication circuit 511 can only transmit serial data in a single direction between the external communication circuit and the first channel transmission / reception circuit capable of transmitting and receiving serial data bidirectionally with the external circuit. And a second channel transmission circuit. The first channel transmission / reception circuit included in the serial communication circuit 511 may be used for bidirectional serial communication with the payout control microcomputer mounted on the payout control board 37. The second channel transmission circuit included in the serial communication circuit 511 may be used for serial communication in a single direction (transmission only) with the effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80. Thereby, signal input to the main board 31 from the side of the effect control board 80 can be prohibited to prevent fraud.

  In the serial communication circuit 511, for example, four types of errors such as an overrun error, break code error, framing error, and parity error may occur when communication data is received. As long as it can be generated. The overrun error is an error that occurs when the next communication data is received before the received communication data is read by the user program. A break code error is an error that occurs when a predetermined break code is detected during reception of communication data. The framing error is an error that occurs when the stop bit in the received communication data is “0”. A parity error is an error that occurs when the parity of received communication data does not match the parity specified in advance when the parity function is set to be used.

  The serial communication circuit 511 may include a first interrupt control circuit and a second interrupt control circuit. The first interrupt control circuit is a circuit for managing an interrupt generation factor in the first channel transmission / reception circuit included in the serial communication circuit 511 and controlling a communication interrupt request. Interrupts controlled by the first interrupt control circuit include a first channel transmission interrupt and a first channel reception interrupt. The first channel transmission interrupt includes an interruption due to transmission completion and an interruption due to transmission data empty. The first channel reception interrupt includes an interruption due to reception data full and an interruption due to the occurrence of a reception error such as a break code error, an overrun error, a framing error, and a parity error. The second interrupt control circuit is a circuit for managing an interrupt generation factor in the second channel receiving circuit included in the serial communication circuit 511 and controlling a communication interrupt request. The interrupt controlled by the second interrupt control circuit is a second channel transmission interrupt. The second channel transmission interrupt includes an interruption due to transmission completion and an interruption due to transmission data empty.

  The address decoding circuit 512 provided in the game control microcomputer 560 is a circuit for decoding each functional block in the game control microcomputer 560 and decoding a chip select signal which is a decode signal for an external device. . By the chip select signal, an internal circuit of the game control microcomputer 560 or an external device as a peripheral device is selectively operated effectively, and can be accessed from the CPU 56.

  The ROM 54 provided in the game control microcomputer 560 includes various selection data and table data used to control the progress of the game, in addition to the control code to be the user program for game control and the security check program 54A. Is stored. For example, the ROM 54 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for the CPU 56 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings. In addition, the ROM 54 stores table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 56 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 31 and a variation pattern storing a plurality of types of variation patterns of effect symbols. Table data constituting the table is stored.

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. When power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, and the gaming control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) Based on the security check program 54A read from the ROM 54, a security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, is executed. At this time, the game control microcomputer 560 is in the security mode, and the game control user program stored in the ROM 54 is not yet executed.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a security check process executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. When the security check process is started, the CPU 56 first executes a process for determining a time (security time) when the game control microcomputer 560 is in the security mode by executing the security check process. At this time, the CPU 56 reads the bit value in the bit number [2-0] of the security time setting KSES stored in the program management area of the ROM 54 (step S1001). Then, it is determined whether or not the read value is “000” (step S1002).

  If it is determined in step S1002 that the read value is “000” (Y in step S1002), the steady set time is set to a predetermined fixed time (step S1003). Here, the regular setting time is constant regardless of the number of executions of the security check process based on the occurrence of a system reset or the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the number of times that the gaming control microcomputer 560 enters the security mode). Is a time component. The fixed time is an invariant time component determined in advance based on the specifications of the game control microcomputer 560 in the security time, and may be any minimum value that can be set as the security time, for example.

  If it is determined in step S1002 that the read value is other than “000” (N in step S1002), the read value is selected according to the setting contents shown in FIG. 11D in addition to the fixed time. The extended time is set to the steady set time (step S1004). Thus, when the bit value in the bit number [2-0] of the security time setting KSES is a value other than “000”, the security time that is the execution time of the security check process can be selected in advance in addition to the fixed time. It can be set to any one of a plurality of extension times.

  After executing any of the processes in steps S1003 and S1004, the bit value in the bit number [4-3] of the security time setting KSES is read (step S1005). Then, it is determined whether or not the read value is “00” (step S1006).

  If it is determined in step S1006 that the read value is “00” (Y in step S1006), the steady setting time is set as the security time (step S1007). On the other hand, if it is determined that the read value is other than “00” (N in step S1006), the variable setting time determined in accordance with the read value is added to the steady setting time to obtain the security time. (Step S1008). Here, the variable setting time is a time component that changes every time the security check process is executed, and the bit value in the bit number [4-3] of the security time setting KSES is “01” (short). Mode) or “10” (long mode), and changes in different predetermined time ranges. For example, when the count value in a predetermined free-run counter is stored in the variable security time register built in the game control microcomputer 560 at the occurrence of a system reset, in the process of step S1008, for the variable security time By using the stored value of the register as it is, or by using the value obtained by substituting the stored value for a predetermined arithmetic function (for example, a hash function), the variable setting time is within a predetermined time range for each system reset. It may be determined so as to change randomly. Thus, when the bit value in the bit number [4-3] of the security time setting KSES is a value other than “00”, the security time that is the execution time of the security check process is set as the security based on the occurrence of a system reset or the like. Each time the check process is executed, it can be changed within a predetermined time range.

  Here, the bit value in the bit number [2-0] of the security time setting KSES is a value other than “000”, and the bit value in the bit number [4-3] of the security time setting KSES is other than “00”. In this case, both the extension time set in step S1004 and the variable setting time set in step S1008 are added to the fixed time to determine the security time. .

  After executing one of the processes in steps S1007 and S1008, the security code stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 54 is read (step S1009). Here, in a predetermined area of the ROM 54, a security code as a calculation result obtained by calculating the data of the stored content by a predetermined arithmetic expression is stored in advance. As a method for generating a security code, for example, a hash value is generated using a hash function, an error detection code (CRC code) is used, or an error correction code (ECC code) is used. A generation method may be used. In a predetermined area different from the security code storage area of the ROM 54, an arithmetic expression for specifying the security code by calculation is encrypted and stored in advance.

  Following the processing in step S1009, the encrypted arithmetic expression is decrypted and restored (step S1010). Thereafter, the storage code in the predetermined area of the ROM 54 is calculated by the arithmetic expression decrypted in step S1010 to specify the security code (step S1011). At this time, the storage data used for the calculation for specifying the security code is, for example, program data corresponding to all or part of the user program different from the security check program 54A in the storage data of the ROM 54, or predetermined table data May be all or a part of the fixed data constituting the. Then, the security code read in step S1009 is compared with the security code specified in step S1011 (step S1012). At this time, it is determined whether or not the security codes match in the comparison result (step S1013).

  If the security codes do not match in step S1013 (N in step S1013), it is determined that an unauthorized change has been made to the ROM 54, and the operation of the CPU 56 is shifted to a halt state (HALT). On the other hand, if the security codes match in step S1013 (Y in step S1013), it is determined whether the security time set in the processing in step S1007 or step S1008 has elapsed (step S1014). . If the security time has not elapsed (N in step S1014), the processing in step S1014 is repeatedly executed, and the process waits until the security time elapses. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1014 that the security time has elapsed (Y in step S1014), for example, the value of the program counter built in the CPU 56 is set to the start address (address 0000H) of the user program in the ROM 54. The execution of the game control main process is started by setting or the like. At this time, the execution of the game control is started from the head of the control code constituting the user program stored in the ROM 54, so that the operation state of the game control microcomputer 560 shifts from the security mode to the user mode. Execution of the control main process is started.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. After executing the security check process, the CPU 56 starts the main process after step S1. In the main process, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initial settings. In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S3). After initialization of the built-in device (CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port), which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) is performed (step S4), the RAM is accessible (Step S5). In the interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates an interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks the state of the output signal (clear signal) of a clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port (step S6). When the ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes normal initialization processing (steps S10 to S15).

  If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) was performed when power supply to the gaming machine was stopped (Step S7). When it is confirmed that such protection processing is not performed, the CPU 56 executes initialization processing. Whether there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed by, for example, the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process.

  When it is confirmed that the power supply stop process has been performed, the CPU 56 performs data check of the backup RAM area (step S8). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, an initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on is not performed when the power supply is stopped.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 recovers the game state restoration process (steps S41 to S43) for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electrical component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Process). Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. As a result of the processing in steps S41 and S42, the saved contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain as they are. The part that should not be initialized is, for example, data indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, time reduction flag, etc.), and the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer) ), A portion in which data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S43). Further, the CPU 56 transmits a display result designation command designating a display result (probability big hit, normal big hit, sudden probability big hit, small hit, or off) stored in the backup RAM to the effect control board 80 (step). S44). Then, the process proceeds to step S14A.

  In this embodiment, the value of a variable time timer (to be described later) is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is restored, after the display result designation command is transmitted in step S44, measurement of the saved variation time timer value is resumed, and the variation display of the special symbol is resumed and saved. When the value of the changed time timer has timed out, a symbol determination designation command to be described later is further transmitted. In this embodiment, a special symbol process flag value, which will be described later, is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is recovered, the special symbol process is resumed from the process corresponding to the value of the stored special symbol process flag.

  Note that the display result designation command is not necessarily transmitted when the power failure is restored, but the CPU 56 may first confirm whether or not the value of the variable time timer stored in the backup RAM area is zero. . If the value of the variation time timer is not 0, it is determined that a power failure occurs during the variation, and a display result designation command is transmitted. It may be determined that the state has not been reached, and the display result designation command may not be transmitted.

  Further, the CPU 56 may first check whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag stored in the backup RAM area is 3. If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3, it is determined that a power failure occurs during the fluctuation, and a display result designation command is transmitted. The display result designation command may not be transmitted because it is determined that it is not in the middle.

  In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored using both the backup flag and the check data. However, only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity for executing the game state restoration process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). The RAM clear process initializes predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a random number for normal symbol determination) to 0, but an arbitrary value or a predetermined value It may be initialized to. In addition, the entire area of the RAM 55 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a random number for normal symbol determination) may be left as it is. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  By the processing in steps S11 and S12, for example, a normal symbol per-determining random number counter, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, and other flags for selectively performing processing according to the control state are initialized. Value is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 initializes a sub board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted) (a command indicating that the game control microcomputer 560 has executed an initialization process). Is also transmitted to the sub-board (step S13). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 9 performs screen display for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been performed, that is, initialization notification.

  After the processing of steps S41 to S44 is executed to restore the gaming state before the power interruption, or after the initialization processing of steps S10 to S13, the game control is performed based on the stored data in the program management area of the ROM 54. Operation settings of various circuits built in the microcomputer 560 are performed (step S14A). As an example, in the process of step S14A, the first random number initial setting KRS1 and the second random number initial setting KRS2 stored in the program management area are read and the random number circuit setting process is executed.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the random number circuit setting process. In the random number circuit setting process, the CPU 56 first performs setting for using the random number circuit 509 based on the bit value in the bit number [3] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 (step S5001). In this embodiment, the bit value in the bit number [3] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 is set to “1” in advance, and setting to use the random number circuit 509 is performed corresponding to this bit value. Subsequently, the random number update clock RGK is set in the random number circuit 509 based on the bit value in the bit number [2] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 (step S5002). For example, in response to the bit value [2] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 being set to “1” in advance, the random number clock RCLK generated by the random number clock generation circuit 112 is divided by two. As a result, the random number update clock RGK is set.

  After the setting in step S5002, the random number update rule is set in the random number circuit 509 based on the bit value in the bit number [1-0] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 (step S5003). For example, when the bit value in the bit number [1-0] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 is set to “00” in advance, the random number update designating the update order of the numerical data that becomes the random value in the random number sequence RSN The rule is set so as not to change after the second round. Further, when the bit value [1-0] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 is set to “01” in advance, the random number update rule in the random number sequence RSN is set to be changed by software after the second round. Is made. Further, when the bit value in the bit number [1-0] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 is set to “10” in advance, the random number update rule in the random number sequence RSN is automatically changed after the second round. Is made.

  Subsequently, based on the bit value in the bit number [1] of the second random number initial setting KRS2, a start value at start-up in numerical data to be a random value is determined (step S5004S). For example, when the bit value [1] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 is set to “0” in advance, the random value start value is set to the default value “0000H”. When the bit value [1] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 is set to “1” in advance, the random number start value is set to a value based on the ID number.

  Further, based on the bit value in the bit number [0] of the second random number initial setting KRS2, it is set whether or not to change the start value of the numerical data serving as the random value every time the system is reset (step S5005). For example, when the bit value in the bit number [0] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 is set to “0” in advance, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated when the power is initially turned on (activation after backup is disabled). The start value setting circuit 554 may be used as the start value in the random number circuit 509 using the start value at the start set in step S5004 as it is, regardless of whether the system is restarted by a system reset. Further, when the bit value [0] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 is set to “1” in advance, a setting for changing the start value of the random number at every system reset is made. For example, when a count value in a predetermined free run counter such as the free run counter 554A is stored in a random number start value register built in the game control microcomputer 560 at a predetermined timing such as when a system reset occurs. In the process of step S5005, a random number can be obtained by using the stored value of the random number start value register as it is or by using a value obtained by substituting the stored value into a predetermined arithmetic function (for example, a hash function). Is determined so as to randomly change in a predetermined numerical range (for example, a range including all or part of the numerical data included in the count value permutation RCN generated by the random number generation circuit 553) at each system reset. Just do it.

  After the processing of step S5005 is executed, the bit number [1] or bit number [0] of the random number latch flag register RDFM is read by reading the numerical data stored in the random value register R1D or the random value register R2D, for example. The bit values of the random number latch flag data RDFM1 and the random number latch flag data RDFM0 stored in are set to “0”, and each random number latch flag is cleared to an off state (step S5006). As an example, for the random number latch flag data RDFM1 and the random number latch flag data RDFM0, it is determined whether each value is “1” or “0”, and if the value is “1”, the corresponding random value The random number latch flag may be turned off by reading the register. Alternatively, each random number latch flag may be turned off by reading the random number value register R1D and the random number value register R2D regardless of the values of the random number latch flag data RDFM1 and the random number latch flag data RDFM0. Note that the numerical data read from the random value register R1D or the random value register R2D in the process of step S5006 is used for determining whether to control the big hit gaming state with the special figure display result as “big hit”. It can be discarded (erased) as it is. When the setting by the processing in step S5006 is completed, the random number circuit 509 may start the random value generation operation.

  Note that part or all of the setting by the random number circuit setting process may be performed autonomously by the random number circuit 509 based on the data stored in the program management area without the processing of the CPU 56 being involved. In this case, the random number circuit 509 may be configured not to perform the initial setting when the game control microcomputer 560 is in the security mode and to prevent the random number value generation operation from being performed. Then, when the CPU 56 reads out the user program stored in the ROM 54 in the game control microcomputer 560 and the execution of the game control main process is started, the CPU 56 instructs the random number circuit 509 to make an initial setting, for example. In response to the signal being transmitted, the random number circuit 509 may perform the initial setting and then start the random value generation operation. Alternatively, particularly when the random number circuit 509 is externally attached to the game control microcomputer 560, the random number circuit 509 is independent of the processing in the CPU 56 even when the game control microcomputer 560 is in the security mode. Thus, the random number generation operation may be started after initial setting based on the stored data in the program management area. In addition, the process of step S14A shown in FIG. 25 includes a process of reading the interrupt initial setting KIIS stored in the program management area and setting the priority control of the maskable interrupt factor in the reset / interrupt controller 504. May be. When setting the priority order of the maskable interrupt factor, the highest priority interrupt is set corresponding to the bit value in the bit number [3-0] of the interrupt initial setting KIIS. For example, by setting the bit value [3-0] of the interrupt initial setting KIIS to either “04H” or “05H” in advance, the interrupt processing due to the interrupt factor generated in the serial communication circuit 511 has the highest priority. Can be executed. Thus, by performing priority control of maskable interrupt factors according to the bit value in bit number [3-0] of interrupt initial setting KIIS, the priority order of interrupt processing can be arbitrarily set, and the degree of freedom of design is increased. be able to.

  After the setting in step S14A, random number circuit abnormality inspection processing for inspecting the presence or absence of operation abnormality in the random number circuit 509 is executed (step S14B). FIG. 27 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the random number circuit abnormality inspection process executed in step S14B.

  In the random number circuit abnormality inspection process shown in FIG. 27, the CPU 56 first clears a random number clock abnormality determination counter provided in, for example, the RAM 55 and sets the random number clock abnormality determination count value, which is the count value, to “0”. (Step S561). Subsequently, the internal information data CIF4 stored in the bit number [4] of the internal information register CIF is read (step S562). Then, it is determined whether or not the read value in step S562 is “1” (step S563). The frequency monitoring circuit 551 provided in the random number circuit 509 compares the input state of the random number clock RCLK at the random number external clock terminal ERC with the internal system clock SCLK. When a frequency abnormality corresponding to the set content as shown in FIG. 11B is detected in the input state of the random number clock RCLK, the bit value “1” is written as the internal information data CIF4.

  Therefore, when it is determined in step S563 that the read value is “1” (Y in step S563), the random number clock abnormality determination count value is updated to be incremented by 1 (step S564). At this time, it is determined whether or not the count value after the update in step S564 has reached a predetermined clock abnormality determination value (step S565). Here, the clock abnormality determination value may be a numerical value determined in advance to determine that the clock abnormality is detected when the frequency monitoring circuit 551 continuously detects the frequency abnormality of the random number clock RCLK. If the clock abnormality determination value has not been reached in step S565S, the process returns to step S562, and determination based on the bit value of the internal information data CIF4 is performed again.

  If the clock abnormality determination value is reached in step S565 (Y in step S565), a predetermined random number clock error process is executed (step S566), and the random number circuit abnormality inspection process is terminated. In the random number clock error process, for example, a setting for transmitting a predetermined effect control command to the effect control board 80 is performed, and notification that the effect device has detected a frequency abnormality of the random number clock RCLK is notified. In addition, the processing may not be continued until a predetermined error canceling procedure (for example, system reset, error canceling switch operation, etc.) is taken, or at the end of random number clock error processing After the random number circuit abnormality inspection process is finished, the game control or the like that is almost the same as the normal time when the random number clock error process is not executed may be executed. Here, when the game control or the like is executed after executing the random number clock error process in step S566, the error occurrence state corresponding to the execution of the random number clock error process is stored, for example, When a customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted based on the processing of step S51A shown in FIG. 49 described later, a customer waiting demonstration designation command for notifying the occurrence state of the error may be transmitted. Further, the operation of the CPU 56 may be shifted to the halt state (HALT) without executing the random number clock error process.

  If it is determined in step S563 that the read value is “0” (N in step S563), for example, the random value abnormality determination counter provided in the RAM 55 or the like is cleared, and the random value abnormality determination that is the count value is performed. The count value is initialized to “0” (step S567). In the process of step S563, the read value is “0” when the bit value of the internal information data CIF4 read in step S562 continuously becomes “0” a plurality of times (for example, twice). May be determined.

  Following the processing in step S567, a check value used for checking whether there is an abnormality in the random number value is set to an initial value “0000H” (step S568). Then, the stored numeric data as the random value is read from the random value register 559A serving as the random value register R1D and the random value register 559B serving as the random value register R2D included in the random number circuit 509 (step S569). For example, in the process of step S569, the bit values of the random number latch selection data RDLS1 and the random number latch selection data RDLS0 stored in the bit number [1] and the bit number [0] of the random number latch selection register RDLS are set to “0”. Specifies fetching random values by. Subsequently, the bit values of the random number acquisition specification data RDLT1 and the random number acquisition specification data RDLT0 stored in the bit number [1] and the bit number [0] of the random value acquisition specification register RDLT are set to “1”. Specifying loading into the random value register R2D or the random value register R1D. Note that setting the bit value in the bit number [1] or bit number [0] of the random value fetch specification register RDLT to “1” instructs the CPU 56 to fetch (latch) numerical data to the random number circuit 509. This corresponds to outputting a latch signal. After that, by turning on the register read signal RRS2 supplied to the random value register R2D or turning on the register read signal RRS1 supplied to the random value register R1D, the numerical data that becomes the stored random value May be read out. Note that the numerical data stored in each of the random value register R2D and the random value register R1D may be read simultaneously to check whether there is an abnormality in the random number value, or after checking whether there is an abnormality in one of the registers. The other register may be checked for abnormality.

  After the numerical data is read in step S569, the read value is set as a random number inspection reference value (step S570). Subsequently, numerical data that becomes a random value is read from the random value register 559A and the random value register 559B (step S571). Note that the reading operation in step S571 may be performed in the same procedure as the reading operation in step S569. In addition, a sufficient delay time may be provided between the read operation in step S569 and the read operation in step S571 so that the numerical data in the random number sequence RSN generated by the random number circuit 509 changes. After the numerical data is read in step S571, an exclusive OR operation is performed between the random number inspection reference value and the read value in step S571 (step S572). Further, a logical sum operation between the calculation result in step S572 and the check value is executed, and the calculation result is updated so as to be a new check value (step S573). For example, the check value may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 55, and each time the process of step S573 is executed, the calculation result obtained by the process may be saved as a new check value. As a result, changes in all the bits in the numerical data read from the random value register 559A and the random value register 559B are recorded, and if the bit has changed at least once during a plurality of readings, the check value corresponds. The bit value is “1”.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the check value is “FFFFH” (step S574), and if it is (Y in step S574), a change in the bit value is recognized for all bits, so that the random number value is normal. The random number circuit abnormality inspection process is terminated by determining that the number has been updated. When it is confirmed that the random number value has been updated normally, the random number latch selection data RDLS1 and the random number latch selection stored in the bit number [1] and the bit number [0] of the random number latch selection register RDLS are selected. The bit value of the data RDLS0 is set to “1”, the random value is taken into the random value register R2D according to the signal input to the input port P1, and the random value register R1D according to the signal input to the input port P0 You may make it instruct | indicate numerical value acquisition. In this embodiment, a wiring for transmitting the first start winning signal SS1 from the first start port switch 13a is connected to the input port P0, and the second start winning signal SS2 from the second start port switch 14a is connected to the input port P1. Are connected. Thereby, when the first start winning signal SS1 is turned on, the random number value is taken into the random value register R1D, while when the second starting winning signal SS2 is turned on, the random value register R2D is entered. It is possible to take in random values.

  If it is determined in step S574 that the check value is other than “FFFFH” (N in step S574), the random number abnormality determination count value is updated to be incremented by 1 (step S575). At this time, it is determined whether or not the count value after the update in step S575 has reached a predetermined random value abnormality determination value (step S576). Here, the random value abnormality determination value is determined so that all bits of the numerical data read from the random value register 559A and the random value register 559B change at least once if the random number circuit 509 is operating normally. It may be a predetermined numerical value so as to be the number of times. If the random number abnormality determination value has not been reached in step S576, the process returns to step S571, and numerical data that becomes a random number value is read again from the random number circuit 509, and determination for checking the presence or absence of abnormality is performed.

  If the random value abnormality determination value is reached in step S576 (Y in step S576), a predetermined random value error process is executed (step S577), and the random circuit abnormality inspection process is terminated. In the random value error processing, for example, a setting for transmitting a predetermined effect control command to the effect control board 80 is performed to notify that an abnormality in the random number value is detected by the effect device, Until the error release procedure (for example, system reset, error release switch operation, etc.) is taken, the subsequent processing may not proceed, or the random number circuit error check processing will be performed at the end of the random number error processing. After that, game control or the like that is almost the same as the normal time when the random number error process is not executed may be executed. Here, when the game control or the like is executed after executing the random value error process in step S577, an error occurrence state corresponding to the execution of the random value error process is stored. When a customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted based on the processing of step S51A shown in FIG. 49, a customer waiting demonstration designation command for notifying the occurrence state of the error may be transmitted. Further, the operation of the CPU 56 may be shifted to the stop state (HALT) without executing the process at the time of the random value error.

  As described above, in the random number circuit abnormality inspection process, for example, the numerical data stored in the random value register R1D (559A) or the random value register R2D (559B) of the random number circuit 509 is obtained by repeatedly executing the process of step S571. Read multiple times. Then, all the bits of the numerical data read out by executing the processing of step S572 to step S574 are monitored, and an abnormality occurs in the operation state of the random number circuit 509 in step S576 based on the presence or absence of bit data that does not change. Determine whether or not. As a result, it is possible to reliably and easily detect that an abnormality has occurred in the operating state of the random number circuit 509 and prevent fraud.

  Note that the random number circuit abnormality inspection process in step S14B is not limited to the one executed by the CPU 56, and the random number circuit abnormality inspection process may be executed by a built-in circuit in the game control microcomputer 560 other than the CPU 56. As an example, the random number circuit 509 has a function of executing a random number circuit abnormality inspection process. When a frequency abnormality of the random number clock RCLK is detected, or when an abnormality of a random number value is detected, the CPU 56 detects the occurrence of an error. May be notified. Further, the random number circuit abnormality inspection process is not limited to that executed only in step S14B. For example, every time a timer interrupt occurs in the game control microcomputer 560, a game control timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28), part or all of the random number circuit abnormality inspection process may be executed. That is, the random number circuit abnormality inspection process in step S14B may be executed after the process in step S15 shown in FIG. 25 is executed. As an example, when the random number circuit abnormality inspection process is executed in the game control timer interrupt process, for example, the processes of steps S561 to S566 shown in FIG. 27 are executed, while the processes of steps S567 to S577 are executed. It may not be executed. The processing from step S567 to step S577 may take a long processing time, for example, to repeatedly execute the processing of step S569 to repeatedly read numerical data from the random number circuit 509. May occur. Therefore, in this case, by executing only the processing from step S561 to step S566, the processing amount in the game control timer interrupt processing can be reduced, and the occurrence of processing failure can be prevented.

  In step S15, the CPU 56 sets a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 4 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 4 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) in the main process. When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are executed, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S16). Set (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is not a big hit, or a random number for determining whether to reach when it is not a big hit, The random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is the initial value of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to win for a normal symbol (normal random number generation counter for normal symbol determination). It is a random number to determine. A game control process for controlling the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 560 controls game devices such as an effect display device, a variable winning ball device, a ball payout device, etc. provided in the game machine itself. In the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, or a game machine control process), the count value of the random number for determination per normal symbol is one round (the random number for determination per normal symbol is taken). When the value is incremented by the number of values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible values), an initial value is set in the counter.

  In this embodiment, the reach effect is executed using an effect symbol variably displayed on the effect display device 9. Further, when the display result of the special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the reach effect is always executed. When the display result of the special symbol is not a jackpot symbol, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not to execute the reach effect by lottery using a random number. However, it is the production control microcomputer 100 that actually executes the reach production control.

  When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process in steps S20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether or not an on-state is turned on) is executed (step S20). The power-off signal is output, for example, when a power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a decrease in the voltage of the power supplied to the gaming machine. In the power-off detection process, when detecting that the power-off signal is output, the CPU 56 executes a power supply stop process for saving necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 are input via the input driver circuit 58, and their state is determined (switch processing: step S21). ).

  Next, the CPU 56 has a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10, a first special symbol hold storage display 18a, a second special symbol hold storage display 18b, a normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the on-hold storage display 41 is executed (step S22). About the 1st special symbol display 8a, the 2nd special symbol display 8b, and the normal symbol display 10, a drive signal is output with respect to each display according to the content of the output buffer set by step S32, S33. Execute control.

  In addition, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each random number for determination such as a random number for determination per ordinary symbol used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S23). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S24 and S25).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol process processing (step S26). In the special symbol process, corresponding processing is executed in accordance with a special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol indicator 8a, the second special symbol indicator 8b, and the big prize opening in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Next, normal symbol process processing is performed (step S27). In the normal symbol process, the CPU 56 executes a corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: step S28).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs information output processing for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (step S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a prize ball process for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals from the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 (step S30). Specifically, the payout control micro mounted on the payout control board 37 in response to the winning detection based on any one of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a and the count switch 23 being turned on. A payout control command (prize ball number signal) indicating the number of prize balls is output to the computer. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in accordance with a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. However, the CPU 56 relates to on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The contents are output to the output port (step S31: output process).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a special symbol display control process for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of special symbols in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data according to the value of the special symbol process flag ( Step S32).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in an output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( Step S33). For example, when the start flag related to the variation of the normal symbol is set, the CPU 56 switches the display state (“◯” and “×”) for the variation rate of the normal symbol every 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set. With such a speed, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer (for example, 1 indicating “◯” and 0 indicating “x”) is switched every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a normal signal on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting a drive signal in step S22 in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (step S34), and the process is terminated.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the processes in steps S21 to S33 (excluding step S29) in the timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is performed by the main process. May be executed.

  When the shifted symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the variable display state of the effect symbol is changed after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. There may be a case where a predetermined combination of effects that does not reach reach is stopped and displayed without reaching reach. Such a variable display mode of the effect symbol is referred to as a variable display mode of “non-reach” (also referred to as “normally shift”) in a case where the variable display result is a loss symbol.

  When the shifted symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the variable display state of the effect symbol is started after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. After reaching the reach state, a reach effect is executed, and a combination of predetermined effect symbols that do not eventually become a jackpot symbol may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the effect design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach out”) when the variable display result is “out of”.

  In this embodiment, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the reach effect is executed after the variable display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state. Finally, the effect symbols are all stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R in the effect display device 9.

  When “5”, which is a small hit, is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display variable display mode is “suddenly probable big hit” on the effect display device 9. In the same manner as in the case where the effect symbol is variably displayed, a predetermined small hit symbol (the same symbol as the sudden probability variation big hit symbol, for example, "135") may be stopped and displayed. The display effect in the effect display device 9 corresponding to the fact that “5”, which is the small hit symbol, is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol indicator 8a or the second special symbol indicator 8b is referred to as a “small hit” variable display mode. .

  Here, the small win is a hit that is allowed up to a small number of times that the big winning opening is opened compared to the big win (in this embodiment, the opening for 0.1 second is twice). When the small hit game ends, the game state does not change. That is, there is no transition from the probability variation state to the normal state or from the normal state to the certain variation state. In addition, the sudden probability change big hit is allowed up to a small number of times of opening of the big prize opening in the big hit gaming state (in this embodiment, the opening for 0.1 second is twice), but the opening time of the big prize opening is extremely large. It is a big jackpot that is a short jackpot and the game state after the big jackpot game is shifted to a probabilistic state (that is, by doing so, it appears to the player as if it suddenly became a probable state) Is). In other words, in this embodiment, the sudden winning odds and the small wins have the same opening pattern of the big prize opening. By controlling in such a way, if the winning opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds, it is impossible to recognize whether it is suddenly a big hit or a small hit, so a high probability state for the player (Probable change state) can be expected, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  29 and 30 are flowcharts showing an example of the power-off process in step S20. In the power-off process, the game control microcomputer 560 first checks whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether or not it is turned on) (step S450). If not on, the value of the backup monitoring timer formed in the RAM 55 is cleared to 0 (step S451). If it is on, the value of the backup monitoring timer is incremented by 1 (step S452). If the value of the backup monitoring timer matches the determination value (for example, 2) (step S453), the power supply stop processing after step S454, that is, the preparation processing for power supply stop is executed. That is, the state shifts from a state in which the progress of the game is controlled to a state in which a power supply stop process (a power-off control process) for saving the game state is executed. Note that “formed in the RAM” means an area in the RAM.

  By using the backup monitoring timer and the determination value, if the power-off signal is kept on for a time corresponding to the determination value, the power supply stop process is started. That is, even when the power-off signal is turned on for a moment due to noise or the like, the power supply stop process is not erroneously started. Note that the value of the backup monitoring timer is stored by the backup power source for a predetermined period even when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. Therefore, in step S8 in the main process, it is possible to confirm that the processing result of the power supply stop process is stored because the value of the backup monitoring timer is the same value as the determination value.

  In the power supply stop process, the game control microcomputer 560 creates parity data (steps S454 to S463). That is, first, clear data (00) is set in the checksum data area (step S454), and the checksum calculation start address corresponding to the start address of the RAM area in which the contents are to be stored even when power supply is stopped is set in the pointer. (Step S455). Further, the number of checksum calculations corresponding to the final address of the RAM area where the contents are to be stored even when the power supply is stopped is set (step S456).

  Next, an exclusive OR of the contents of the checksum data area and the contents of the RAM area pointed to by the pointer is calculated (step S457). The calculation result is stored in the checksum data area (step S458), the pointer value is incremented by 1 (step S459), and the value of the checksum calculation count is decremented by 1 (step S460). Then, the processes in steps S457 to S460 are repeated until the value of the checksum calculation count becomes 0 (step S461).

  When the value of the checksum calculation count becomes 0, the game control microcomputer 560 inverts the value of each bit of the contents of the checksum data area (step S462). Then, the inverted data is stored in the checksum data area (step S463). This data becomes parity data to be checked when the power is turned on. Next, an access prohibition value is set in the RAM access register (step S471). Thereafter, the built-in RAM 55 cannot be accessed.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the head address of the port clear setting table stored in the ROM 54 as a pointer (step S472). In the port clear setting table, the number of processes (the number of output ports to be cleared) is set to the first address, and then the output port address and output value data (clear data: the value of the off state of each bit of the output port) However, the output ports for the number of processes are sequentially set.

  The game control microcomputer 560 loads data at the address pointed to by the pointer (that is, the number of processes) (step S473). Further, the value of the pointer is incremented by 1 (step S474), and the data of the address pointed to by the pointer (that is, the output port address) is loaded (step S475). Further, the value of the pointer is incremented by 1 (step S476), and the data of the address pointed to by the pointer (that is, output value data) is loaded (step S477). Then, the output value data is output to the output port (step S478). Thereafter, the number of processes is reduced by 1 (step S479), and if the number of processes is not 0, the process returns to step S474. If the number of processes is 0, that is, if all the output ports to be cleared are cleared, the timer interrupt is stopped (step S481) and the loop process is started. Note that the process of clearing the output port may be executed before the process of creating checksum data. For example, the CPU 56 may execute the output port clear processing in steps S472 to S480 immediately after determining Y in step S453.

  In the loop processing, it is monitored whether or not the power-off signal is turned off (step S482). Then, while the power-off signal is in the ON state (Y in step S482), the process in step S482 is repeatedly executed to stand by. In contrast, when the power-off signal is turned off in step S482 (Y in step S482), processing for clearing the random number latch flag is executed.

  That is, the random number latch flag corresponding to the random value register R1D is turned on according to whether or not the bit value of the random number latch flag data RDFM0 stored in the bit number [0] of the random number latch flag register RDFM is “1”. It is determined whether or not there is (step S483). If this random number latch flag is on (Y in step S483), the random value register R1D is read to clear the bit value of the random number latch flag data RDFM0 to “0”, and the corresponding random number latch flag is set. An off state is set (step S484). If the random number latch flag specified by the random number latch flag data RDFM0 is OFF in step S483 (N in step S483) or after executing the processing in step S484, the bit number [1 of the random number latch flag register RDFM is set. ], It is determined whether or not the random number latch flag corresponding to the random number register R2D is on (step S485). At this time, if the random number latch flag is ON (Y in step S485), the random value register R2D is read to clear the bit value of the random number latch flag data RDFM1 to “0”, and the corresponding random number latch flag is set. An off state is set (step S486). Through the processing in step S484 and step S486, the random number latch flag is turned off, and the random number value register R1D and the random number value register R2D can be set in a state where storage of new numerical data is permitted. Note that the numerical data read from the random value register R1D or the random value register R2D by the processing in step S484 or step S486 is a process for determining whether or not to control the big hit gaming state with the special figure display result as “big hit”. It can be discarded (erased) as it is. Further, instead of the processing of step S483 to step S486, the random number latch flag is set by reading the random number value register R1D and the random number value register R2D regardless of the values of the random number latch flag data RDFM0 and the random number latch flag data RDFM1. Processing to turn off may be performed. In this embodiment, the case where there are two start winning ports is shown. However, for example, when there are three starting winning ports, three random number value registers may be read. It suffices that all the random number registers used are read and the random number latch flags are cleared.

  When the random number latch flag specified by the random number latch flag data RDFM1 is OFF in step S485 (N in step S485) or after executing the process in step S486, after setting for a predetermined power failure recovery is performed. (Step S487), the process returns to the top of the main process shown in FIG. As an example, in the process of step S487, the storage address of the power-off recovery vector table is stored in the stack pointer built in the CPU 56, and the game control timer interrupt process is returned (returned). Here, the power-off recovery vector table may be any table that specifies the head address of the control code (game control program) stored in the ROM 54. When returning from an interrupt process such as the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 28, the stored data at the address specified by the stack pointer is read as the return address. Thus, after executing the processing of step S487, the CPU 56 can start (restart) the execution of the game control from the head of the control code stored in the ROM 54.

  When the power supply is stopped by the above processing, the power supply stop processing in steps S454 to S481 is executed, and data indicating that the power supply stop processing has been executed (backup monitoring having a determination value). Timer and checksum) are stored in the backup RAM, RAM access is disabled, the output port is cleared, and timer interrupt for executing the game control process is set to disabled.

  In this embodiment, the RAM 55 is backed up by a backup power source (the contents of the RAM 55 are preserved for a predetermined period even when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped). In this example, the checksum based on the content of the RAM 55 when the power-off signal is output is stored in the backup area of the RAM 55 together with the value of the backup monitoring timer by the processing of steps S452 to S479. After the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, when the power supply is restored within a predetermined period, the game control means performs the data stored in the RAM 55 (immediately before the power supply is stopped) by the processing of steps S41 to S44 described above. In accordance with the data indicating the game state that is the control state by the game control means (for example, including the process flag state, the big hit flag state, the probability change flag state, the output port output state, etc.) It is possible to return to the state immediately before the supply is stopped. If the power supply stop period exceeds the predetermined period, the value of the backup monitoring timer and the checksum should be different from the regular values. In this case, the initialization process of steps S10 to S13 is executed. The

  As described above, the power supply stop process (preparation process for stopping the power supply) ensures that the data for returning the gaming state to the state immediately before the power supply stopped is the fluctuation data storage means (in this example) Stored in a part of the RAM 55). Therefore, even if the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, if the power is restored within a predetermined period, the gaming state can be returned to the state immediately before the power supply is stopped.

  If the power-off signal is turned off, the process returns to step S1. In this case, since data indicating that the power supply stop process has been executed is set, the recovery process of steps S41 to S44 is executed. Therefore, when the power-off signal from the payout control board 37 is turned off after executing the power supply stop process, the process returns to the state of controlling the progress of the game. Therefore, even if a power interruption or the like occurs, the game control process does not stop, and the game control process is automatically continued.

  FIG. 31 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern of the effect symbol prepared in advance. As shown in FIG. 31, in this embodiment, the non-reach PA1-1 to non-variable are used as the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “out of” and the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “non-reach”. A variation pattern of reach PA1-4 is prepared. Further, normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-2, normal PB2-1 to normal PB2-2 are variations patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “out of” and the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “reach”. Fluctuation patterns of super PA3-1 to super PA3-2 and super PB3-1 to super PB3-2 are prepared. In addition, as shown in FIG. 31, about the fluctuation | variation pattern of non-reach PA1-4 which is used when not reaching and is accompanied by the effect of a pseudo-continuous, re-variation is performed once. Of the variation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-rendition, when normal PB2-1 is used, re-variation is performed once. Of the variation patterns that are used for reaching and have a pseudo-continuous effect, when normal PB2-2 is used, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, when using super PA3-1 to super PA3-2 among the fluctuation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-rendition effects, re-variation is performed three times. Note that the re-variation means that the variable display of the effect symbol is executed again after temporarily stopping the effect symbol that is once deviated from the start of the variable display of the effect symbol until the display result is derived and displayed. .

  Further, as shown in FIG. 31, in this embodiment, normal PA2-3 to normal PA2-4, normal PB2 are used as variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable symbol display result of the special symbol is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol. -3 to Normal PB2-4, Super PA3-3 to SuperPA3-4, Super PB3-3 to Super PB3-4, Special PG1-1 to Special PG1-3, Special PG2-1 to Special PG2-2 Is prepared. In FIG. 31, the fluctuation patterns of special PG1-1 to special PG1-3 and special PG2-1 to special PG2-2 are fluctuation patterns that are used when sudden probability big hit or small hit. Further, as shown in FIG. 31, when the normal PB2-3 is used among the fluctuation patterns that are used in the case of sudden sudden change that is not big hit or small hit and has a pseudo-continuous effect, re-change is performed once. Of the fluctuation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-continuous effects, when normal PB2-4 is used, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, when using super PA3-3 to super PA3-4 among the fluctuation patterns that are used for reaching and have the effect of pseudo-ream, re-variation is performed three times. In addition, for the variation pattern of the special PG 1-3 that is used in the case of sudden probability big hit or small hit and has a pseudo-continuous effect, re-variation is performed once.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 31, when the variation time is fixedly determined according to the type of reach (for example, the variation time is 32 in the case of Super Reach A with pseudo-ream). In the case of Super Reach A without pseudo-ream, the fluctuation time is fixed at 22.75 seconds). For example, even in the case of the same type of Super Reach Depending on the total number of pending storage, the variation time may be varied. For example, even with the same type of super reach, the variation time may be shortened as the total number of pending storage increases. Also, for example, even in the case of the same type of super reach, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, the variable time may be varied according to the first reserved memory number. When the variable display of the two special symbols is performed, the variable time may be varied according to the second reserved memory number. In this case, a separate determination table is prepared for each value of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number (for example, the variation pattern type determination table for the reserved memory numbers 0 to 2 and the reserved memory numbers 3 and 4). For example, a determination table may be selected according to the value of the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number, and the change time may be varied.

FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram showing each software random number used in this embodiment. Each software random number is used as follows. As described above, in this embodiment, a hardware random number output from the random number circuit 509 is used for the big hit determination random number (random R) for determining whether or not to win.
(1) Random 1 (MR1): Determines the type of jackpot (normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot, sudden probability variation jackpot described later) (for jackpot type determination)
(2) Random 2 (MR2): The type (type) of the variation pattern is determined (for variation pattern type determination)
(3) Random 3 (MR3): A variation pattern (variation time) is determined (for variation pattern determination)
(4) Random 4 (MR4): Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination)
(5) Random 5 (MR5): Determine the initial value of random 4 (for determining the initial value of random 4)

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern is first determined using the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and then the variation pattern determined using the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). One of the variation patterns included in the pattern type is determined. Thus, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process.

  The variation pattern type is a group of a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of the variation mode. For example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by reach type, and include a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach A, and a variation pattern with super reach B. It may be divided into variable pattern types. Further, for example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by the number of re-variations of pseudo-continuations, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern without pseudo-ream, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of one re-variation, It may be divided into a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of two variations and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of three variations. Further, for example, a plurality of variation patterns may be grouped according to the presence or absence of a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream or a slip effect.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, in the case of a probable big hit, a normal CA3-1 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with only normal reach, and a variation pattern with normal reach and pseudo-continuity are included. It is classified into a normal CA 3-2 that is a variation pattern type and a super CA 3-3 that is a variation pattern type with super reach. Further, in the case of a normal big hit, a normal CA3-1 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with only normal reach, a normal CA3-2 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach and pseudo-continuity, It is classified into Super CA3-3 which is a variation pattern type with super reach. In addition, in the case of sudden probability change big hit, it is classified into a special CA4-1 that is a fluctuation pattern type including a non-reach fluctuation pattern and a special CA4-2 that is a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern with reach. ing. Further, in the case of small hits, it is classified into special CA4-1 which is a variation pattern type including a non-reach variation pattern. Further, in the case of a deviation, it is a non-reach CA 2-1 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with no reach and a specific effect, and a variation pattern type that includes a change pattern with a specific effect without a reach. Non-reach CA2-2, non-reach CA2-3 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of shortened variation without reach and specific effects, and normal CA2-4 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with only normal reach And normal CA2-5 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach and two re-variation pseudo-continuations, and normal CA2 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with one normal reach and one re-variation pseudo-continuation -6 and super CA2-7 which is a variation pattern type with super reach Are the type divided into.

  In step S23 in the game control process shown in FIG. 28, the game control microcomputer 560 uses a counter for generating the jackpot type determination random number (1) and the random number for determination per ordinary symbol (4). Count up (add 1). That is, they are determination random numbers, and other random numbers are display random numbers (random 2, random 3) or initial value random numbers (random 5). In addition, in order to improve a game effect, you may use random numbers other than said random number. For example, an initial value determining random number for determining the initial value of the jackpot type determining random number (random 1) may be provided. In this embodiment, a random number generated by hardware incorporated in the game control microcomputer 560 (or hardware external to the game control microcomputer 560) is used as the jackpot determination random number.

  FIG. 33A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal-time jackpot determination table used in a normal state (a gaming state that is not a probability change state) and a probability change jackpot determination table used in a probability change state. Each numerical value described in the left column of FIG. 33 (A) is set in the normal jackpot determination table, and each numerical value described in the right column of FIG. 33 (A) is set in the probability variation big hit determination table. Is set. The numerical value described in FIG. 33A is a jackpot determination value.

  FIGS. 33B and 33C are explanatory diagrams showing a small hit determination table. The small hit determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The small hit determination table includes a small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) used when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and a small hit determination table used when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. (For the second special symbol). Each value shown in FIG. 33B is set in the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol), and in the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol), the values shown in FIG. Each numerical value listed is set. Also, the numerical values described in FIGS. 33B and 33C are small hit determination values.

  Note that it may be determined that a small hit is made only when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and the small hit may not be provided when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. In this case, the small hit determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is shifted to the probability changing state, the variation display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. Even if the game state is shifted to the probability change state, a small hit will be generated, and if it is configured to produce an effect asking whether or not the probability change will occur, even though the current game state is the probability change state On the contrary, it makes the player feel annoying. Therefore, if it is configured so that the small hit does not occur during the variation display of the second special symbol, if the gaming state is the probability variation state, it is difficult for the small hit to occur and the excessive effect is not given to the probability variation. This can prevent the player from feeling annoyed.

  The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 509 at a predetermined time and uses the extracted value as the value of the big hit determination random number (random R). The big hit determination random number is shown in FIG. If it matches any of the big hit determination values, the special symbol is decided to be a big hit (a normal big hit, a probability variation big hit, and a sudden probability variation big hit described later). Further, when the big hit determination random number value matches one of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 33B and 33C, it is determined to make a small hit for the special symbol. Note that the “probability” shown in FIG. 33A indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. In addition, “probability” shown in FIGS. 33B and 33C indicates the probability (ratio) of making a small hit. Further, deciding whether or not to win a jackpot means deciding whether or not to shift to the jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot symbol. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to shift to the small hit gaming state, but stopping in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. It also means determining whether or not the symbol is to be a small hit symbol.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 33B and 33C, when the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) is used, the small hit is determined at a ratio of 1/300. On the other hand, when using the small hit determination table (second special symbol), a case where the small hit is determined at a ratio of 1/3000 will be described. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the start winning prize is given to the first start winning opening 13 and the first special symbol variation display is executed, the start winning prize is given to the second starting winning prize slot 14 and the second special symbol is displayed. The ratio determined as “small hit” is higher than when the variable display is executed.

  33D and 33E are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b stored in the ROM 54. FIG. Among these, FIG. 33 (D) determines the jackpot type using the holding memory based on the game ball having won the first start winning opening 13 (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). This is a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) 131a. FIG. 33 (E) shows a case where the jackpot type is determined by using the holding memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the second start winning opening 14 (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). Is a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) 131b.

  The jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b determine that the jackpot type is “normal jackpot”, “ This table is referred to in order to determine one of “probability big hit” and “sudden probability big hit”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 33D and 33E, ten determination values are assigned to “suddenly probable big hit” in the big hit type determination table 131a (40 minutes). 3 is assigned to the jackpot type determination table 131b for “sudden probability change big hit” (a ratio of 3/40). Will suddenly be determined to be a promising big hit). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the first special symbol variation display is executed by starting the first start winning port 13 and the second special symbol of the second special symbol is displayed. Compared with the case where the variable display is executed, the ratio determined as “suddenly probable big hit” is high. Note that “sudden probability variation big hit” is assigned only to the first special symbol jackpot type determination table 131a, and “sudden probability variation big hit” is not assigned to the second special symbol big hit type determination table 131b (ie, It may be determined that “suddenly probable big hit” may be determined only when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 33 (D) and 33 (E), two rounds of sudden probability change big hits as the first specific gaming state to which a predetermined amount of gaming value is given, and more than the gaming value The case where 15 rounds of big hit (probable big hit or normal big hit) is determined as the second specific gaming state to which the amount of gaming value is given will be explained. However, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, Although the case where it is determined to be one specific gaming state is shown, the gaming value to be given is not limited to the number of rounds as shown in this embodiment. For example, as compared with the first specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state in which the allowable amount of the winning number (count number) of game balls to the big winning opening per round is increased as the gaming value is determined. Also good. Further, for example, as compared with the first specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state in which the opening time of the big winning opening per game during the big hit may be determined as the gaming value. In addition, for example, even if the same 15 round big hits, the first specific gaming state that opens the big winning opening once per round and the second specific gaming state that opens the big winning opening multiple times per round It may be prepared to increase the gaming value of the second specific gaming state by substantially increasing the number of times the special winning opening is opened. In this case, for example, in any case of the first specific gaming state or the second specific gaming state, when the big winning opening is opened 15 times (in this case, all 15 rounds in the case of the first specific gaming state) In the case of the second specified gaming state, there is an undigested round remaining), and an effect in a manner that encourages whether or not the big hit continues (so-called rank-up bonus effect) You may make it perform. And in the case of the first specific gaming state, all the 15 rounds have been finished internally, so the big hit game is finished, and in the case of the second specific gaming state, there remains an undigested round internally. For this reason, the jackpot game may be continued (the effect that the bonus winning opening is additionally started with a bonus after finishing the bonus hit of 15 times).

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 33 (D) and 33 (E), the types of jackpots include “normal jackpot”, “probability variation jackpot”, and “sudden probability variation jackpot”.

  The “probable big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to 15 rounds of the big hit gaming state and shifts to the probable change state after the big hit gaming state is finished (in this embodiment, it is changed to the probable change state and the short time state is also entered. (See steps S170 and S171 described later). After the transition to the probability variation state, the probability variation state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see step S134 described later).

  In addition, the “ordinary big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to the big round gaming state of 15 rounds and is not shifted to the probability change state after the big hit gaming state is ended, but is shifted only to the short time state (see step S167 described later) . Then, after shifting to the time reduction state, the time reduction state is maintained until the execution of the variable symbol display of the special symbol and the effect symbol is completed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) (see steps S142 to S145 described later). In this embodiment, the time reduction state also ends when a big hit occurs after the transition to the time reduction state and before the execution of the predetermined number of variable displays is ended (see step S134 described later).

  In addition, “suddenly promising big hit” means that the number of times of opening the big winning opening is smaller than in “probable big hit” or “normal big hit” (in this embodiment, opening for 0.1 second is allowed twice). Is a big hit. In other words, when “suddenly promising big hit”, the game is controlled to a two round big hit gaming state. In this embodiment, after the two-round jackpot gaming state is finished, the state is changed to the probability changing state (in this embodiment, the state is changed to the probability changing state and also to the short time state. Step S170 to be described later). , S171). After the transition to the probability variation state, the probability variation state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see step S134 described later).

  As described above, in this embodiment, even in the case of “small hit”, the big winning opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds, and the big hit gaming state by “suddenly probable big hit” Similar control is performed. In the case of “small hit”, the game state does not change after the opening of the big winning opening twice, and the game state before “small hit” is maintained (described later). Steps S147 to S151). By doing so, it is made impossible to recognize whether it is “suddenly promising big hit” or “small hit”, and the interest of the game is improved.

  The big hit type determination tables 131a and 131b are numerical values to be compared with a random 1 value, and corresponding to the “normal big hit”, “probability variable big hit”, and “sudden probable big hit” (big hit type determination value) ) Is set. When the value of random 1 matches any of the jackpot type determination values, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type as a type corresponding to the matched jackpot type determination value.

  34A to 34C are explanatory diagrams showing the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C. The jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the variation pattern type is determined according to the determination result of the jackpot type, and the random number for determining the variation pattern type. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on (Random 2).

  Each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C includes numerical values (determination values) to be compared with random value (random 2) values for variation pattern type determination, which are normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2, A determination value corresponding to any one of the variation pattern types of super CA3-3, special CA4-1, and special CA4-2 is set.

  For example, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A shown in FIG. 34A used when the big hit type is “normal big hit”, and FIG. 34B used when the big hit type is “probable big hit”. The allocation of determination values for the variation pattern types of normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2 and super CA3-3 is different from the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B.

  As described above, when the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C selected according to the big hit type are compared, the assignment of the determination value to each fluctuation pattern type is different according to the big hit type. Also, determination values are assigned to different variation pattern types depending on the jackpot type. Therefore, different variation pattern types can be determined according to the determination result of whether the big hit type is a plurality of types, and the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type can be varied.

  As shown in FIGS. 34 (A) and 34 (B), in this embodiment, the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type is 150 to 251 when the normal big hit or the probable big hit. If so, it can be seen that a variable display with at least super reach (super reach A, super reach B) is executed.

  In addition, for the super reach big hit, the variation pattern type with pseudo-continuity (variation pattern type including the variation pattern of Super PA3-3 and Super PA3-4) and the variation pattern type without super-continuity (Super PB3-3, Super It may be divided into a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of PB3-4. In this case, in both the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A for normal big hit and the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B for probability variation big hit, the variation pattern type with super reach and pseudo-ream, super reach and pseudo ream A variation pattern type that is not accompanied is assigned.

  In the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132C used when the big hit type is “suddenly probable big hit”, for example, when the big hit type such as special CA4-1 or special CA4-2 is other than “suddenly probable big hit”. A determination value is assigned to a variation pattern type to which no determination value is assigned. Therefore, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “suddenly probable big hit”, when the control is made to the two round big hit state, the variation pattern type is different from the case of controlling to the 15 round big hit state. Can be determined.

  FIG. 34D is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D. The small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D has a plurality of variation pattern types based on a random number (random 2) for variation pattern type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a small hit symbol. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine any of the above. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 34 (D), when it is determined to be a small hit, the case where the special CA4-1 is determined as the variation pattern type is shown. .

  FIGS. 35A to 35C are explanatory diagrams showing the deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C. Among these, FIG. 35 (A) shows the variation pattern type determination table 135A for loss used when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is less than 3. FIG. 35B shows a loss variation pattern type determination table 135B used when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is 3 or more. FIG. 35 (C) shows an outlier variation pattern type determination table 135C used when the gaming state is a probability variation state or a time reduction state. The deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C have a plurality of variation pattern types based on a random number (random 2) for variation pattern type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a loss symbol. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine any of the above.

  Note that the example shown in FIG. 35 shows a case where separate outlier variation pattern type determination tables 135B and 135C are used for the case where the gaming state is the probability change state or the short-time state and the case where the total number of pending storages is 3 or more. However, a common variation pattern type determination table for losing may be used in the case of the probability variation state or the time-short state and the case where the total number of pending storages is 3 or more. In addition, the example shown in FIG. 35C shows a case where one variation variation time type determination table 135C for probability variation / time reduction is used, but as a variation pattern type determination table for deviation variation for probability variation / time reduction state. A plurality of deviation variation pattern determination tables (tables with different ratios of determination values) corresponding to the total number of pending storages may be used.

  In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135A used when the total pending storage number is less than 3 and the total pending storage number is 3 or more. In this example, two types of tables are used, namely, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135B. However, the method of dividing the variation variation pattern type determination table is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, a separate deviation variation pattern type determination table may be provided for each value of the total pending storage number (that is, for the total pending storage number 0, for the total pending storage number 1, for the total pending storage number 2) , The deviation variation pattern type determination table for the total pending storage number 3, for the total pending storage number 4... May be used separately). Further, for example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table corresponding to a combination of a plurality of other values stored in the total number of pending storages may be used. For example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table for the total pending storage number 0-2, the total pending storage number 3, the total pending storage number 4,... May be used.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which a plurality of deviation variation pattern type determination tables are provided according to the total number of reserved storages, but deviation variation pattern type determination is performed according to the first and second reserved memory numbers. A plurality of tables may be provided. For example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, a deviation variation pattern type determination table prepared separately for each value of the first reserved memory number may be used (that is, the first reserved memory number). The deviation variation pattern type determination table for 0, for the first reserved memory number, for the first reserved memory number for 2, for the first reserved memory number for three, for the first reserved memory number for four, etc. Each may be used separately). Further, for example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table corresponding to a combination of a plurality of other values of the first reserved storage number may be used. For example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table for the first reserved memory number 0 to 2, the first reserved memory number 3, the first reserved memory number 4, and so on may be used. Even in this case, when the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are large (for example, 3 or more), it may be configured such that a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with a short variation time is easily selected. . Even in such a case, a common determination value may be assigned to a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach as a specific variable display pattern.

  The “specific variable display pattern” refers to a variation pattern such as a variation pattern with super reach, which is set with a high expectation level for at least a big hit and can give the player a sense of expectation for the big hit. In addition, the “expected degree (reliability) for the big hit” is an appearance rate (probability) at which a big hit appears when variable display (for example, variable display with super reach) by the specific variable display pattern is executed. Show. For example, the expectation degree of jackpot when the variable display with super reach is executed is determined as (the rate at which super reach is executed when jackpot is determined) / (when jackpot is determined and lost) Is calculated by calculating the rate at which super reach is performed on both.

  Each of the deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135B includes a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (random 2) value for variation pattern type determination, which is non-reach CA2-1 to non-reach CA2-. 3, a determination value corresponding to one of the variation pattern types of normal CA2-4 to normal CA2-6 and super CA2-7 is set.

  As shown in FIGS. 35 (A) and 35 (B), in this embodiment, when the game state is out of the game and the normal state, the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type is used. Is 230 to 251, it can be seen that variable display with at least super reach (super reach A, super reach B) is executed regardless of the total number of pending storage.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 35A and 35B, in this embodiment, when the game state is out of the game and the game state is the normal state, the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type Is 1 to 79, it can be seen that the fluctuation display of the normal fluctuation is executed at least without the reach (without the specific effect such as the pseudo ream and the slide effect) regardless of the total number of the pending storage. Due to such a table configuration, in this embodiment, the determination table (displacement variation pattern type determination table 135A, 135B) includes at least one of the variable display patterns other than the reach variable display pattern (variation pattern with reach). Regardless of the number of rights (first reserved memory number, second reserved memory number, combined reserved memory number) stored in the reserved memory means (first reserved memory buffer or second reserved memory buffer) for a part, Common determination values (1 to 79 in the example shown in FIGS. 35A and 35B) are assigned. The “variable display pattern other than the reach variable display pattern” means, for example, as shown in this embodiment, a variable display result without a reach, a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream or a slide effect, and the like. Is a variable display pattern (fluctuation pattern) that is used when the big hit is not a big hit.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 34, the common big hit variation pattern type determination table is used regardless of the current gaming state. However, is the current gaming state in a probable variation state? Depending on whether the time is short or normal, a big hit variation pattern type determination table prepared separately may be used. In this embodiment, when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the fluctuation pattern type determination table for shortening shown in FIG. 35B is selected to determine the fluctuation pattern of the shortening fluctuation. Although the case where it is configured so that there is a case is shown, the total number of reserved memories (the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number may be used) when the variation pattern of the shortening variation can be selected according to the current gaming state ) May be different. For example, when the gaming state is the normal state, when the total number of reserved memory is 3 (or when the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number is 2, for example), The variation pattern type determination table for loss is selected so that the variation pattern of the shortened variation may be determined. When the gaming state is a short-time state or a probable variation state, the total number of pending storages is smaller 1 or 2 (Or, for example, even when the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are smaller 0 or 1), the variation pattern type of shortening variation is selected by selecting the shortening variation pattern type determination table. It may be determined.

  FIGS. 36A and 36B are explanatory diagrams showing hit variation pattern determination tables 137 </ b> A to 137 </ b> B stored in the ROM 54. The hit fluctuation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B determine the fluctuation pattern according to the determination result of the big hit type or the fluctuation pattern type when it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on a random number (random 3). Each of the variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, the hit variation pattern determination table 137A is selected as the usage table in accordance with the determination result that the variation pattern type is one of normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2 or super CA3-3, and the variation pattern type is specially selected. The hit variation pattern determination table 137B is selected as the use table in accordance with the determination result indicating that either CA4-1 or special CA4-2 is selected. Each hit variation pattern determination table 137A to 137B is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random pattern random number (random 3) value according to the variation pattern type, and the variable display result of the effect symbol is Data (determination value) corresponding to any of a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the case of “big hit” is included.

  In the example shown in FIG. 36A, the variation pattern types include normal CA3-1, which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with only normal reach, and variation pattern types, including a variation pattern with normal reach and pseudo-continuity. A case is shown in which a normal CA 3-2 is classified into a normal CA 3-2 and a super CA 3-3 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach (which may be accompanied by a pseudo-ream). In the example shown in FIG. 36B, as the variation pattern types, special CA4-1, which is a variation pattern type including a non-reach variation pattern, and special CA4-, which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with reach, are used. 2 shows a case of classification into two. In FIG. 36B, the variation pattern type may be divided according to the presence / absence of a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream or a slip effect, instead of being classified according to the presence / absence of reach. In this case, for example, the special CA 4-1 includes a special PG 1-1 and a special PG 2-1 that are fluctuation patterns not accompanied by a specific effect, and the special CA 4-2 includes a special PG 1-2, a special effect PG 1-2, and a special effect. You may comprise so that PG1-3 and special PG2-2 may be included.

  FIG. 37 is an explanatory diagram showing a deviation variation pattern determination table 138A stored in the ROM 54. When it is determined that the variable display result is “out of”, the deviation variation pattern determination table 138A is based on a random number (random 3) for variation pattern determination according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. It is a table referred to in order to determine any one of a plurality of types of variation patterns. The deviation variation pattern determination table 138A is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type.

  Note that, as shown in FIGS. 34 to 37, in this embodiment, the common variation is not distinguished between the case where the variation display of the first special symbol is performed and the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is performed. A pattern type determination table or a variation pattern determination table is used.

  FIG. 38 and FIG. 39 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. In the example shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, the command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of the effect symbol that is variably displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to variable display of the special symbol. (Each corresponding to a variation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the usable variation patterns shown in FIG. 31, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by the number. “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number. Further, the effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the variation start of the effect symbol. Therefore, when the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the command 80XX (H), the effect display device 9 controls the effect display device 9 to start variable display of the effect symbols. Further, as shown in FIG. 38, in this embodiment, a common variation pattern command is used without distinguishing between the case where the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. Is sent.

  Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit, whether or not to make a big hit, and a big hit type. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the display result of the effect symbols in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H), so the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are referred to as display result designation commands.

  Command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable display (fluctuation) of the fourth symbol is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When receiving the symbol confirmation designation command, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the variable display (fluctuation) of the fourth symbol and derives and displays the display result.

  Command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and if not, initialization designation is performed. Send a command.

  Command 95XX (H) is an effect control command (winning time determination result designation command) indicating the contents of the winning time determination result. In this embodiment, in the winning effect processing described later (see FIG. 48), the game control microcomputer 560 determines the range of the determination value within which the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type falls within the starting prize. judge. Then, a value for specifying the range of the determination value as the determination result is set in the EXT data of the determination result specifying command at the time of winning, and control to transmit to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed. In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 can recognize the variation pattern type when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number becomes a predetermined determination value based on the winning determination result designation command. At the same time, it can be recognized whether or not the display result is a big hit.

  40 to 43 are explanatory diagrams illustrating an example of the content of the winning determination result designation command. As shown in FIGS. 40 to 43, in this embodiment, in which gaming state the winning determination is made when the start winning prize is made in either the first start winning prize opening 13 or the second starting winning prize opening 14. EXT data depending on whether there is a display result of the special symbol or production symbol, and whether the random value for determining the variation pattern type falls within the range of the determination value at the time of starting winning. Is set, and a winning determination result designation command is transmitted.

  For example, when it is determined that the gaming state is in a normal state and is out of place at the time of starting winning at the first starting winning opening 13, in step S229 of winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines a random number for determining the variation pattern type. It is determined whether or not the value is 1 to 79. When the value of the random number for variation pattern type determination is 1 to 79, the CPU 56 transmits a winning determination result 1 designation command in which “00 (H)” is set in the EXT data. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the non-reach CA2-1 variation pattern type is commonly assigned to the range of determination values 1 to 79 regardless of the total number of pending storage. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 100 can recognize that at least the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-1 based on the reception of the winning determination result 1 designation command. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 80 to 89, the CPU 56 transmits a winning determination result 2 designation command in which “01 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 90 to 99, the CPU 56 transmits a winning determination result 3 designation command in which “02 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for variation pattern type determination is between 100 and 169, the CPU 56 transmits a winning determination result 4 designation command in which “03 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for variation pattern type determination is 170 to 199, the CPU 56 transmits a winning determination result 5 designation command in which “04 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 200 to 214, the CPU 56 transmits a winning determination result 6 designation command in which “05 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type becomes 215 to 229, the CPU 56 transmits a winning determination result 7 designation command in which “06 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 230 to 251, the CPU 56 transmits a winning determination result 8 designation command in which “07 (H)” is set in the EXT data. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 is commonly assigned to the range of the determination values 230 to 251 regardless of the total pending storage number. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 100 can recognize that at least the variation pattern type is super CA2-7 based on the reception of the winning determination result 8 designation command.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that the gaming state is in the probable change state / short time state and out of place at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening 13, in step S229 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first changes the variation pattern. It is determined whether or not the type determination random number is 1 to 219. When the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 219 (that is, when the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-3), the CPU 56 receives a prize in which “08 (H)” is set in the EXT data. A time determination result 9 designation command is transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “09 (H)” to the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 220 to 251 (that is, the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7). A winning determination result 10 designation command is transmitted.

  Note that the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 may be assigned to the range of the determination values 230 to 251 even when the gaming state is the probability variation state or the short time state. By doing so, a common determination value can be assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 regardless of the gaming state. Therefore, when executing the process of step S229 of the effect process at the time of winning, which will be described later, if it is off, common determination processing may be performed regardless of the gaming state, and the program capacity can be further reduced. In this case, the game state determination process in step S224 can be made unnecessary.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that a normal big hit is made at the time of a start winning to the first start winning opening 13, in step S229 of a winning effect process described later, the CPU 56 first determines that the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1. It is determined whether or not .about.74. When the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 74 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA 3-1), the CPU 56 receives a prize when “0A (H)” is set in the EXT data. A determination result 11 designation command is transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “0B (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 75 to 149 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-2). A winning determination result 12 designation command is transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “0C (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 150 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is super CA3-3). A winning determination result 13 designation command is transmitted.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that a winning big hit is made at the time of starting winning the first starting winning opening 13, in step S229 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines that the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1. It is determined whether or not .about.38. When the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 38 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA 3-1), the CPU 56 receives a prize when “0D (H)” is set in the EXT data. The determination result 14 designation command is transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “0E (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 39 to 79 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-2). A winning determination result 15 designation command is transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “0F (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 80 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is super CA3-3). A winning determination result 16 designation command is transmitted.

  Also, for example, when it is determined that the winning odds suddenly become a big hit when the first winning prize opening 13 is won, in step S229 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type. It is determined whether or not 1-100. When the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 100 (that is, when the variation pattern type is special CA4-1), the CPU 56 receives a prize when “10 (H)” is set in the EXT data. A determination result 17 designation command is transmitted. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 101 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is special CA4-2), the CPU 56 receives a winning when “11 (H)” is set in the EXT data. A determination result 18 designation command is transmitted.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that a small win is made at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening 13, the CPU 56 transmits a winning determination result 19 designation command in which “12 (H)” is set in the EXT data.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that the gaming state is in a normal state and deviates from the start winning prize to the second start winning opening 14, in step S229 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines the variation pattern type. It is determined whether or not the random number value is 1 to 79. When the value of the random number for variation pattern type determination is 1 to 79, the CPU 56 transmits a winning determination result 21 designation command in which “20 (H)” is set in the EXT data. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the non-reach CA2-1 variation pattern type is commonly assigned to the range of determination values 1 to 79 regardless of the total number of pending storage. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 100 can recognize that at least the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-1 based on the reception of the winning determination result 21 designation command. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 80 to 89, the CPU 56 transmits a winning determination result 22 designation command in which “21 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 90 to 99, the CPU 56 transmits a winning determination result 23 designation command in which “22 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is between 100 and 169, the CPU 56 transmits a winning determination result 24 designation command in which “23 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 170 to 199, the CPU 56 transmits a winning determination result 25 designation command in which “24 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for variation pattern type determination is 200 to 214, the CPU 56 transmits a winning determination result 26 designation command in which “25 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 215 to 229, the CPU 56 transmits a winning determination result 27 designation command in which “26 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for variation pattern type determination is 230 to 251, the CPU 56 transmits a winning determination result 28 designation command in which “27 (H)” is set in the EXT data. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 is commonly assigned to the range of the determination values 230 to 251 regardless of the total pending storage number. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 100 can recognize that at least the variation pattern type is super CA2-7 based on the reception of the winning determination result 28 designation command.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that the gaming state is in the probable change state / short time state and out of place at the time of the start winning to the second start winning opening 14, in step S229 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first changes the variation pattern. It is determined whether or not the type determination random number is 1 to 219. When the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 219 (that is, when the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-3), the CPU 56 receives a winning in which “28 (H)” is set in the EXT data. A time determination result 29 designation command is transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “29 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 220 to 251 (that is, the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7). A winning determination result 30 designation command is transmitted.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that a normal big hit is made at the time of starting winning to the second starting winning opening 14, in step S229 of winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines that the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1. It is determined whether or not .about.74. When the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 74 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-1), the CPU 56 receives a winning when “2A (H)” is set in the EXT data. A determination result 31 designation command is transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “2B (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for variation pattern type determination is 75 to 149 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-2). A winning determination result 32 designation command is transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “2C (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 150 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is super CA3-3). A winning determination result 33 designation command is transmitted.

  Also, for example, when it is determined that the winning odds will be a big win at the time of starting winning to the second starting winning opening 14, in step S229 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines that the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1. It is determined whether or not .about.38. When the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 38 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA 3-1), the CPU 56 receives a prize when “2D (H)” is set in the EXT data. The determination result 34 designation command is transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “2E (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 39 to 79 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-2). A winning determination result 35 designation command is transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “2F (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 80 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is super CA3-3). A winning determination result 36 designation command is transmitted.

  Also, for example, when it is determined that a sudden probability change is a big win at the start winning to the second start winning opening 14, in step S229 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type. It is determined whether or not 1-100. When the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 100 (that is, when the variation pattern type is special CA4-1), the CPU 56 receives a prize when “30 (H)” is set in the EXT data. The determination result 37 designation command is transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “31 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 101 to 251 (that is, the variation pattern type of the special CA4-2). A winning determination result 38 designation command is transmitted.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that a small win is made at the time of starting winning to the second starting winning opening 14, the CPU 56 transmits a winning determination result 39 designation command in which “32 (H)” is set in the EXT data.

  Note that the total number of pending storage is not always the same when the winning determination is made at the time of starting winning and when the variable display is actually started, so the fluctuation indicated by the winning determination result designation command There may be a case where the pattern type does not coincide with the variation pattern type actually used in the variation display. However, in this embodiment, since at least the non-reach CA 2-1, super CA 2-7 and super CA 3-3 fluctuation pattern types are assigned a common determination value regardless of the total number of pending storages. (See FIGS. 34 and 35), there is no mismatch between the winning determination result and the variation pattern type of the variation display that is actually executed. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-1, super CA2-7, or super CA3-3, the continuous notice effect described later is executed for the variation display determined at the time of winning. Only when it is determined that the non-reach CA 2-1, super CA 2-7, and super CA 3-3 variation pattern types are used, the winning determination result designation command shown in FIGS. Determination result 1 designation, winning judgment result 8 designation, winning judgment result 13 designation, winning judgment result 16 designation, winning judgment result 21 designation, winning judgment result 28 designation, winning judgment result 33 designation, and winning prize The determination result 36 designation command only) may be transmitted, and in the case of other winning determination results, the winning determination result specifying command may not be transmitted. Further, when it is determined at the time of winning if it is other than non-reach CA2-1, super CA2-7, or super CA3-3, a winning determination result designation command indicating that the variation pattern type cannot be specified is transmitted. It may be.

  Note that the “continuous notice effect” is a notice effect that is continuously executed over a plurality of variable displays before the start of the variable display that is the target of the notice effect. However, it is not always necessary to execute the notice effect over a plurality of variable displays. For example, the notice effect is performed only once in the variable display before the start of the variable display subject to the notice effect. There may be. Also, for example, the notice effect is started from the change display before the start of the change display targeted for the notice effect, and the notice effect is displayed until the change display immediately before the change display targeted for the notice effect. It may end, or it may perform a notice effect over a variable display that is the subject of the notice effect.

  In this embodiment, the determination result at the time of winning including the MODE data “95 (H)” common to the starting winning at the first starting winning opening 13 and the starting winning at the second starting winning opening 14 is designated. Although the command is transmitted, even if the MODE data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning is different between the starting winning to the first starting winning opening 13 and the starting winning to the second starting winning opening 14. Good. For example, at the time of starting winning at the first starting winning opening 13, a winning result designation command including MODE data “95 (H)” is transmitted, and at the time of starting winning at the second starting winning opening 14, MODE data “ 96 (H) "may be transmitted as a winning result designation command. In this case, regardless of whether it is a start winning to the first start winning opening 13 or a start winning to the second starting winning opening 14, which game state is displayed, a special symbol or an effect symbol is displayed. Winning determination result designation command including common EXT data, depending on which display result is the result and whether the value of the random number for variation pattern type determination is determined to be in the range of the determination value at the start winning May be transmitted.

  Command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  The commands A001 to A003 (H) are effect control commands for displaying the fanfare screen, that is, designating the start of the big hit game (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command). The jackpot start designation command includes a jackpot start 1 designation command, a jackpot start designation 2 designation command, and a small hit / sudden probability sudden change jackpot start designation command corresponding to the type of jackpot. It should be noted that the game control microcomputer 560 may be configured to transmit a fanfare designation command for suddenly probable big hit start designation in the case of a sudden big hit, but not to send a fanfare designation command in the case of a small hit. Good.

  The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (special command during opening of a special winning opening) indicating a display of the number of times (round) indicated by XX while the special winning opening is open. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the big winning opening) indicating the closing of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

  The command A301 (H) is an effect control command for displaying the jackpot end screen, that is, the end of the jackpot game and specifying that the jackpot game is normally a big jackpot (a jackpot end 1 designation command: an ending 1 designation command). is there. Command A302 (H) is an effect control command for displaying the jackpot end screen, that is, the end of the jackpot game and specifying that it is a probable big hit (big hit end 2 designation command: ending 2 designation command). is there. The command A303 (H) is an effect control command (small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit end designation command: ending 3 designation command) that designates the end of the small hit game or the sudden probability change big hit game. The game control microcomputer 560 may be configured to transmit an ending designation command for suddenly probable big hit end designation in the case of a sudden big hit, but not to send an ending designation command in the case of a small hit. Good.

  Command B000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state background designation command) for designating background display when the gaming state is the normal state. Command B001 (H) is an effect control command (time-short state background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is the time-short state (not including the probability variation state). Command B002 (H) is an effect control command (probability change state background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is in the probability change state.

  Command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first reserved memory number addition designation command) that specifies that the first reserved memory number has increased by one. Command C100 (H) is an effect control command (second reserved memory number addition designation command) that specifies that the second reserved memory number has increased by one. Command C200 (H) is an effect control command (first reserved memory number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the first reserved memory number has decreased by one. Command C300 (H) is an effect control command (second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the second reserved memory number has decreased by one.

  In this embodiment, the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command and the second reserved memory number subtraction designation command are transmitted prior to the variation pattern command and the display result designation command when the variation display is started. Specifically, in this embodiment, when the variable display is started, the pending storage number subtraction designation command, the fluctuation pattern command, and the display result designation command are transmitted in this order. Further, the production control microcomputer 100 can specify which of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is to be displayed based on the received reserved memory number subtraction designation command at the start of the variation. It is. Then, control is performed to start the variation display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the variation display of the specified special symbol.

  In this embodiment, for the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number, a case where an effect control command indicating that the reserved memory number has increased is shown, but the reserved memory number itself is used. You may make it transmit the production | presentation control command to designate. In this case, for example, an effect control command for designating which one of the first start prize opening 13 and the second start prize opening 14 has been won is transmitted, and the reserved memory number designation command for designating the reserved memory number is designated as the first. You may make it transmit a common production | presentation control command by 1 reserved memory number and 2nd reserved memory number.

  Further, for example, separate presentation control commands (holding memory number designation commands) may be transmitted when the first holding memory number is designated and when the second holding memory number is designated. In this case, for example, as a reserved memory number designation command, a value that can specify the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number as MODE data (for example, “C0 (H) when designating the first reserved memory number) ”And“ C1 (H) ”in the case of designating the second reserved memory number), an effect control command in which the value of the reserved memory number is set as EXT data may be transmitted.

  Also, for example, if the same first reserved memory number is specified, an effect control command specifying the addition or subtraction of the first reserved memory number is transmitted by making the MODE data common and different EXT data. You may do it. For example, when the common MODE data “C0 (H)” is used and the subtraction of the first reserved memory number is designated, the command C000 (H) is transmitted, and the addition of the first reserved memory number is designated. The command C001 (H) may be transmitted. Further, when specifying the second reserved memory number, the MODE data is made different, and when specifying the subtraction of the second reserved memory number, the command C100 (H) is transmitted, and the second reserved memory number is determined. When adding is designated, the command C101 (H) may be transmitted.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the image display device 9 is changed according to the contents shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, the display state of the lamp is changed, or the sound number data is output to the sound output board 70. To do.

  For example, the game control microcomputer 560 designates the variation pattern of the effect symbol every time there is a start prize and variable display of the special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. The variation pattern command and the display result designation command are transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  In this embodiment, the effect control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to “1”, and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always set to “0”. Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  In the example shown in FIG. 38 and FIG. 39, the variable pattern command and the display result designation command are displayed as variable display (variation) of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol. Image display that can be used in common with variable display (variation) of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol on the symbol display 8b, and that produces an effect with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is possible to prevent an increase in the types of commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 100 when controlling the effect parts such as the device 9.

  44 and 45 are flowcharts showing an example of a program of special symbol process (step S26) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the special symbol process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process, the CPU 56 turns on the first start winning opening 13 when the first start opening switch 13a for detecting that the game ball has won the first start winning opening 13 is turned on. If a winning has occurred, a first start port switch passage process is executed (steps S311 and S312). If the second start port switch 14a for detecting that the game ball has won the second start winning port 14 is turned on, that is, the start winning to the second start winning port 14 has occurred. Then, the second start port switch passage process is executed (steps S313, S314). Then, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed. If the first start winning port switch 13a or the second start port switch 14a is not turned on, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed according to the internal state.

  The processes in steps S300 to S310 are as follows.

  Special symbol normal processing (step S300): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where variable display of the special symbol can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 checks the number of numerical data stored in the reserved storage number buffer (total number of reserved storage). The stored number of numerical data stored in the pending storage number buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total pending storage number counter. If the count value of the total pending storage number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit. In case of big hit, set big hit flag. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S301. The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends.

  Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S301): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of variable display until the display result is derived and displayed (stop display)) is defined as the variation display variation time of the special symbol. Decide to do. Also, a variable time timer for measuring the special symbol variable time is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S302.

  Display result designation command transmission process (step S302): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S303.

  Special symbol changing process (step S303): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the variation time timer value becomes 0), the design control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol. Control to transmit the specified command is performed, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to step S304. The effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to stop the fourth symbol when receiving the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560.

  Special symbol stop process (step S304): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. When the big hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. If the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. When neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S300 (in this example, 0). In this embodiment, as will be described later, a special symbol display control for stopping and displaying a special symbol stop symbol in the special symbol display control process based on the fact that the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. The data is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data (see FIG. 56), and the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed according to the setting contents of the output buffer in the display control processing in step S22.

  Preliminary winning opening opening process (step S305): This is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. In the pre-opening process for the big prize opening, control for opening the big prize opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. Also, the execution time of the special prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S306 (6 in this example). The pre-opening process for the big winning opening is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the pre-opening process for the big winning opening is also a process for starting the big hit game.

  Large winning opening opening process (step S306): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. A control for transmitting an effect control command for round display during the big hit gaming state to the effect control microcomputer 100, a process for confirming the completion of the closing condition of the big prize opening, and the like are performed. If the closing condition for the special prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. When all the rounds are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S307 (7 in this example).

  Big hit end process (step S307): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. In addition, a process for setting a flag indicating a gaming state (for example, a probability change flag or a time reduction flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  Small hit release pre-processing (step S308): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the pre-opening process for small hits, control is performed to open the big prize opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. Also, the execution time of the special prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S309 (9 in this example). It should be noted that although the pre-opening process for small hits is executed for each round, the pre-opening process for small hits is also a process for starting a small hit game when starting the first round.

  Small hit release processing (step S309): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 9. Processing to confirm the establishment of the closing condition of the big prize opening is performed. If the closing condition for the big prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S308 (8 in this example). When all rounds are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S310 (in this example, 10 (decimal number)).

  Small hit end processing (step S310): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the small hit gaming state has ended. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the start-port switch passing process in steps S312 and S314. Among these, FIG. 46 (A) is a flowchart showing the first start port switch passing process of step S312. FIG. 46B is a flowchart showing the second start port switch passing process in step S314.

  First, the first start port switch passing process will be described with reference to FIG. In the first start port switch passing process executed when the first start port switch 13a is in the ON state, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the first reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the first hold port number). Whether or not the value of the first reserved memory number counter for counting the memory number is 4 is confirmed (step S201A).

  If the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S202A), and the value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number Is increased by 1 (step S203A). Next, the CPU 56 specifies a random number value register from which numerical data serving as a jackpot determination random number (random R) is read (step S204A).

  In this embodiment, when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening 13, the random number register R1D is used as a reading source of numerical data, while the game ball passes the second start winning opening 14. In the case of (entry), the random number value register R2D is set as a reading source of numerical data. Therefore, in step S204A, the CPU 56 specifies the random value register R1D as a reading source.

  Next, the CPU 56 extracts numerical data from the random number value register of the identified random number circuit 509 and also extracts values from a counter for generating software random numbers (step S205A), and stores them in the first reserved storage buffer (FIG. 47) (step S206A). In the processing of steps S205A and S206A, random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, random number for variation pattern type determination (random 2), and A random number for random pattern determination (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. Note that the random number for random pattern determination (random 3) is not extracted in the first start port switch passing process (at the time of start winning) and stored in the storage area in advance, but is extracted at the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol. You may do it. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in a variation pattern setting process described later.

  In step S205A, based on the fact that the random value register R1D has been identified as the read source in the process of step S204A, numerical data is read and extracted from the random value register 559A serving as the random value register R1D included in the random number circuit 509. In this case, the random number latch flag corresponding to the random number value register R1D from which the numerical data has been read is turned off. That is, when the random value register R1D is specified as the reading source in the process of step S204A, the bit value of the random number latch flag data RDFM0 is updated from “1” to “0” by reading the numerical data by the process of step S205A. The random number latch flag associated with the random value register R1D is turned off.

  Note that the numerical data read from the random value register R1D may be stored as it is in the first pending storage buffer as a big hit determination random number (random R), or may be stored after performing a predetermined processing. It may be. As an example, the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 509 is temporarily stored in a 16-bit general-purpose register included in the CPU 56. Subsequently, a refresh register value that is a stored value of a refresh register built in the CPU 56 is read as numerical data that becomes a random number value for processing. In this case, the refresh register value may be added to the upper byte in the general-purpose register, while the lower byte may be left as it is. Here, instead of adding the refresh register value, predetermined arithmetic processing such as subtraction, logical sum, and logical product may be executed. Alternatively, the refresh register value may be added to the lower byte in the general-purpose register. Also, the upper byte and lower byte of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 509 may be exchanged and stored as the upper byte or lower byte in the general-purpose register. Furthermore, after the refresh register value is added to the high-order byte or low-order byte in the general-purpose register, or without performing arithmetic processing such as addition to the high-order byte or low-order byte in the general-purpose register, the high-order byte and the low-order byte are switched. It may be. Of the upper byte and lower byte of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 509, the data of a specific bit may be replaced with the data of other bits. In this case, for example, in the bus connecting the random number value register R1D in the random number circuit 509 and the upper byte or lower byte of the general-purpose register, the wiring is crossed so that the data of a specific bit is replaced with the data of another bit. You can do it. Thereafter, the CPU 56 performs an AND operation on the stored value of the general-purpose register and a predetermined logical value (for example, “FFFFH”), or outputs the stored value of the general-purpose register as it is and stores it in a predetermined area of the RAM 55. Thus, numerical data indicating the 16-bit random value MR1 may be set. For example, when setting numerical data indicating a 14-bit random number value, a 14-bit value can be acquired by performing an AND operation on the stored value of the general-purpose register and “7F7FH”. . Further, a logical sum operation may be executed instead of the logical product operation.

  Further, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the addition value may be set based on the stored value of the general-purpose register. As an example, when the numerical data indicating the random value for determining the addition value takes a value in the range of “0” to “7”, the stored value of the general-purpose register and “C0C0H” or the like are ANDed. Numerical data indicating a 4-bit random value may be set by storing it in a predetermined area of the RAM 55 or the like.

  FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (hold buffer) for storing random numbers and the like corresponding to hold storage. As shown in FIG. 47, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured in the second reserved storage buffer. In this embodiment, the first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer include a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation A random number for pattern type determination (random 2) and a random number for variation pattern determination (random 3) are stored. The first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not a time reduction flag indicating that the gaming state is a time reduction state (including a probability change state) is set (step S207A). If it is set, the process proceeds to step S210A. If the time reduction flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (step S208A). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (that is, if it is a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state), the CPU 56 proceeds to step S210A as it is.

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 5, the CPU 56 executes a winning presentation process for preliminarily determining the variation display result when the variation based on the detected starting winning is executed at the time of starting winning (step S209A). ). Then, the CPU 56 performs control for transmitting the first reserved memory number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 and, at the same time, receives the prize determination result designation command based on the determination result of the prize effect process. Control to transmit to 100 is performed (step S210A).

  If the winning effect processing in step S209A is not executed because it is determined as Y in step S207A or step S208A, the CPU 56 transmits only the first reserved memory number addition designation command in step S210A. The control for transmitting the winning determination result designation command is not performed. In addition, when the effect process at the time of winning in step S209A is not executed, a determination result at the time of winning that sets a value (for example, “FF (H)”) indicating that the winning determination result cannot be specified as EXT data is designated. A command may be transmitted.

  In this embodiment, when the process of step S207A is executed and there is a start winning to the first start winning opening 13, when the gaming state is a normal state (even in the probability changing state, the time-saving state). If not, the winning effect process in step S209A is executed. Further, in this embodiment, when the process of step S208A is executed, and there is a start winning at the first start winning opening 13, step S209A is performed only when it is not the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The award winning directing process is executed. It should be noted that the process may not be shifted to step S209A only when the game state is a big hit game state, and the process may be executed at step S209A when the game state is a small hit game state.

  In this embodiment, when the probability variation state is set, a probability variation flag, which will be described later, is set and a time reduction flag is set. In the case of the time-short state, only the time-short flag is set (see steps S167, S170, S171 in FIG. 55). Therefore, in this embodiment, if it is confirmed whether or not the time reduction flag is set, it can be determined that the state is at least one of the probability changing state or the time reduction state. Therefore, in the process shown in step S207A, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the time change flag or the time reduction state is set by determining whether or not the time reduction flag is set.

  In this embodiment, the big hit gaming state (specific gaming state) is a control in which the big prize opening is opened for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) after notification that the big hit is started. It is a state until it is informed that the opening of the big winning opening in the final round is finished and the jackpot is finished. Specifically, it is a state in which the processes from the big winning opening opening pre-process (see step S305) to the big hit end process (see step S307) in the special symbol process are executed.

  If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value (Y in step S201A), the random number latch flag is cleared by reading the random number value register (step S211A), and then the first start port switch passing process is terminated. In the process of step S211A, the numerical data stored in the random value register R1D is read in correspondence with the case where the game ball has passed (entered) the first start winning opening 13.

  Next, the second start port switch passing process will be described with reference to FIG. In the second start port switch passing process executed when the second start port switch 14a is in the ON state, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the second reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the second hold port number). It is confirmed whether or not the value of the second reserved storage number counter for counting the stored number is 4) (step S201B).

  If the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the second reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S202B), and the value of the aggregate reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number Is increased by 1 (step S203B). Next, the CPU 56 specifies a random value register from which numerical data to be a big hit determination random number (random R) is read (step S204B).

  In this embodiment, when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening 13, the random number register R1D is used as a reading source of numerical data, while the game ball passes the second start winning opening 14. In the case of (entry), the random number value register R2D is set as a reading source of numerical data. Therefore, in step S204B, the CPU 56 specifies the random value register R2D as a reading source.

  Next, the CPU 56 extracts numerical data from the specified random number register of the random number circuit 509 and extracts a value from a counter for generating software random numbers (step S205B), and stores them in the second reserved storage buffer (FIG. 47) is executed (step S206B). In the processing of steps S205B and S206B, random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, random number for variation pattern type determination (random 2), and A random number for random pattern determination (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. Note that the random number for random pattern determination (random 3) is not extracted in the second start port switch passing process (at the time of start winning) and stored in the storage area in advance, but is extracted at the start of the variation of the second special symbol. You may do it. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in a variation pattern setting process described later.

  In step S205B, based on the fact that the random value register R2D has been identified as the read source in the process of step S204B, numerical data is read and extracted from the random value register 559B as the random value register R2D included in the random number circuit 509. In this case, the random number latch flag corresponding to the random value register R2D from which the numerical data has been read is turned off. That is, when the random value register R2D is specified as a reading source in the process of step S204B, the bit value of the random number latch flag data RDFM1 is updated from “1” to “0” by reading the numerical data by the process of step S205B. The random number latch flag associated with the random value register R2D is turned off.

  The numerical data read from the random value register R2D may be stored as it is in the second pending storage buffer as a big hit determination random number (random R), or may be stored after performing a predetermined processing process. It may be. As an example, the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 509 is temporarily stored in a 16-bit general-purpose register included in the CPU 56. Subsequently, a refresh register value that is a stored value of a refresh register built in the CPU 56 is read as numerical data that becomes a random number value for processing. In this case, the refresh register value may be added to the upper byte in the general-purpose register, while the lower byte may be left as it is. Here, instead of adding the refresh register value, predetermined arithmetic processing such as subtraction, logical sum, and logical product may be executed. Alternatively, the refresh register value may be added to the lower byte in the general-purpose register. Also, the upper byte and lower byte of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 509 may be exchanged and stored as the upper byte or lower byte in the general-purpose register. Furthermore, after the refresh register value is added to the high-order byte or low-order byte in the general-purpose register, or without performing arithmetic processing such as addition to the high-order byte or low-order byte in the general-purpose register, the high-order byte and the low-order byte are switched. It may be. Of the upper byte and lower byte of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 509, the data of a specific bit may be replaced with the data of other bits. In this case, for example, in the bus connecting the random number value register R2D in the random number circuit 509 and the upper byte or lower byte of the general-purpose register, the wiring is crossed so that the data of a specific bit is replaced with the data of another bit. You can do it. Thereafter, the CPU 56 performs an AND operation on the stored value of the general-purpose register and a predetermined logical value (for example, “FFFFH”), or outputs the stored value of the general-purpose register as it is and stores it in a predetermined area of the RAM 55. Thus, numerical data indicating the 16-bit random value MR1 may be set. For example, when setting numerical data indicating a 14-bit random number value, a 14-bit value can be acquired by performing an AND operation on the stored value of the general-purpose register and “7F7FH”. . Further, a logical sum operation may be executed instead of the logical product operation.

  Further, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the addition value may be set based on the stored value of the general-purpose register. As an example, when the numerical data indicating the random value for determining the addition value takes a value in the range of “0” to “7”, the stored value of the general-purpose register and “C0C0H” or the like are ANDed. Numerical data indicating a 4-bit random value may be set by storing it in a predetermined area of the RAM 55 or the like.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes a winning effect processing (step S209B). Then, the CPU 56 performs control for transmitting the second reserved memory number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 and, at the same time, receives the prize determination result designation command based on the determination result of the prize effect process. Control to transmit to 100 is performed (step S210B).

  In the second start port switch passing process, the same process as in step S207A may be performed, and if the time is short, the winning effect process in step S209B may not be executed. Also, in the second start port switch passing process, the same process as in step S208A may be performed, and the winning effect process in step S209B may not be executed if the big hit game is being played. Further, in the second start port switch passing process, the winning effect process in step S209B may not be executed (that is, the winning determination process may not be executed for the second special symbol). . With such a configuration, when the continuous notice effect is executed for a certain period, it is possible to reliably prevent the continuous notice effect from being interrupted due to a short variation time.

  If the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value (Y in step S201B), the random number latch flag is cleared by reading the random number value register (step S211B), and the second start port switch passing process is terminated. In the process of step S211B, the numerical data stored in the random number register R2D is read in correspondence with the case where the game ball has passed (entered) the second start winning opening 14.

  When the first start winning signal SS1 or the second start winning signal SS2 is input to the random number circuit 509 from the first start port switch 13a or the second start port switch 14a without passing through the CPU 56, the first reserved memory Regardless of the number of reserved memories in the buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, a numerical value that becomes a random number value in the random value register R1D or the random value register R2D in response to the input of the first start prize signal SS1 or the second start prize signal SS2 Data will be stored. At this time, the random number latch flag corresponding to the random number value register in which numerical data is stored is turned on, and storage of new numerical data is restricted. Accordingly, when the number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than the upper limit value, if the numerical data stored in the random value register R1D or the random value register R2D is left without being read, the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 are opened When a new game ball passes (enters), new numerical data corresponding to this game ball pass (entry) cannot be taken in and stored in the random value register R1D or the random value register R2D. The numerical data stored corresponding to the game ball that has passed (entered) may be read out, and an accurate random value may not be acquired. Therefore, even when the number of stored data has reached the upper limit value, the process of steps S211A and S211B is executed, and the random number latch flag is cleared by reading the random number value register, so that a new game ball passes (enters). It is possible to acquire numerical data that is an accurate random value corresponding to the above. Note that the numerical data read from the random value register R1D or the random value register R2D by the processing in steps S211A and S211B is not used for the determination processing for determining whether or not the special figure display result is “big hit”. Just discard (erase) it.

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the winning effect processing in steps S209A and S209B. In the winning effect processing, first, the CPU 56 compares the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S205A and S205B with the normal jackpot determination value shown in the left column of FIG. It is confirmed whether or not they match (step S220). In this embodiment, at the timing of starting the variation of the special symbol and the production symbol, whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit in the special symbol normal processing described later, determining the type of big hit or changing the variation pattern in the variation pattern setting processing In addition to that, at the timing when the game ball starts and wins at the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14, before the change display based on the start winning is started, By executing the winning presentation process, it is confirmed in advance which judgment value range the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type falls. By doing so, the variation pattern type is predicted in advance before the variation display of the effect symbol is executed, and, as described later, based on the determination result at the time of winning, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs a big hit or Execute a continuous notice effect to announce that it will be super reach.

  If the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match the normal jackpot determination value (N in step S220), the CPU 56 determines whether or not a probability change flag indicating that the gaming state is a probability change state is set. Confirmation (step S221). If the probability change flag is set, the CPU 56 compares the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S205A and S205B with the jackpot determination value at the time of probability change shown in the right column of FIG. Are matched (step S222). It should be noted that there is a possibility that a plurality of variation displays will be executed after confirming whether or not the state is surely changed in step S221 at the time of the start winning, until the actual display of the variation based on the start winning is actually started. There is. For this reason, the game state has changed (for example, the start of change) from when it is confirmed whether or not it is in the probable variation state at step S221 at the time of starting winning, until when the fluctuation display based on the starting winning is actually started. If there is a probable big hit before, the normal state has changed to the probable state.). For this reason, the gaming state determined in step S221 at the time of starting winning and the gaming state determined at the start of variation (see step S61 described later) do not necessarily match.

  If the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match the jackpot determination value at the time of probability change (N in step S222), the CPU 56 determines the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S205A and S205B and FIG. ) And (C) are compared with the small hit determination values to confirm whether or not they match (step S223). In this case, when there is a start winning at the first start winning opening 13 (when executing the winning effect processing (see step S209A) in the first start opening switch passing process shown in FIG. 46A). Is determined whether or not it matches the small hit determination value set in the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. Further, when there is a start winning at the second start winning opening 14 (when the winning effect processing (see step S209B) is executed in the second start opening switch passing process shown in FIG. 46B)), It is determined whether or not the small hit determination value set in the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG.

  If the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match the small hit determination value (N in Step S223), the CPU 56 performs a process of determining the current gaming state (Step S224). In this embodiment, in step S224, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the gaming state is a certain change state or a short time state (specifically, whether or not a short time flag is set). It should be noted that a plurality of variation displays are executed after confirming whether or not the state of probability variation or time reduction is confirmed in step S224 at the time of starting winning, until the actual displaying of variation based on the starting winning is actually started. There is a possibility. For this reason, the game state has changed from the time when the start winning is confirmed in step S224 to determine whether or not the state is the probability change state or the short time state until the display of the actual variation based on the start winning is actually started (for example, If there is a probable big hit before the start of fluctuation, the normal state changes to the probable state.). Therefore, the gaming state determined in step S224 at the time of starting winning and the gaming state determined at the start of variation (see step S61 described later) do not necessarily match.

  Then, the CPU 56 sets each threshold for detachment according to the determination result of step S224 (step S225). In this embodiment, a threshold determination program for performing threshold determination in advance is incorporated, and by determining whether or not the threshold value is larger than the threshold value, the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type falls within any determination value range. Is determined, and the value of the EXT data set in the winning determination result designation command shown in FIGS. 40 to 43 is determined. When the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match the small hit determination value (that is, when it is out of place), the game state is not specified (the processing of step S224 is not performed), step S255. The threshold value for the normal state may be always set and the determination in step S229 may be performed.

  For example, the CPU 56 sets the threshold value 219 when it is determined that the gaming state is a certain change state or a short time state. In this case, in step S229 described later, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or smaller than the threshold value 219, and if it is equal to or smaller than the threshold value 219 (that is, 1 to 219). Is determined to set “08 (H)” as the EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning if the first winning winning opening 13 is started, and the second starting winning opening 14 is determined to start. For example, it is determined that “28 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the winning determination result specifying command (see FIGS. 40 and 42). If the threshold value is not less than 219 (that is, if it is 220 to 251), “09 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning if it is a start winning prize at the first starting winning opening 13. It is determined to be set, and if it is a start winning at the second start winning opening 14, it is determined that “29 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning (see FIGS. 40 and 42).

  For example, if the CPU 56 determines that the gaming state is the normal state, the CPU 56 sets the threshold values 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 regardless of the total number of pending storages. In this case, in step S229 described later, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold value 79. If the value is equal to or less than the threshold value 79 (that is, 1 to 79). Is determined to set “00 (H)” as the EXT data of the determination result specifying command at the time of winning if the first winning winning opening 13 is started, and the second starting winning opening 14 is determined to start. For example, it is determined that “20 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command (see FIGS. 40 and 42). If the threshold is 89 or less (that is, 80 to 89), “01 (H)” is used as the EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning if the start winning winning opening 13 is won. If it is determined that the second start winning opening 14 is won, it is determined that “21 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning (see FIGS. 40 and 42). If the threshold is 99 or less (that is, 90 to 99), and if the first start winning opening 13 is a start winning prize, then “02 (H)” as the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command. If it is determined that the second start winning opening 14 has been won, it is determined that “22 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning (see FIGS. 40 and 42). If the threshold value is 169 or less (that is, 100 to 169), and if the first winning prize opening 13 is a start winning prize, "03 (H)" as the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command. If it is determined that the second start winning opening 14 has been won, it is determined that “23 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command (see FIGS. 40 and 42). If the threshold is 199 or less (that is, 170 to 199), “04 (H)” is used as the EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning if the start winning winning opening 13 is won. If it is determined that the second start winning opening 14 has been won, it is determined that “24 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning (see FIGS. 40 and 42). If the threshold is 214 or less (that is, if it is 200 to 214), if it is a start winning prize in the first start winning opening 13, it is “05 (H)” as the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command. If it is determined that the second start winning opening 14 has been won, it is determined that “25 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning (see FIGS. 40 and 42). Further, when the threshold value is 229 or less (that is, when it is 215 to 229), “06 (H)” is used as the EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning if the start winning prize is received at the first starting winning opening 13. If it is determined that the second start winning opening 14 is won, it is determined that “26 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning (see FIGS. 40 and 42). If the threshold value is not less than 229 (that is, 230 to 251), “07 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning if the start winning prize is received at the first starting winning opening 13. It is determined to be set, and if it is a start winning prize in the second start winning opening 14, it is determined that “27 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning (see FIGS. 40 and 42).

  In the threshold determination example described above, 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 are determined in order from the smallest threshold value. It will never fall within the range below the previous order threshold. That is, after determining whether or not the threshold value is 79 or less, when determining whether or not the threshold value is 89 or less, it does not fall within the range of 1 to 79 that is equal to or less than the threshold value in the previous order. It is determined whether it is in the range. In this embodiment, the case where the threshold values are determined as 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 in order from the smallest value is shown. 199, 169, 99, 89 and 79 may be determined. The same applies to the determination using other threshold values shown below.

  When the big hit determination random number (random R) matches the small hit determination value (Y in step S223), the CPU 56 sets a threshold for small hit (step S226). In this embodiment, the CPU 56 sets the threshold value 251, and determines that the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is equal to or less than the threshold value 251 (1 to 251) in step S 229 described later. If the first start winning opening 13 is a start winning prize, it is determined that “12 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning, and the second starting winning opening 14 is started. For example, it is determined that “32 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning (see FIGS. 41 and 43). In the case of a small hit, it may be determined that the EXT data “12 (H)” or “32 (H)” is set without performing the threshold determination.

  When the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches the jackpot determination value in step S220 or step S222, the CPU 56 determines the type of jackpot based on the jackpot type determination random number (random 1) extracted in steps S205A and S205B. Is determined (step S227). In this case, when there is a start winning at the first start winning opening 13 (when executing the winning effect processing (see step S209A) in the first start opening switch passing process shown in FIG. 46A). Is determined using the jackpot type determination table (first special symbol) 131a shown in FIG. 33D to determine whether the jackpot type is “normal jackpot”, “probability big hit” or “sudden probability big hit”. To do. Further, when there is a start winning at the second start winning opening 14 (when the winning effect processing (see step S209B) is executed in the second start opening switch passing process shown in FIG. 46B)), The big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) 131b shown in FIG. 33 (E) is used to determine whether the big hit type is “normal big hit”, “probable big hit” or “suddenly probable big hit”.

  And CPU56 sets each threshold value for jackpots according to the jackpot classification determined by step S227 (step S228).

  For example, the CPU 56 sets the threshold values 74 and 149 when it is determined that it is a normal big hit. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or smaller than the threshold 74 in step S229 described later, and if it is equal to or smaller than the threshold 74 (that is, 1 to 74). Is determined to set “0A (H)” as the EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning if the first winning winning opening 13 is won, and the second winning winning opening 14 is determined to start. For example, it is determined that “2A (H)” is set as the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command (see FIGS. 41 and 43). If the threshold value is 149 or less (that is, if it is 75 to 149), if it is a start winning prize in the first start winning opening 13, "0B (H)" as the EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning. If it is determined that the second start winning opening 14 is won, it is determined that “2B (H)” is set as the EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning (see FIGS. 41 and 43). If the threshold is not less than 149 (that is, 150 to 251), “0C (H)” is set as EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning if the first winning winning opening 13 is won. It is determined to be set, and if it is a start winning at the second start winning opening 14, it is determined that “2C (H)” is set as the EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning (see FIGS. 41 and 43).

  Further, for example, when the CPU 56 determines that the probability variation big hit, the thresholds 38 and 79 are set. In this case, in step S229 described later, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold value 38, and if it is equal to or less than the threshold value 38 (that is, 1 to 38). Is determined to set “0D (H)” as the EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning if the first winning prize opening 13 is won, and the second winning prize opening 14 is determined to start. For example, it is determined that “2D (H)” is set as the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command (see FIGS. 41 and 43). If the threshold is 79 or less (that is, 39 to 79), “0E (H)” is used as the EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning in the case of starting winning at the first starting winning opening 13. If it is determined that the second start winning opening 14 is won, it is determined that “2E (H)” is set as the EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning (see FIGS. 41 and 43). If the threshold is not less than 79 (that is, 80 to 251), “0F (H)” is set as EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning if the start winning prize is received at the first starting winning opening 13. It is determined to be set, and if it is determined that a start winning is made in the second start winning opening 14, it is determined that “2F (H)” is set as the EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning (see FIGS. 41 and 43).

  Further, for example, the CPU 56 sets the threshold 100 when it is suddenly determined that the probability variation big hit. In this case, in step S229 described later, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold value 100, and if it is equal to or less than the threshold value 100 (that is, 1 to 100). Is determined to set “10 (H)” as the EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning if the first winning winning opening 13 is started, and the second starting winning opening 14 is determined to start. For example, it is determined that “30 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command (see FIGS. 41 and 43). If the threshold is not less than 100 (that is, 101 to 251), “11 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning if the start winning prize is received at the first starting winning opening 13. It is determined to be set, and if it is a start winning prize in the second start winning opening 14, it is determined that “31 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning (see FIGS. 41 and 43).

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the threshold value set in steps S225, S226, and S228 and the random number for variation pattern type determination (random 2) extracted in steps S205A and S205B. It is determined whether it falls within the determination value range (step S229).

  In steps S225, S226, and S228, instead of setting a predetermined threshold value, a variation pattern type determination table (see FIGS. 34 and 35) is set. In step S229, the set variation pattern type is set. A determination table may be used to determine the range of the variation pattern type determination random number and which variation pattern type.

  Then, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting the EXT data corresponding to the determination result to the winning determination result designation command (step S230). Specifically, the CPU 56 determines whether the winning determination is made when the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 is won, and which variation pattern type is determined in step S229. Depending on the value, any one of “00 (H)” to “12 (H)”, “20 (H)” to “32 (H)” as shown in FIGS. Processing to set the EXT data of the specified command is performed.

  In this embodiment, although the case where it is determined that the big win or the small win is determined in the determination at the time of winning, the range in which the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is uniformly determined is shown. When it is determined that the game is a big hit or a small hit, the range of the random number for determining the variation pattern type may not be determined. Then, a winning determination result designation command indicating that a winning determination has been made may be transmitted when a big win or a small win is reached. Then, for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 may execute a continuous notice effect, which will be described later, based on the reception of a winning determination result designation command indicating that a winning determination is made when a big win is reached.

  49 and 50 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S300) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the total number of reserved storage (step S51). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is confirmed. If the total pending storage number is 0, if the customer waiting demonstration designation command has not yet been transmitted, control is performed to send the customer waiting demonstration designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S51A), and the processing is performed. finish. For example, when the CPU 56 transmits a customer waiting demonstration designation command in step S51A, the CPU 56 sets a customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted flag indicating that the customer waiting demonstration designation command has been transmitted. When the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interruption is executed after sending the customer waiting demo designation command, the customer waiting demonstration request command is repeatedly set based on the fact that the customer waiting demo designation command transmission completed flag is set. Control should be performed so that the demo designation command is not transmitted. The customer waiting demo designation command transmitted flag is set when the customer waiting demonstration designation command is transmitted, and then, for example, when the total pending storage number is not 0 and the variable symbol display is started (for example, It may be reset when it is determined as N in step S51, or may be reset when the special symbol variation display is stopped (for example, when a special symbol stop process described later is executed).

  If the total pending storage number is not 0, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the second pending storage number is 0 (step S52). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the second reserved memory number counter is zero. If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 56 has a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process is being performed for the first special symbol or the special symbol process is being performed for the second special symbol). Is set to data indicating “second” (step S53). If the second reserved memory number is 0 (that is, only the first reserved memory number is accumulated), the CPU 66 sets data indicating “first” in the special symbol pointer (step S54).

  In this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S52 to S54, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variation display of the first special symbol. In other words, control is performed so that the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is established in preference to the first start condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 55 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (step S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 determines each disturbance stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = 1 in the first reserved memory number buffer. The numerical value is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = 1 in the second reserved memory number buffer. And stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 and saves each storage area in the first reserved memory number buffer. Shift the contents of. When the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved memory number buffer are shifted.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 saves the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 55. Are stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n−1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 55. Each random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n−1.

  Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or (Second reserved storage number) = 1, 2, 3, 4 in order.

  Then, the CPU 56 decreases the value of the total pending storage number by one. That is, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the total pending storage number counter (step S58). The CPU 56 stores the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 55.

  Moreover, CPU56 performs control which transmits a background designation | designated command to the microcomputer 100 for effect control according to the present game state (step S60). In this case, when the probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a probability variation state background designation command. Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a time reduction state background designation command when the time variation flag indicating that the time reduction state is not set and the time reduction state is set. If neither the probability change flag nor the time reduction flag is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a normal state background designation command.

  Further, the CPU 56 controls the presentation control microcomputer 100 with the reserved memory number subtraction designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer (step S60A). In this case, when the value indicated by the special symbol pointer is “first”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first reserved memory number subtraction designation command. When the value indicated by the special symbol pointer is “second”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second reserved memory number subtraction designation command.

  Specifically, when the CPU 56 transmits the effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the address of the command transmission table (preliminarily set for each command in the ROM) corresponding to the effect control command is given. Set to pointer. And the address of the command transmission table according to an effect control command is set to a pointer, and an effect control command is transmitted in an effect control command control process (step S28). In this embodiment, when the change of the special symbol is started, the effect control microcomputer in the order of the background designation command, the reserved memory number subtraction designation command, the fluctuation pattern command, and the display result designation command for each timer interrupt. 100 will be transmitted. Specifically, when the change of the special symbol is started, first, the background designation command is transmitted, the reserved memory number subtraction designation command is transmitted, the variation pattern command is transmitted after 4 ms, and further displayed after 4 ms. A result specification command is sent. Note that, for example, a background designation command, a reserved memory count subtraction designation command, and a variation pattern command may be transmitted in processing within the same timer interrupt.

  In the special symbol normal process, first, data indicating “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first start winning opening 13, that is, “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first special symbol. ”Or“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second special symbol, that is,“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second start winning opening 14. Data is set in the special symbol pointer. In the subsequent processing in the special symbol process, processing corresponding to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the process of steps S300 to S310 can be made common between the case of targeting the first special symbol and the case of targeting the second special symbol.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads a random R (a jackpot determination random number) from the random number buffer area and executes a jackpot determination module. In this case, the CPU 56 extracts in steps S205A and S206A of the first start port switch passing process and steps S205B and S206B of the second start port switch passing process and stores them in the first hold memory buffer and the second hold memory buffer in advance. The jackpot determination random number is read and the jackpot determination is performed. The big hit determination module compares the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (see FIG. 33) determined in advance with the big hit determination random number, and executes a process of determining to be a big hit or a small hit if they match. It is a program to do. That is, it is a program that executes a big hit determination or a small hit determination process.

  The jackpot determination process is configured such that when the gaming state is a probable change state (high probability state), the probability of a big hit is higher than when the gaming state is a non-probability change state (normal game state and short-time state). ing. Specifically, a jackpot determination table (a table in which the numerical value on the right side of FIG. 33A in the ROM 54 is set) in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance and the number of jackpot determination values are definitely changed. There is provided a normal big hit determination table (a table in which the numerical value on the left side of FIG. 33A in the ROM 54 is set) set to be smaller than the big hit determination table. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state. If the gaming state is a probability variation state, the jackpot determination process is performed using the probability variation jackpot determination table, and the gaming state is normal. When in the gaming state or the short-time state, the big hit determination process is performed using the normal big hit determination table. That is, when the value of the random number for determining the big hit (random R) matches any of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 33A, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is a big hit. When it is determined to be a big hit (step S61), the process proceeds to step S71. Note that deciding whether to win or not is to decide whether or not to shift to the big hit gaming state, but to decide whether or not to stop the special symbol display as a big hit symbol. But there is.

  Note that whether or not the current gaming state is the probability variation state is determined by whether or not the probability variation flag is set. The probability variation flag is set when the gaming state is shifted to the probability variation state, and is reset when the probability variation state is terminated. Specifically, it is determined to be a probable big hit or suddenly probable big hit, and is set in the process of ending the big hit game. Reset at timing.

  If the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in step S61), the CPU 56 uses the small hit determination table (see FIGS. 33B and 33C). Then, the small hit determination process is performed. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches one of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 33B and 33C, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is to be a small hit. In this case, the CPU 56 confirms the data indicated by the special symbol pointer, and when the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is “first”, the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. ) To determine whether or not to make a small hit. If the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is “second”, it is determined whether or not to make a small hit using the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. . If it is determined to be a small hit (step S62), the CPU 56 sets a small hit flag indicating a small hit (step S63), and proceeds to step S75.

  If the random R value does not match either the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (N in step S62), that is, if it is out of place, the process proceeds to step S75 as it is.

  In step S71, the CPU 56 sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit. Then, the jackpot type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer is selected as a table used to determine the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types (step S72). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 selects the jackpot type determination table 131a for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 33 (D). Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 selects the big special type determination table 131b for the second special symbol shown in FIG.

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the selected jackpot type determination table to select a type (“normal jackpot”, “probability change”) corresponding to the value of the random number for random determination (random 1) stored in the random number buffer area. "Big hit" or "Suddenly probable big hit") is determined as the type of big hit (step S73). In this case, the CPU 56 extracts in steps S205A and S206A of the first start port switch passing process and steps S205B and S206B of the second start port switch passing process and stores them in the first hold memory buffer and the second hold memory buffer in advance. The jackpot type determination random number is read and the jackpot type is determined. Also, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 33D and 33E, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is compared with the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Therefore, the rate at which suddenly probable big hits are selected is high.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 55 (step S74). For example, when the big hit type is “normal big hit”, “01” is set as data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is “probable big hit”, “02” is set as the data indicating the big hit type, When the big hit type is “suddenly probable big hit”, “03” is set as data indicating the big hit type.

  Next, the CPU 56 determines a special symbol stop symbol (step S75). Specifically, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, “−” which is a loss symbol is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When the big hit flag is set, one of “1”, “3”, and “7”, which is a big hit symbol, is determined as a special symbol stop symbol according to the determination result of the big hit type. That is, when the big hit type is determined to be “suddenly promising big hit”, “1” is decided as a special symbol stop symbol, and when “normal big hit” is decided, “3” is decided as a special symbol stop symbol. If “probable big hit” is determined, “7” is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When the small hit flag is set, “5” as the small hit symbol is determined as the special symbol stop symbol.

  In this embodiment, the case where the jackpot type is first determined and the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the determined jackpot type is shown, but the method for determining the jackpot type and the stop symbol of the special symbol is as follows. It is not limited to what is shown in the embodiment. For example, a table in which a special symbol stop symbol and a jackpot type are associated in advance is prepared, and a special symbol stop symbol is first determined based on a random number for determining the big hit type. You may comprise so that a classification may also be determined.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S76).

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S301) in the special symbol process. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S91). When the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56 uses the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C (FIG. 34 (A) as tables used for determining the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. ) To (C)) is selected (step S92). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  When the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S93). When the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 uses the small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D (FIG. 34D as a table used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. )) Is selected (step S94). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  When the small hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the time reduction flag indicating that the time reduction state is set (step S95). The time reduction flag is set when the gaming state is shifted to the time reduction state (including the time of shifting to the probability change state), and is reset when the time reduction state is ended. Specifically, it is usually decided to be a big hit, a probable big hit or a sudden probable big hit, and is set in the process of ending the big hit game. It is reset when the display is terminated and the stop symbol is stopped and displayed. If the time reduction flag is set (Y in step S95), the CPU 56 proceeds to step S99.

  If the time flag is not set (N in Step S95), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (Step S96). If the total pending storage number is less than 3 (N in step S96), the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern type determination table 135A for detachment as a table used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. (See FIG. 35A)) (step S97). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  When the total pending storage number is 3 or more (Y in step S96), the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern type determination table for deviation as a table used to determine one of the plurality of variation pattern types. 135B (see FIG. 35B) is selected (step S98). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  When the time reduction flag is set (Y in step S95), the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern type determination table 135C for deviation as a table used to determine one of a plurality of variation pattern types. (See FIG. 35C) (step S99). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  In this embodiment, when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more by executing the processes of steps S95 to S99, the variation pattern type determination table 135B for loss shown in FIG. 35B is selected. The Further, when the gaming state is the short-time state (including the case of the probability variation state), the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135C shown in FIG. 35C is selected. In this case, non-reach CA2-3 may be determined as the variation pattern type in the process of step S102, which will be described later. If the variation pattern type of non-reach CA2-3 is determined, the process changes in step S105. Short reach variation non-reach PA1-2 is determined as a pattern (see FIG. 37). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is the short-time state (including the case where the probability variation state is included) or when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the variation display of the shortening variation may be performed. . In this embodiment, a variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation used in the short time state (see FIG. 35C) and a variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation based on the number of reserved storages (FIG. 35B). ))) Is a different table, but a common table may be used as a variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation.

  In this embodiment, even if the gaming state is a short-time state, if the total number of pending storage is almost 0 (for example, 0, 0, or 1), the shortened The fluctuation display of fluctuation may not be performed. In this case, for example, when the CPU 56 determines Y in step S95, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the total pending storage number is almost zero. The determination table 135A (see FIG. 35A) may be selected.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads random 2 (random number for variation pattern type determination) from the random number buffer area (the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer), and selects it in the process of step S92, S94, S97, S98 or S99. By referring to the table, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S102).

  Next, the CPU 56 determines hit variation pattern determination tables 137A and 137B (see FIG. 36) as tables used to determine one of a plurality of variation patterns based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S102. ), One of the deviation variation pattern determination table 138A (see FIG. 37) is selected (step S103). Further, the random pattern 3 (random number for variation pattern determination) is read from the random number buffer area (first reserved storage buffer or second reserved storage buffer), and the variation pattern is determined by referring to the variation pattern determination table selected in step S103. Is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S105). When the random number 3 (variation pattern determination random number) is not extracted at the start winning timing, the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern determination random number counter for generating the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). It is also possible to extract the value directly from and to determine the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S107). Further, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern in the variation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (step S108). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result designation command transmission process (step S302) (step S109).

  In the case where it is determined to be out of place, instead of suddenly determining the variation pattern type, first, it may be determined whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a random number for reach determination. Then, based on the determination result as to whether or not to reach, the processing of steps S95 to S99 and S102 may be executed to determine the variation pattern type. In this case, the variation pattern type determination table for non-reach (including the variation pattern types of non-reach CA2-1 to non-reach CA2-3 shown in FIG. 35) and the variation pattern type determination table for reach (FIG. 35). Normal CA2-4 to normal CA2-6, including a variation pattern type of super CA2-7) are prepared, and one of the variation pattern type determination tables is selected based on the reach determination result. The variation pattern type may be determined.

  In addition, when determining whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a reach determination random number, depending on the total reserved memory number (which may be the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number), Reach determination tables having different selection ratios may be selected, and it may be determined whether or not to reach so that the reach probability decreases as the number of reserved memories increases. In this case, for example, whether the CPU 56 matches the determination value assigned to the common range of the reach determination table in determining whether “super-reach out” or “non-reach out” occurs in the winning effect processing. By determining whether or not, it may be determined in advance whether or not to reach. In addition, considering that the execution ratio of the notice effect is reduced, as shown in this embodiment, the “super-reach out” is performed depending on the variation pattern type without performing the lottery process using the random number for reach determination. It is preferable that a continuous notice effect is performed by determining whether or not “non-reach” will occur.

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the display result designation command transmission process (step S302). In the display result designation command transmission process, the CPU 56 transmits one of the presentation control commands (display result 1 designation to display result 5 designation) (see FIG. 38) in accordance with the determined big hit type, small hit, and loss. Control. Specifically, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S110). If not set, the process proceeds to step S116. When the big hit flag is set, when the big hit type is a probable big hit, control is performed to transmit a display result 3 designation command (steps S111 and S112). Specifically, whether or not it is a probable big hit can be determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal process is “02”. Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 4 designation command when the big hit type is suddenly probable big hit (steps S113 and S114). Whether or not it is a sudden probability variation big hit can be specifically determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal process is “03”. Then, when neither the probability variation big hit nor the sudden probability variation big hit is obtained (that is, when it is a normal big hit), the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 2 designation command (step S115).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag is not set (N in step S110), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S116). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 5 designation command (step S117). When the small hit flag is not set (N in Step S116), that is, when it is out of place, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 1 designation command (Step S118).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol changing process (step S303) (step S119).

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (step S303) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol changing process, the CPU 56 first subtracts 1 from the variable time timer (step S125). When the variable time timer times out (step S126), the CPU 56 transmits a symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100. Is performed (step S127). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (step S304) (step S128). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (step S304) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S133). If the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56 resets the probability change flag indicating the probability change state and the time reduction flag indicating the time reduction state if set (step S134). Control to send a big hit start designation command to the microcomputer 100 is performed (step S135). Specifically, when the type of jackpot is normally jackpot, a jackpot start 1 designation command is transmitted. If the jackpot type is a probabilistic jackpot, a jackpot start 2 designation command is transmitted. When the big hit type is sudden probability change big hit, a small hit / sudden probability change big hit start designation command is transmitted. Whether the big hit type is the normal big hit, the probability variation big hit or the sudden probability variation big hit is determined based on the data indicating the big hit type stored in the RAM 55 (data stored in the big hit type buffer). .

  In addition, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (a time for which the effect display device 9 notifies that the jackpot has occurred, for example) is set in the jackpot display time timer (step S137). In addition, the number of times of opening (for example, 15 times in the case of a normal big hit or a probable big hit, 2 times in the case of a sudden probable big hit) is set in the big prize opening number counter (step S138). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening pre-processing (step S305) (step S139).

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not set in step S133, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state is set (step S140). If the probability variation flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the time reduction flag indicating that the time reduction state is set (step S141). When the time reduction flag is set (that is, when the time change state is not controlled and only the time reduction state is controlled), the value of the time reduction counter indicating the number of times that the special symbol can be changed in the time reduction state is- 1 (step S142). When the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction becomes 0 (step S144), the CPU 56 resets the time reduction flag (step S145).

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S147). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 transmits a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S148). In addition, a value corresponding to the small hit display time (for example, the time when the effect display device 9 notifies that the small hit has occurred) is set in the small hit display time timer (step S149). Further, the number of times of opening (for example, 2 times) is set in the special winning opening opening number counter (step S150). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit start pre-processing (step S308) (step S151).

  If the small hit flag is not set (N in step S147), the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S152).

  FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the big hit end process (step S307) in the special symbol process. In the jackpot end process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step S160). If the jackpot end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S164. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the jackpot flag is reset (step S161), and control for transmitting a jackpot end designation command is performed (step S162). Here, a big hit end 1 designation command is transmitted when it is a normal big hit, a big hit end 2 designation command is sent when it is a probable big hit, and a small hit / abrupt is sudden when it is a sudden probable big hit. Send a probable jackpot end designation command. Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is being performed in the image display device 9 (the big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (step S163), and the processing is ended.

  In step S164, 1 is subtracted from the value of the jackpot end display timer. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S165). If not, the process ends.

  If the big hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step S165), the CPU 56 checks whether the big hit type is a probability change big hit or a sudden probability change big hit (step S166). Note that whether or not the probability change big hit or sudden probability change big hit is, specifically, whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is “02” to “03”. This can be determined by checking. If neither the probability change big hit nor the sudden probability change big hit is present (that is, if it is a normal big hit), the CPU 56 sets the time reduction flag and shifts the gaming state to the time reduction state (step S167). Further, the CPU 56 sets a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) in a time reduction number counter for counting the number of time reductions (step S168). Then, control goes to a step S173.

  If the probability change big hit or the sudden probability change big hit, the CPU 56 sets the probability change flag and shifts the gaming state to the probability change state (step S170). Further, the CPU 56 sets a time reduction flag (step S171). Then, control goes to a step S173.

  In this embodiment, the time reduction flag set in steps S167 and S171 is also used to determine whether or not to increase the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 or increase the number of times of opening. In this case, specifically, in the normal symbol process (see step S27), the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the time reduction flag is set when the normal symbol variation display result is a win. If so, control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 15 by extending the opening time or increasing the number of times of opening. The time reduction flag set in steps S167 and S171 is used to determine whether or not to shorten the special symbol variation time. In this embodiment, the time reduction flag is also used when determining whether or not the gaming state is a probability change state or a time reduction state in the first start port switch passing process shown in FIG. 46 (see step S207A). ).

  In this embodiment, the case where the time-short flag is set and the state is shifted to the time-short state even when the sudden probability change big hit is shown is shown. Thus, it is possible not to shift to the time-saving state. If comprised in that way, it can be made hard to distinguish whether it is sudden probability change big hit or small hit, and the interest with respect to a game can be improved.

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S173).

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol display control process (step S32) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. In the special symbol display control process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (step S3201). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (that is, if the special symbol variation processing is being executed), the CPU 56 sets the special symbol display control data for special symbol variation display for setting the special symbol display control data. Processing for setting or updating the output buffer is performed (step S3202). In this case, the CPU 56 sets or updates special symbol display control data for performing variable display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the value of the special symbol display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by 1 every time 0.2 seconds elapse. After that, display control processing (see step S22) is executed, and a drive signal is output to the special symbol displays 8a and 8b in accordance with the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The special symbol display on the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b is executed.

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is not 3, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (step S3203). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (that is, when the special symbol stop processing is entered), the CPU 56 stops the special symbol stop symbol set in the special symbol normal processing. Processing for setting the display control data in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data is performed (step S3204). In this case, the CPU 56 sets special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. After that, display control processing (see step S22) is executed, and a drive signal is output to the special symbol displays 8a and 8b in accordance with the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The special symbol stop symbols are stopped and displayed on the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b. In addition, since the setting data is not changed after the process of step S3204 is executed and the special symbol display control data for the stop symbol display is set, the latest special symbol display control data is displayed in the display control process of step S22. Based on this, the latest stop symbol is stopped and displayed until the next variable display is started. If the value of the special symbol process flag is 2 or 3 in step S3201 (that is, if either the display result designation command transmission process or the special symbol variation process), the special symbol variation display is performed. The special symbol display control data may be updated. In this case, the display result designation command transmission process also varies in order to prevent a deviation between the variation time recognized on the game control microcomputer 560 side and the variation time recognized on the effect control microcomputer 100 side. What is necessary is just to comprise so that 1 may subtract a time timer.

  In this embodiment, the special symbol display control data is set in the output buffer according to the value of the special symbol process flag. However, in the special symbol process, the start flag is set at the start of the variation of the special symbol. In addition, an end flag may be set at the end of the variation of the special symbol. In the special symbol display control process (step S32), the CPU 56 starts updating the value of the special symbol display control data based on the start flag being set, and based on the end flag being set. Thus, special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol may be set. Even in this case, the CPU 56 specifies, for example, whether to execute the variation display of the first special symbol or the variation display of the second special symbol based on the value of the special symbol pointer, and the special symbol of the identified one is executed. The special symbol display control data corresponding to the variable display may be set or output.

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) as effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80. The effect control CPU 101 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 4 ms) is performed (step S701). . Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring a timer interrupt flag (step S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (step S703) and executes the following effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs effect control process processing (step S705). In the effect control process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the effect display device 9 is executed.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 performs the fourth symbol process (step S706). In the 4th symbol process, the process corresponding to the current control state (4th symbol process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and the 4th symbol display areas 9c and 9d of the effect display device 9 are selected. The display control of the 4th symbol is executed.

  Next, a random number update process for updating a count value of a counter for generating a random number such as a jackpot symbol determining random number is executed (step S707). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S702.

  FIG. 58 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing an effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31. In this example, a command reception buffer of a ring buffer type capable of storing six 2-byte configuration effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is configured by a 12-byte area of reception command buffers 1 to 12. A command reception number counter indicating in which area the received command is stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. The ring buffer format is not necessarily required.

  The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIGS. 38 and 39) the effect control command stored in the buffer area is. Note that the interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal is executed in preference to the timer interrupt process executed every 4 ms.

  59 to 63 are flowcharts showing specific examples of command analysis processing (step S704). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 101 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612). When read, the value of the read pointer is incremented by +2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read at a time.

  If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step S614), the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is 0 (step S614A). If the value of the effect control process flag is 0, the process proceeds to step S615 as it is. If the value of the effect control process flag is not 0 (that is, if the transition is made to a process other than the variation pattern command reception waiting process during the effect control process described later), the effect control CPU 101 performs the effect control. The value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S801) (step S614B). In this embodiment, in the effect control process described later, the change time specified by the received change pattern command is measured, and the effect display device 9 displays the effect symbol change display. In this case, if the fluctuation time is mistakenly recognized, there will be a situation in which the fluctuation display of the effect symbol is continuously executed even though the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command has ended. There is a fear. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the next variation pattern command is received when the processing is shifted to a process other than the variation pattern command reception waiting process (for example, the process of effect design variation), the variation pattern is compulsorily changed. By controlling to shift to the command reception waiting process, it is possible to prevent as much as possible the situation where the effect using the effect display device 9 becomes unnatural. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the state where the effect is shifted so that the change display of the effect symbol is continuously executed even if the change display of the special symbol has already been finished does not occur. be able to. This also applies to other processes for forcibly shifting the process in the command analysis process (see steps S621A, S621B, S623A, S623B, S663B, and S663C). In addition, when controlling to forcibly shift the process in this way, control is performed so that the stop symbol of the effect symbol that has already been determined is stopped and displayed at the timing of the process transition. However, in the case of steps S621A, S621B, S623A, S623B (when a big hit start designation command is received during processing other than the big hit display processing), it is a time to shift to the big hit gaming state, and therefore the stop symbol of the effect symbol Without stopping the display, it is possible to proceed directly to the big hit display process and immediately start the fanfare effect.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

  If the received effect control command is a display result designation command (step S617), the effect control CPU 101 sets a display result designation command reception flag (step S618A). Further, the effect control CPU 101 stores the received display result designation command (display result 1 designation command to display result 5 designation command) in a display result designation command storage area formed in the RAM (step S618B).

  If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (step S619), the effect control CPU 101 sets a confirmed command reception flag (step S620).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot start 1 designation command or a jackpot start 2 designation command (step S621), the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is 4 (step S621A). ). If the value of the effect control process flag is 4, the process proceeds to step S622 as it is. If the value of the effect control process flag is not 4 (that is, if the transition is made to a process other than the jackpot display process during the effect control process described later), the effect control CPU 101 sets the effect control process flag. The value is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) (step S621B). In other words, in this embodiment, when a jackpot start designation command is received when the process is shifted to a process other than the jackpot display process (for example, a process of changing the design symbol), the process forcibly shifts to the jackpot display process. By controlling in this way, the situation where the effect using the effect display device 9 becomes unnatural is prevented as much as possible. Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot start 1 designation command reception flag or a jackpot start 2 designation command reception flag (step S622).

  If the received effect control command is a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command (step S623), the effect control CPU 101 checks whether the value of the effect control process flag is 4 (step S623A). If the value of the effect control process flag is 4, the process proceeds to step S624 as it is. If the value of the effect control process flag is not 4 (that is, if the transition is made to a process other than the jackpot display process during the effect control process described later), the effect control CPU 101 sets the effect control process flag. The value is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) (step S623B). In other words, in this embodiment, when a jackpot start designation command is received when the process is shifted to a process other than the jackpot display process (for example, a process of changing the design symbol), the process forcibly shifts to the jackpot display process. By controlling in this way, the situation where the effect using the effect display device 9 becomes unnatural is prevented as much as possible. Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets a small hit / suddenly probable big hit start designation command reception flag (step S624).

  If the received effect control command is a power-on specification command (initialization specification command) (step S631), the effect control CPU 101 displays an initial screen on the effect display device 9 indicating that the initialization process has been executed. Control is performed (step S632). The initial screen includes an initial display of predetermined production symbols.

  If the received effect control command is a power failure recovery designation command (step S633), a predetermined power failure recovery screen (screen for displaying information notifying the player that the gaming state is continuing) is displayed. Display control is performed (step S634), and a power failure recovery flag is set (step S635).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot end 1 designation command (step S641), the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot end 1 designation command reception flag (step S642). If the received effect control command is a jackpot end 2 designation command (step S643), the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot end 2 designation command reception flag (step S644). If the received effect control command is a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit end designation command (step S645), the effect control CPU 101 sets a small hit / sudden probability change big hit end designation command reception flag (step S646).

  If the received effect control command is the first reserved memory number addition designation command (step S651), the effect control CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number storage area ( Step S652). Further, the production control CPU 101 updates the display of the first reserved memory number in the first reserved memory display unit 18c in accordance with the updated first reserved memory number (step S653).

  If the received effect control command is the second reserved memory number addition designation command (step S654), the effect control CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the second reserved memory number stored in the second reserved memory number storage area ( Step S655). Further, the production control CPU 101 updates the display of the second reserved memory number in the second reserved memory display unit 18d in accordance with the updated second reserved memory number (step S656).

  If the received effect control command is the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command (step S657), the effect control CPU 101 receives the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command based on the reception of the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command. It is specified that the variable display is to be performed, and 1 is subtracted from the value of the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number storage area (step S658). Further, the production control CPU 101 updates the display of the first reserved memory number in the first reserved memory display unit 18c in accordance with the updated first reserved memory number (step S659). Then, the production control CPU 101 sets a first reserved memory number subtraction designation command reception flag indicating that the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command has been received (step S659A).

  If the received effect control command is the second reserved memory number subtraction designation command (step S660), the effect control CPU 101 uses the second special symbol based on the fact that the second reserved memory number subtraction designation command has been received. It is specified that the variable display is performed, and 1 is subtracted from the value of the second reserved memory number stored in the second reserved memory number storage area (step S661). Further, the production control CPU 101 updates the display of the second reserved memory number on the second reserved memory display unit 18d according to the updated second reserved memory number (step S662). Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets a second reserved memory number subtraction designation command reception flag indicating that the second reserved memory number subtraction designation command has been received (step S662A).

  If the received effect control command is a customer waiting demonstration designation command (step S663), the effect control CPU 101 sets a customer waiting demonstration designation command reception flag (step S663A). Further, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is 0 (step S663B). If the value of the effect control process flag is 0, the process proceeds to step S664 as it is. If the value of the effect control process flag is not 0 (that is, if the transition is made to a process other than the variation pattern command reception waiting process during the effect control process described later), the effect control CPU 101 performs the effect control. The value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S663C). In other words, in this embodiment, when a customer waiting demo designation command is received when the process is transitioned to a process other than the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (for example, a production symbol changing process), the fluctuation pattern is compulsorily changed. By controlling to shift to the command reception waiting process, it is possible to prevent as much as possible the situation where the effect using the effect display device 9 becomes unnatural. When the customer waiting demonstration designation command is received, the presentation does not change greatly based on the received command (for example, the variable display is not started or switched to the jackpot presentation). . Therefore, when a customer waiting demonstration designation command is received, the process may be forcibly shifted so as not to end the presentation (specifically, steps S663A and S663C may not be performed). .

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to display a predetermined customer waiting demonstration screen on the effect display device 9 (step S664). In addition, the customer waiting demonstration screen is not displayed immediately based on the reception of the customer waiting demonstration designation command, but after the customer waiting demonstration designation command is received, the customer waits for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). The display of the waiting demonstration screen may be started. Further, the production control CPU 101 clears the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number storage area and the second reserved memory number stored in the second reserved memory number storage area (step S665). That is, when the customer waiting demonstration designation command is received and the customer waiting demonstration screen is displayed, both the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are 0, and the variable display is not executed. Reset the number of pending storage to be stored. Even if the processing of step S665 is executed and the production control microcomputer 100 is in a state in which the addition or subtraction omission of the reserved memory number occurs and the erroneous reserved memory number is recognized, the reserved memory is stored. Can be reset to return to the normal state.

  If the received effect control command is a normal state background designation command (step S666), the effect control CPU 101 uses the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 as a background screen corresponding to the normal state (for example, a blue display color). Background screen) (step S667). Further, if set, the effect control CPU 101 resets a probability change state flag indicating that the game state is a probability change state and a time reduction state flag indicating that the game state is a time reduction state (step S668).

  If the received effect control command is a time reduction state background designation command (step S669), the effect control CPU 101 displays the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 as a background screen corresponding to the time reduction state (for example, a green display). Color background screen) (step S670). Further, the effect control CPU 101 sets the time reduction state flag (step S671) and clears the time reduction number counter for counting the number of fluctuations after the shift to the time reduction state (step S672).

  If the received effect control command is a probability change state background designation command (step S673), the effect control CPU 101 displays a background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 as a background screen (for example, a red display). Color background screen) (step S674). Further, the effect control CPU 101 sets a probability variation state flag (step S675).

  Next, if the received effect control command is any prize determination result designation command (step S676), the effect control CPU 101 determines the prize determination result according to the received prize determination result designation command. The result is stored in the result storage buffer (step S677). Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets a winning determination result designation command reception flag indicating that the winning determination result designation command has been received (step S678).

  FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of an area for storing a winning determination result (winning determination result storage buffer). As shown in FIG. 64, in this embodiment, the first winning determination result storage buffer for storing the winning determination result at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 are stored. A second winning determination result storage buffer for storing a winning determination result at the time of starting winning is prepared. As shown in FIG. 64, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first winning determination result storage buffer. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the second reserved storage number is secured in the second winning determination result storage buffer. In this embodiment, the EXT data of the received winning determination result designation command is stored in the first winning determination result storage buffer and the second winning determination result storage buffer. The first winning determination result storage buffer and the second winning determination result storage buffer are formed in a RAM included in the effect control microcomputer 100.

  If the received effect control command is another command, effect control CPU 101 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step S679). Then, control goes to a step S611.

  FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (step S705) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first executes a continuous notice effect determination process (step S800A).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs any one of steps S800 to S806 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed. In the effect control process, the display state of the effect display device 9 is controlled and variable display of the effect symbol is realized. However, control related to variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the first special symbol is also the second. Control related to the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the special symbol is also executed in one effect control process. It should be noted that the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol and the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variation of the second special symbol may be executed by separate effect control process processing. Good. Further, in this case, it may be determined which special symbol variation display is being executed depending on which representation control process processing is performing the variation display of the representation symbol.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the change pattern command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol change start process (step S801).

  Production symbol variation start processing (step S801): Control is performed so that the variation of the production symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802).

  Production symbol variation processing (step S802): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern and monitors the end of the variation time. When the variation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803).

  Effect symbol variation stop processing (step S803): Control is performed to stop the variation of the effect symbol and derive and display the display result (stop symbol). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  Big hit display process (step S804): When the big hit is made, after the end of the variation time, the effect display device 9 is controlled to display a screen for notifying the occurrence of the big hit. In the case of a small hit, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the effect display device 9 of the occurrence of the small hit after the end of the variation time. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit game processing (step S805).

  Big hit game processing (step S805): Control during big hit game is performed. For example, when a special winning opening opening designation command or a special winning opening open designation command is received, display control of the number of rounds in the effect display device 9 is performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end effect process (step S806).

  Big hit end effect processing (step S806): In the effect display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  66 and 67 are flowcharts showing the continuous notice effect determination process (step S800A). In the continuous notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not the winning determination result designation command reception flag is set (step S6000). If it is not set, the process is terminated as it is. If set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the winning determination result designation command (step S6001), and executes a process for determining the continuous notice effect after step S6002. Therefore, in this embodiment, at the timing when a new start win occurs and the determination result designation command at the time of winning is received, based on the fact that the winning determination result designation command reception flag is set at step S6000, continuous notice is given. The production is decided.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether any continuous notice execution flag indicating that the continuous notice effect is already being executed is set (step S6002). The continuous advance notice execution flag is set in step S6019 described later. If any of the continuous notice execution flags is set, the process proceeds to step S6021. That is, when the continuous notice effect is already being executed, control is performed so that the determination process of the continuous notice effect is not repeated.

  If no continuous notice execution flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 extracts all winning determination results stored in the winning determination result storage buffer (step S6003). In this case, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the probability variation state flag or the time reduction state flag is set. Then, if neither the probability variation state flag nor the short time state flag is set (that is, the normal state (low base state)), the effect control CPU 101 stores the winning prize stored in the first winning judgment result storage buffer. Extract all time determination results. Further, the effect control CPU 101 stores the second winning determination result storage buffer if the probability variation state flag or the short time state flag is set (that is, if the probability variation state or the short time state (high base state)). Extract all winning determination results. In this embodiment, all the winning display results stored in the winning determination result storage buffer are extracted in step S6003, and the variable display until the changing display that is the determination target is started in step S6004 described later. For all of the above, it is possible to execute a continuous notice effect on the condition that it is “non-reach”. In other words, such a configuration prevents a situation in which the continuity of the continuous notice effect is impaired due to the reach effect interrupting in the middle of the continuous notice effect, as will be described later. In addition, even if it is a case where reach is included in each variation display until the variation display to be determined in step S6004 is started, the continuous notice effect may be executed. In this case, in step S6003, it is not necessary to extract all the winning determination results stored in the winning determination result storage buffer, and only the latest winning determination result may be extracted.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 determines whether or not the latest winning determination result among the extracted winning determination results is a determination result indicating “non-reach out”, “super reach out” or “super reach big hit”. Confirmation is made (step S6004). In this case, when neither the probability variation state flag nor the short-time state flag is set and the normal state is set, the effect control CPU 101 receives the winning time extracted from only the first winning time determination result storage buffer in step S6003. It is confirmed whether or not the latest winning determination result among the determination results is a determination result indicating “non-reach out”, “super reach out” or “super reach big hit”. Further, the effect control CPU 101 sets the winning determination result extracted only from the second winning determination result storage buffer in step S6003 when the probability changing state flag or the time reduction state flag is set and the probability changing state or the time reduction state is set. It is checked whether or not the latest winning determination result is a determination result indicating “non-reach out”, “super reach out” or “super reach big hit”.

  The effect control CPU 101 determines that the latest winning determination result is a determination result indicating “not reachable”, “not reached superreach”, or “super reach big hit” (Y in step S6004). ), The process proceeds to step S6005. In other words, in this embodiment, when the processes of steps S6003 and S6004 are executed, there is a change display indicating “non-reach out”, “super reach out” or “super reach big hit”. In subsequent processing, it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect, and the continuous notice effect may be executed over a plurality of variable displays. If there is a determination result for the big hit, not limited to “super reach big hit”, the process may proceed to step S6005 to determine the continuous notice effect. In addition, when there are a plurality of undecided winning determination results among the extracted winning determination results, not only the latest winning determination result, all of them are determined, and even one of them is “not reachable”, “ In the case where there is a fluctuating display such as “Super reach out” or “Super reach big hit”, it may be determined whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect in the processing after Step S6005. In addition, for example, even if it is suddenly probable big hit, it may be determined to be Y in step S6004 and the continuous notice effect may be executed, and Y is also judged in step S6004 if it is not only big hit but also small hit. Thus, a continuous notice effect may be executed. Also, in the case of a configuration in which a continuous notice effect can be executed even when there is a sudden probability variation big hit or small hit, for example, in order to make it difficult to distinguish whether it is sudden sudden change big hit or small hit, It is preferable that the continuous notice effect is performed in a common effect mode in the case of the small hit.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 determines in step S6004 that the variation pattern type becomes non-reach CA2-1 for the latest extracted winning determination result (specifically, “00 (H) "or" 20 (H) "(see FIGS. 40 and 42), a value indicating that it becomes super CA2-7 (specifically," 07 (H) "or" 27 (H) ". 40, FIG. 42), or a value indicating super CA3-3 (specifically, “0C (H)”, “0F (H)”, “2C (H)” or “2F (H 41 ”(see FIG. 41 and FIG. 43) (that is, outlier fluctuation without specific reach such as reach and pseudo-ream, outlier fluctuation with super reach, or big hit fluctuation with super reach) Check whether or not ).

  In the process of step S6004, if the effect control CPU 101 determines that the determination result indicates “non-reach out”, “super reach out” or “super reach big hit”, each extracted winning time determination Based on the result, it is also determined whether or not reach is executed in each variation display until the variation display of the determination result is started. Then, when it is determined that the reach is not executed in each variation display (that is, when all the variation displays until the variation display of the determination result is started is determined as “non-reach”), step It shifts to S6005 and the process for determining the continuous notice effect after step S6005 shall be performed. That is, if the reach effect is executed during the execution of the continuous notice effect, the continuity of the continuous notice effect may be impaired and the effect of the continuous notice effect may not be sufficiently enhanced. Therefore, in this embodiment, control is performed so that a continuous notice effect may be executed on the condition that reach is not executed in each variable display until the variable display to be determined is started.

  When the determination result at the time of winning is any one of “non-reach out”, “super reach out” or “super reach big hit”, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the probability change state flag is set. (Step S6005). If the probability change state flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 selects the continuous notice allocation table B as a table for determining the presence / absence of the continuous notice effect and the effect mode of the continuous notice effect (step S6006). The continuous notice allocation table will be described later (see FIGS. 69 and 70).

  If the probability variation state flag is not set, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the time reduction state flag is set (step S6007). If the time-short state flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 indicates that the value of the number-of-times-after-count counter is 92-100 (that is, during the execution of the 92-100th variable display after the shift to the time-short state). Whether the start winning prize is given and the variable display is executed is confirmed (step S6008). In this case, specifically, the effect control CPU 101 should not have a value of the time-shortening counter value of 100 or more in the time-shortening state. What is necessary is just to determine whether it is above. If the value of the number of times after time reduction is not 92 to 100, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the power failure recovery flag is set (step S6009). In step S6008, when the value of the number of times after time reduction is 92 to 100 or when the power failure recovery flag is set in step S6009, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether there is a continuous notice effect and the effect of the continuous notice effect. The continuous notice allocation table D is selected as a table for determining the mode (step S6010). If the power failure recovery flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 selects the continuous notice allocation table C as a table for determining the presence / absence of the continuous notice effect and the effect form of the continuous notice effect (step S6011).

  If the time-short state flag is not set (that is, in the normal state), the production control CPU 101 determines that the value of the time-short time counter is 101 to 108 (that is, the 101st to 108th time after the shift to the time-short state). (If it is a case where the start winning is awarded and the variable display is executed) (step S6012). In this case, specifically, the production control CPU 101 may determine whether or not the value of the number-of-times-after-count counter is 101 or more. If the value of the number of times after time reduction is not 101 to 108, the effect control CPU 101 selects the continuous notice distribution table A as a table for determining the presence / absence of the continuous notice effect and the effect mode of the continuous notice effect (step) S6013). If the value of the number of times after time reduction is 101 to 108, the effect control CPU 101 selects the continuous notice allocation table E as a table for determining the presence / absence of the continuous notice effect and the effect mode of the continuous notice effect (step) S6014).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect using the continuous notice determination table for determining whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect (step S6015).

  The continuous notice determination process in step S6015 is executed on condition that no continuous notice execution flag is set in step S6002. That is, in this embodiment, the effect notice determination process is executed on condition that the continuous notice effect is not currently being executed. Since the continuous notice execution flag is already set after the start of the continuous notice effect, the continuous notice effect is executed in the already determined effect form without executing the continuous notice determination process again.

  In addition, if a super-reach or a winning prize that is a big hit occurs while running a continuous notice effect based on the determination result at the time of winning a “non-reach”, the super-reach is switched from the continuous notice effect that is being executed. Or a jackpot effect (for example, a reach notice or a jackpot notice) may be executed.

  FIG. 68 is an explanatory diagram of an example of the continuous notice determination table. As shown in FIG. 68, in this embodiment, different continuous notice determination tables are prepared according to the number of reserved memories and the gaming state. Among these, FIG. 68 (A) shows a continuous notice determination table for the reserved storage number 4 used in the normal state. Further, FIG. 68B shows a continuous notice determination table for the number of reserved memories 3 used in the normal state. FIG. 68 (C) shows a continuous notice determination table for the number of reserved memories 2 used in the normal state. Further, FIG. 68 (D) shows a continuous notice determination table for probability change / time reduction used in the probability change state or the time reduction state.

  In step S6015, the effect control CPU 101 executes the change display of the first special symbol (for example, when neither the probability change state flag nor the time-short state flag is set and is in the normal state). The first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number storage area (see steps S652 and S658) is specified. In addition, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed (for example, when the probability change state flag or the time reduction state flag is set and the probability change state or the time reduction state is set), the effect control CPU 101 performs the second hold. The second reserved storage number (see steps S655 and S661) stored in the storage number storage area is specified. Then, if the specified reserved memory count is 4, the effect control CPU 101 selects the continuous notice determination table for the reserved memory count 4 shown in FIG. If the specified number of reserved memories is 3, the production control CPU 101 selects the continuous notice determination table for the number of reserved memories 3 shown in FIG. If the specified number of reserved memories is 2, the production control CPU 101 selects the continuous notice determination table for the number of reserved memories 2 shown in FIG. Furthermore, if the probability change state flag or the time reduction state flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 selects the probability change / time reduction continuous notice determination table shown in FIG.

  In this embodiment, when the number of reserved memories is less than 2, it is impossible to execute a continuous notice effect over a plurality of fluctuations, so control is performed so that it is not determined to execute a continuous notice effect. In this embodiment, the continuous notice effect is ended in the variable display up to the previous variable display that is the target of the continuous notice effect, but the continuous notice effect is also displayed in the variable display that is the target of the continuous notice effect. In the case where it is configured to execute, the continuous notice effect can be executed over at least two fluctuations, and therefore it may be determined that the continuous notice effect is executed even if the number of reserved memories is only one. Thus, what is necessary is just to be able to execute a notice effect that is continuous over a plurality of fluctuations at least twice.

  In step S6015, the effect control CPU 101 first extracts a random number for determining the continuous notice for determining whether or not to execute the continuous notice. Then, the effect control CPU 101 executes the continuous notice effect by determining whether or not the extracted value of the continuous notice determination random number matches the determination value included in the selected continuous notice determination table. Decide whether or not. As shown in FIG. 68, in this embodiment, the ratio of the determination value is set to increase as the number of reserved memories increases. Decide to run.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68 (D), when the probability variation state or the short time state is set, the ratio of the determination value is set to be small, and when the probability variation state or the short time state is established. The ratio of the decision to execute the continuous notice effect is low. It should be noted that control may be performed so as not to determine that the continuous notice effect is to be executed in the case of the probability change state or the short time state.

  In this embodiment, the case where the presence / absence of the continuous notice effect is determined according to whether or not the game state is the probability change state or the short time state is shown, but the method for determining the continuous notice effect according to the game state is shown. Is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, depending on whether or not it is controlled to a low-probability high-base state that is easy to win, although it is a low-probability state where the probability of a big hit is not increased, the presence or absence of the continuous notice effect is determined. Also good. Conversely, for example, whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect is determined depending on whether or not it is controlled to a high-probability low-base state in which it is difficult to win a start even though it is a high-probability state with an increased probability of winning a big hit You may make it do. In this case, for example, when the low probability high base state or the high probability low base state is controlled, it may be determined that the continuous notice effect is not executed. Further, for example, whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect may be determined depending on whether or not an error notification of the big prize opening error is being performed. In this case, for example, in the case of an error state such as a big prize opening error, it may be determined that the continuous notice effect is not necessarily executed. It should be noted that the presence / absence of execution of the continuous notice effect may be determined depending on whether other error notifications such as a full tank error are being performed, not only the big prize opening error.

  Further, as a method for determining the continuous notice effect based on the game state, whether to execute the continuous notice effect based on whether or not a new command is received from the game control microcomputer 560 may be determined. Good.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it is determined in step S6015 to execute the continuous notice effect (step S6016). If it is determined not to execute the continuous notice effect, the process directly proceeds to step S6021.

  When it is determined to execute the continuous notice effect, the effect control CPU 101 extracts a random number for determining the continuous notice effect mode for determining the effect mode of the continuous notice effect (step S6017). Then, the effect control CPU 101 determines which of the determination values included in the continuous notice distribution table selected in steps S6006, S6010, S6011, S6013, and S6014 is the extracted value of the continuous notice effect mode determining random number. Is determined to determine the effect mode of the continuous notice effect (step S6018).

  FIG. 69 and FIG. 70 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of a continuous notice distribution table showing distribution of continuous notice effects. If the current gaming state is the normal state and the value of the number-of-short-times counter is not 101 to 108, the effect control CPU 101 selects the continuous notice allocation table in the normal state shown in FIG. 69A selected in step S6013. Using A, the effect mode of the continuous notice effect is determined based on the winning determination result indicated by the received winning determination result designation command. In this embodiment, when the continuous notice allocation table A is used, for example, the effect control CPU 101 determines the non-reach CA 2-1 based on the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 by the winning determination result designation command. When a winning determination result indicating that the pattern is a variation pattern type (that is, “non-reach” without a reach or a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream) is shown (specifically, the EXT data is “ In the case of “00 (H)”), as shown in FIG. 69 (A), a continuous notice effect of either “change of variation pattern at the time of symbol variation” or “mode transition” is executed. Decide on. Further, for example, the production control CPU 101 becomes the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 based on the start winning to the first start winning port 13 by the determination result designation command at the time of winning (that is, “super reach is lost”). ) Is shown (specifically, when the EXT data is “07 (H)”), as shown in FIG. It is determined to execute the continuous notice effect of any one of the effect modes of “change in variation mode”, “mode transition”, “countdown”, or “holding ball change”. Further, for example, the production control CPU 101 becomes the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-3 based on the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 by the determination result designation command at the time of winning (that is, “super reach big hit”). ) Is shown (specifically, when the EXT data is “0C (H)” or “0F (H)”), it is shown in FIG. 69 (A). As described above, it is determined to execute a continuous notice effect of any effect mode of “change in change pattern at the time of symbol change”, “mode shift”, “countdown”, or “change in reserved ball”.

  Further, when using the continuous notice allocation table A, for example, the production control CPU 101 determines the variation pattern type of the non-reach CA 2-1 based on the start winning to the second start winning port 14 by a winning determination result designation command. (Ie, EXT data is “20 (H)”) (in other words, the EXT data is “20 (H)”. ”), As shown in FIG. 69 (A), it is determined that there is no allocation for any of the continuous notice effects of any effect form, and that no continuous notice is executed. Further, for example, the production control CPU 101 becomes the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 based on the start winning to the second start winning port 14 by the determination result designation command at the time of winning (that is, “super reach is lost”). ) Is shown (specifically, when the EXT data is “27 (H)”), as shown in FIG. Also, there is no allocation for the continuous notice effect, and it is decided not to execute the continuous notice. Further, for example, the production control CPU 101 becomes the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-3 based on the start winning to the second start winning port 14 by the determination result designation command at the time of winning (that is, “super reach big hit”). ) Is shown (specifically, when the EXT data is “2C (H)” or “2F (H)”), the result is shown in FIG. 69 (A). As described above, there is no allocation to the continuous notice effect of any effect form, and it is determined not to execute the continuous notice.

  Note that the specific contents of the production modes of the continuous notice effects such as “change in variation mode at the time of symbol variation”, “mode transition”, “countdown”, and “change in reserved ball” will be described later.

  On the other hand, if the current gaming state is the probability variation state, the effect control CPU 101 uses the continuous notice allocation table B in the probability variation state shown in FIG. 69 (B) selected in step S6006 to determine the received winning time determination. Based on the winning determination result indicated by the result designation command, the effect mode of the continuous notice effect is determined. In this embodiment, when the continuous notice allocation table B is used, for example, the effect control CPU 101 determines the non-reach CA 2-1 based on the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 by the determination result designation command at the time of winning. When a winning determination result indicating that the pattern is a variation pattern type (that is, “non-reach” without a reach or a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream) is shown (specifically, the EXT data is “ In the case of “00 (H)”), as shown in FIG. 69 (B), there is no allocation to any of the continuous notice effects of any effect mode, and it is decided not to execute the continuous notice. Further, for example, the production control CPU 101 becomes the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 based on the start winning to the first start winning port 13 by the determination result designation command at the time of winning (that is, “super reach is lost”). ) Is shown (specifically, when the EXT data is “07 (H)”), as shown in FIG. Also, there is no allocation for the continuous notice effect, and it is decided not to execute the continuous notice. Further, for example, the production control CPU 101 becomes the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-3 based on the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 by the determination result designation command at the time of winning (that is, “super reach big hit”). ) Is shown (specifically, when the EXT data is “0C (H)” or “0F (H)”), it is shown in FIG. 69 (B). As described above, there is no allocation to the continuous notice effect of any effect form, and it is determined not to execute the continuous notice.

  Further, when the continuous notice allocation table B is used, for example, the effect control CPU 101 determines the variation pattern type of the non-reach CA 2-1 based on the start winning to the second start winning port 14 by the winning determination result designation command. (Ie, EXT data is “20 (H)”) (in other words, the EXT data is “20 (H)”. 69), as shown in FIG. 69 (B), there is no allocation to any of the continuous notice effects of any effect mode, and it is decided not to execute the continuous notice. Further, for example, the production control CPU 101 becomes the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 based on the start winning to the second start winning port 14 by the determination result designation command at the time of winning (that is, “super reach is lost”). ) Is shown (specifically, when the EXT data is “27 (H)”), as shown in FIG. It is determined to execute the continuous notice effect of any of the effect modes of “change in variation form”, “countdown”, or “holding ball change”. Further, for example, the production control CPU 101 becomes the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-3 based on the start winning to the second start winning port 14 by the determination result designation command at the time of winning (that is, “super reach big hit”). ) Is shown (specifically, when the EXT data is “2C (H)” or “2F (H)”), it is shown in FIG. 69 (B). As described above, it is determined to execute the continuous notice effect of any effect mode of “change in variation form at the time of symbol change”, “countdown”, or “change in reserved ball”.

  Also, if the current gaming state is a short-time state and the value of the number-of-hours counter is not 92 to 100 (that is, even if a start winning is made while the first to 91st variation display is executed after transition to the short-time state). The production control CPU 101 uses the continuous notice allocation table C shown in FIG. 69C selected in step S6011, based on the winning determination result indicated by the received winning determination result designation command. The effect mode of the continuous notice effect is determined. In this embodiment, when the continuous notice allocation table C is used, for example, the effect control CPU 101 determines the non-reach CA 2-1 based on the start winning to the first start winning port 13 by a winning determination result designation command. When a winning determination result indicating that the pattern is a variation pattern type (that is, “non-reach” without a reach or a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream) is shown (specifically, the EXT data is “ In the case of “00 (H)”), as shown in FIG. 69 (C), it is determined that there is no allocation for any of the continuous notice effects of any effect mode, and the continuous notice is not executed. Further, for example, the production control CPU 101 becomes the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 based on the start winning to the first start winning port 13 by the determination result designation command at the time of winning (that is, “super reach is lost”). ) Is shown (specifically, when the EXT data is “07 (H)”), as shown in FIG. Also, there is no allocation for the continuous notice effect, and it is decided not to execute the continuous notice. Further, for example, the production control CPU 101 becomes the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-3 based on the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 by the determination result designation command at the time of winning (that is, “super reach big hit”). ) Is shown (specifically, when the EXT data is “0C (H)” or “0F (H)”), it is shown in FIG. 69 (C). As described above, there is no allocation to the continuous notice effect of any effect form, and it is determined not to execute the continuous notice.

  Further, when the continuous notice allocation table C is used, for example, the effect control CPU 101 determines the variation pattern type of the non-reach CA 2-1 based on the start winning to the second start winning opening 14 by the winning determination result designation command. (Ie, EXT data is “20 (H)”) (in other words, the EXT data is “20 (H)”. ”), As shown in FIG. 69 (C), it is determined that there is no allocation for any of the continuous notice effects of any effect mode, and that no continuous notice is executed. Further, for example, the production control CPU 101 becomes the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 based on the start winning to the second start winning port 14 by the determination result designation command at the time of winning (that is, “super reach is lost”). ) Is shown (specifically, when the EXT data is “27 (H)”), as shown in FIG. It is determined to execute the continuous notice effect of any of the effect modes of “change in variation form”, “countdown”, or “holding ball change”. Further, for example, the production control CPU 101 becomes the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-3 based on the start winning to the second start winning port 14 by the determination result designation command at the time of winning (that is, “super reach big hit”). ) Is shown (specifically, when the EXT data is “2C (H)” or “2F (H)”), it is shown in FIG. 69 (C). As described above, it is determined to execute the continuous notice effect of any effect mode of “change in variation form at the time of symbol change”, “countdown”, or “change in reserved ball”.

  Also, if the current gaming state is a short-time state and the value of the number-of-short-time counter is 92 to 100 (that is, even if the start winning is performed while the 92 to 100th variation display is executed after the transition to the short time state). The production control CPU 101 uses the continuous notice allocation table D shown in FIG. 70 (D) selected in step S6010, based on the winning determination result indicated by the received winning determination result designation command. The effect mode of the continuous notice effect is determined. Also, if the current gaming state is a short-time state and the power failure recovery flag is set (that is, a power failure occurs when the gaming state is controlled to the short-time state, then power supply to the gaming machine resumes In the case where the winning control is performed, the effect control CPU 101 uses the continuous notice allocation table D shown in FIG. 70D selected in step S6010 to receive the winning determination result indicated by the received winning determination result designation command. Based on the above, the effect mode of the continuous notice effect is determined.

  In this embodiment, when the continuous notice allocation table D is used, for example, the effect control CPU 101 determines the non-reach CA 2-1 based on the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 by the winning determination result designation command. When a winning determination result indicating that the pattern is a variation pattern type (that is, “non-reach” without a reach or a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream) is shown (specifically, the EXT data is “ In the case of “00 (H)”), as shown in FIG. 70 (D), there is no allocation to the continuous notice effect of any effect form, and it is decided not to execute the continuous notice. Further, for example, the production control CPU 101 becomes the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 based on the start winning to the first start winning port 13 by the determination result designation command at the time of winning (that is, “super reach is lost”). ) Is shown (specifically, when the EXT data is “07 (H)”), as shown in FIG. Also, there is no allocation for the continuous notice effect, and it is decided not to execute the continuous notice. Further, for example, the production control CPU 101 becomes the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-3 based on the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 by the determination result designation command at the time of winning (that is, “super reach big hit”). ) Is shown (specifically, when the EXT data is “0C (H)” or “0F (H)”), the result shown in FIG. As described above, there is no allocation to the continuous notice effect of any effect form, and it is determined not to execute the continuous notice.

  When the continuous notice allocation table D is used, for example, the effect control CPU 101 determines the variation pattern type of the non-reach CA 2-1 based on the start winning to the second start winning port 14 with a winning determination result designation command. (Ie, EXT data is “20 (H)”) (in other words, the EXT data is “20 (H)”. ”), As shown in FIG. 70D, it is determined that there is no allocation for any of the continuous notice effects of any effect mode, and the continuous notice is not executed. Further, for example, the production control CPU 101 becomes the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 based on the start winning to the second start winning port 14 by the determination result designation command at the time of winning (that is, “super reach is lost”). ) Is shown (specifically, when the EXT data is “27 (H)”), as shown in FIG. Is determined to execute the continuous notice effect of the effect mode. Further, for example, the production control CPU 101 becomes the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-3 based on the start winning to the second start winning port 14 by the determination result designation command at the time of winning (that is, “super reach big hit”). ) Is shown (specifically, when the EXT data is “2C (H)” or “2F (H)”), the result shown in FIG. Thus, it determines to perform the continuous notice effect of the production | generation aspect of "holding ball change".

  The continuous notice allocation table D shown in FIG. 70 (D) is used when the game state is the short-time state, but the remaining number of short-time states is within eight times (until eight times of variable display is executed). The time-shortening state ends during this period. In this embodiment, since the total number of stored reserves can be stored up to 8 (that is, up to 8 total start winnings to the first starting winning port 13 and the second starting winning port 14 can be held), When the remaining number of time-saving states is within 8 times, the game state is in the time-saving state when determining the winning time, but the time-saving state is already in effect when the variable display subject to the winning-time determination is started. May have ended. Therefore, there is a possibility that the determination result at the time of winning and the determination result at the start of actual variation cannot be matched, and the continuous notice effect cannot be appropriately performed. For example, when a value of “220 to 229” is extracted as the random number for determining the variation pattern type, the variation pattern for deviation for probability variation / time reduction shown in FIG. In spite of determining that the super reach is lost (super CA2-7) using the type determination table 135C, when the variable display is actually started, the state is shifted to the normal state, and thus the super reach is not achieved (FIG. 35). (As shown in (A) and (B), normal CA2-5 and normal CA2-6 are determined), there is a possibility that the determination result at the time of winning and the determination result at the start of actual variation cannot be matched. . Further, when a value of “90 to 219” is extracted as the random number for variation pattern type determination, the variation pattern for deviation for probability variation / short time shown in FIG. Even though it is determined that it is not out of place (non-reach CA2-3) using the type determination table 135C, when the variable display is actually started, it shifts to the normal state. May be executed (which may be determined as non-reach CA2-2 or normal CA2-4 to CA2-6 as shown in FIGS. 35A and 35B), There is a possibility that the decision result at the start of actual fluctuation may not be consistent. As a result, the percentage that the change display subject to the determination at the time of winning the prize does not become a big hit or super reach becomes high, which may impair the player's expectation. Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 70 (D), when the game state is the short-time state but the remaining number of short-time states is within 8 times, The execution of the continuous notice effect is restricted so that only the continuous notice effect is performed, thereby preventing a situation that impairs the player's expectation.

  The continuous notice allocation table D shown in FIG. 70 (D) is also used when the gaming state is a short time state and the power failure recovery flag is set. In this embodiment, as described above, the RAM included in the effect control microcomputer 100 is not backed up by the backup power source, and the value of the time counter number counter is not stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped and the power supply is resumed, when any winning determination result command is received, the effect control CPU 101 displays the change display after shifting to the time-saving state. It is not possible to correctly determine how many times it has been executed. Therefore, if power failure recovery is performed when the remaining number of time-saving states is 8 or less, there is a possibility that the result of determination at the time of winning is not consistent with the result of determination at the start of actual fluctuation. There is a risk that the player's expectation will be impaired. Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 70 (D), even when the gaming state is the short-time state and the power failure is restored, only the continuous notice effect of the “pending ball change” effect mode is performed. In order to prevent this, the execution of the continuous notice effect is regulated to prevent a situation in which the player's expectation is impaired.

  Also, if the current gaming state is the normal state and the value of the after-short-time counter is 101 to 108 (that is, even if a start winning is made while the 101st to 108th variation display is executed after shifting to the short time state). The production control CPU 101 uses the continuous notice allocation table E shown in FIG. 70E selected in step S6014, based on the winning determination result indicated by the received winning determination result designation command. The effect mode of the continuous notice effect is determined.

  In this embodiment, when the continuous notice allocation table E is used, for example, the effect control CPU 101 determines the non-reach CA 2-1 based on the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 by the determination result designation command at the time of winning. When a winning determination result indicating that the pattern is a variation pattern type (that is, “non-reach” without a reach or a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream) is shown (specifically, the EXT data is “ In the case of “00 (H)”), as shown in FIG. 70 (E), there is no allocation to any of the continuous notice effects of any effect mode, and it is decided not to execute the continuous notice. Further, for example, the production control CPU 101 becomes the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 based on the start winning to the first start winning port 13 by the determination result designation command at the time of winning (that is, “super reach is lost”). ) Is shown (specifically, when the EXT data is “07 (H)”), as shown in FIG. Is determined to execute the continuous notice effect of the effect mode. Further, for example, the production control CPU 101 becomes the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-3 based on the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 by the determination result designation command at the time of winning (that is, “super reach big hit”). ) Is shown (specifically, when the EXT data is “0C (H)” or “0F (H)”), it is shown in FIG. 70 (E). Thus, it determines to perform the continuous notice effect of the production | generation aspect of "holding ball change".

  Further, when using the continuous notice allocation table E, for example, the effect control CPU 101 determines the variation pattern type of the non-reach CA 2-1 based on the start winning to the second start winning port 14 with the winning determination result designation command. (Ie, EXT data is “20 (H)”) (in other words, the EXT data is “20 (H)”. ”), As shown in FIG. 70 (E), it is determined that there is no allocation for any of the continuous notice effects of any effect form, and that no continuous notice is executed. Further, for example, the production control CPU 101 becomes the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 based on the start winning to the second start winning port 14 by the determination result designation command at the time of winning (that is, “super reach is lost”). ) Is shown (specifically, when the EXT data is “27 (H)”), as shown in FIG. Also, there is no allocation for the continuous notice effect, and it is decided not to execute the continuous notice. Further, for example, the production control CPU 101 becomes the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-3 based on the start winning to the second start winning port 14 by the determination result designation command at the time of winning (that is, “super reach big hit”). ) Is shown (specifically, when the EXT data is “2C (H)” or “2F (H)”), it is shown in FIG. 70 (E). As described above, there is no allocation to the continuous notice effect of any effect form, and it is determined not to execute the continuous notice.

  The continuous notice allocation table E shown in FIG. 70 (E) is used when the number of variable displays executed after the time-short state is ended and the gaming state is shifted to the normal state is still within eight times. It is. In this embodiment, since the total number of stored reserves can be stored up to 8 (that is, up to 8 total start winnings to the first starting winning port 13 and the second starting winning port 14 can be held), If the number of executions of the variable display is still within 8 even after the time-short state is ended, the game state is normally set when the variable display is started with respect to the reserved memory that has been held in the starting prize and held before that. Although it is in the state, there is a possibility that the gaming state is still in the short time state when the winning determination is made. For this reason, there is a possibility that the result of determination at the time of winning and the determination result at the start of actual fluctuation cannot be matched, and the continuous notice effect cannot be properly performed for the stored memory that has been won by starting before the time saving state is finished. For example, when the value of “90 to 219” is extracted as the random number for determining the variation pattern type and the determination at the time of winning is made for the holding storage that has been won before starting the time reduction state, In spite of being determined to be non-displacement (non-reach CA2-3) using the variation pattern type determination table 135 for probability variation / shortening deviation shown in FIG. When starting, since there is a transition to the normal state, a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream and normal reach may be executed (as shown in FIGS. 35A and 35B), non-reach CA2-2 and normal CA2 -4 to CA2-6 may be determined). Then, if it is immediately after the short-time end, it is determined in the process of step S6004 that all the determination results at the time of winning are “non-reach” and the continuous notice effect is started. There is a possibility that a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream or a change in normal reach may be interrupted, resulting in a situation in which the continuity of the continuous notice effect is impaired, which may impair the player's expectation. Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 70 (E), when the game state is the normal state but the number of executions of the variable display after the completion of the time reduction state is still within eight times, The execution of the continuous notice effect is regulated so that only the continuous notice effect of the “change” effect mode is performed, thereby preventing a situation in which the player's expectation is impaired.

  As shown in FIGS. 69 (A) to 69 (C), in this embodiment, the continuous notice effect in the “countdown” effect mode has a determination result at the time of winning “super-reaching loss” or “super-reach big hit”. Is selected only if Therefore, when the continuous notice effect is executed in the “countdown” effect mode, it is determined that the super reach effect is performed at least in the variable display that is the target of the determination at the time of winning, and the interest for the game is improved. be able to.

  As shown in FIGS. 70D and 70E, in the continuous notice allocation tables D and E, there is no distribution for “countdown” which is an effect mode in which super reach is determined. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is in the short-time state but the remaining number of short-time state is within eight times, or when the gaming state is in the short-time state and the power failure is restored, the gaming state is normally If the number of executions of the variable display after the completion of the short-time state is still within eight times, the continuous notice effect of the “countdown” effect mode is restricted from being selected. By doing so, the super-reach effect is not executed in the variable display that is the target of the determination at the time of winning, even though the continuous notice effect of the “countdown” effect mode of the super reach determination is executed, The situation that seriously impairs the player's expectation is prevented.

  In addition, when it is determined not to execute the continuous notice effect because there is no distribution in the continuous notice distribution tables A to E, control is performed so as not to execute the processes of steps S6019 and S6020 described later.

  If there is no distribution in the continuous notice allocation tables A to E, it may be determined that the continuous notice effect is not always executed in the determination process in step S6015. In this case, for example, depending on which combination of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed in advance in the continuous notice determination table shown in FIG. 68, the winning determination result, and the game state combination The continuous notice determination table may be designed so that it is determined that the continuous notice effect is not always executed for combinations that are not distributed to the continuous notice distribution tables A to E. For example, as shown in FIG. 69 and FIG. 70, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed, and the determination result at the time of winning is “non-reach”, the probability variation state or the short time state Since there is no assignment of the production mode, the continuous notice determination table may be designed so that it is determined that the continuous notice effect is not decided. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce a useless processing burden when there is no distribution in the continuous notice allocation tables A to E.

  Further, in this embodiment, the continuous notice determination table for determining whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect and the continuous notice distribution table for determining the effect mode of the continuous notice effect are configured as separate tables. Although the case is shown, the presence / absence of execution of the continuous notice effect and the effect mode are determined by one determination process using one table in which the presence / absence and the appearance mode of the continuous notice effect are associated with each other. Also good.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets a continuous notice determination flag indicating that the execution of the continuous notice effect has been decided in accordance with the effect mode determined in step S6018 (step S6019). In this case, for example, when the CPU 101 for effect control determines to execute the continuous notice effect based on receiving the winning determination result 1 designation command shown in FIG. If the start winning is “non-reach”, a first off-line continuous notice determination flag indicating that the execution of the continuous notice effect is decided based on the determination at the time of winning is set. Further, for example, when the CPU 101 for effect control determines to execute the continuous notice effect based on the reception of the winning determination result 8 designation command shown in FIG. If the start winning prize is “super reach loss”, a first reach continuous notice determination flag indicating that the execution of the continuous notice effect has been decided based on the determination at the time of winning is set. Further, for example, when the CPU 101 for effect control determines to execute the continuous notice effect based on receiving the winning determination result 13 designation command or the winning determination result 16 designation command shown in FIG. When a “super reach big hit” is made for the start winning to the first start winning opening 13, a first big hit continuous notice determination flag indicating that execution of the continuous notice effect is decided based on the determination at the time of winning is set. Further, for example, when the CPU 101 for effect control determines to execute the continuous notice effect based on the reception of the winning determination result 21 designation command shown in FIG. When the start prize is “non-reach”, a second deviation continuous notice determination flag indicating that the execution of the continuous notice effect is decided based on the determination at the time of winning is set. Further, for example, when the CPU 101 for effect control determines to execute the continuous notice effect based on receiving the winning determination result 28 designation command shown in FIG. When the start winning prize is “super reach loss”, a second reach continuous notice determination flag indicating that execution of the continuous notice effect has been decided based on the determination at the time of winning is set. Further, for example, when the effect control CPU 101 determines to execute the continuous notice effect based on receiving the winning determination result 33 designation command or the winning determination result 36 designation command shown in FIG. When a “super reach big hit” is made for the start winning at the second start winning opening 14, a second big hit continuous notice determination flag indicating that execution of the continuous notice effect is decided based on the determination at the time of winning is set. Of these continuous notice determination flags, the first consecutive notice notice flag, the first reach notice notice flag, and the first big hit notice notice flag are the first notice notice flags. Of these continuous notice determination flags, the second off-line continuous notice determination flag, the second reach continuous notice determination flag, and the second big hit continuous notice determination flag are the second consecutive notice determination flags.

  In step S6019, a continuous notice determination flag is set, and information that can specify the effect mode determined in step S6018 is also set. In this case, for example, a flag indicating that the effect mode is “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation”, a flag indicating “mode shift”, a flag indicating “countdown”, “holding ball” A flag indicating “change” may be set. In addition, for example, when the continuous notice determination flag is composed of a plurality of bits (for example, 1 byte), by setting a value that specifies which aspect of production to a predetermined bit of the continuous notice determination flag, It may be possible to specify which production mode is determined.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 sets the current number of reserved memories in the variation counter (step S6020). In this case, when the first continuous notice determination flag is set in step S6019, the effect control CPU 101 sets the first reserved memory number in the variation counter. If the second continuous notice determination flag is set in step S6019, the second reserved storage number is set in the variation counter. Note that the variation count counter is a counter for counting the number of variation displays that are executed before the variation display for which the continuous notice effect is determined.

  In the continuous notice allocation table shown in FIG. 69 and FIG. 70, the allocation may be performed so that the selection ratio of each effect mode varies depending on the reliability that is a big hit. For example, each presentation mode may be allocated so that the reliability of the big hit becomes higher in the order of “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation”, “mode transition”, “countdown”, “change in reserved ball”. . In addition, the allocation method of each production mode that increases the reliability that is a big hit is not limited to such an order, for example, in the reverse order “change in reserved ball”, “countdown”, “mode shift”, “symbol change” Allocation may be performed so that the reliability that becomes a big hit becomes higher in the order of “change in the fluctuation pattern of time”. Furthermore, not only in the order of these arrangements, for example, the “mode transition” and “countdown” effects are assigned in the order of arrangement in which the reliability with the biggest jackpot is high, or conversely, the reliability with the biggest jackpot is low. And various ways of allocating the production modes are possible.

  In this embodiment, the following prohibition process is performed for the continuous notice effect.

(1) If the game machine is a big hit when the power is turned on or the power is restored, the gaming state after the big hit game is indeterminate. Therefore, in such a case, control is performed so as to clear all the information on the current number of reserved memories. In addition, it is configured not to clear the information on the number of reserved memory itself, but to clear information related to the reserved memory (for example, a winning determination result (determination result at the start winning prize) stored in the winning determination result storage buffer). May be.

(2) When there is a new start winning at the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening 14 during the big hit game state, the game state after the big hit game is uncertain. Therefore, control is performed so as not to perform the process of executing the continuous notice effect for such a start winning prize (see step S208A). Also, control is performed so as not to stack the variation information of the number of reserved storage.

(3) In the case of a high probability state (probability variation state), a short time state, or a high probability state due to sudden probability variation big hit, a winning determination result designation command for determining a winning for the first winning winning opening 13 Is controlled so as not to be transmitted (see step S207A). In this case, even if the production control microcomputer 100 does not receive the winning determination result designation command, for example, the first reserved memory number addition designation command or the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command is used. The first winning determination result storage buffer and the second winning determination result storage buffer (see FIG. 64) based on the reserved storage number specified by the second reserved memory number addition designation command and the second reserved memory number subtraction designation command. It is sufficient to always specify to which storage area the storage area is in a state of having a reserved storage. When a new winning determination result specifying command is received, the winning determination result specified by the winning determination result specifying command may be stored in the storage area of the specified winning determination result storage buffer. Further, a command indicating that the determination result at the time of winning cannot be specified is transmitted to the probability change state or the short time state, and information indicating that the determination result at the time of winning cannot be specified based on the received command. The time determination result storage buffer or the second winning time determination result storage buffer may be stored in a corresponding storage area.

(4) When changing from the 92nd time to the 100th time after the transition to the short-time state, the remaining state is small until the end of the short-time state, and the gaming state and the actual state at the time of winning determination are determined by the timing of transition from the short-time state to the normal state There is a possibility that the game state at the time of change may not match. Therefore, even in the same short time state, when changing from the 92nd time to the 100th time, using a continuous notice allocation table different from the case of changing from the 1st time to the 91st time, Control is performed so that only the continuous notice effect of “ball change” is executed (see FIG. 70).

(5) Further, even when the power saving state is in the time-saving state, the same as (4) can be said because the remaining number of time-saving states is uncertain. For this reason, by using a continuous notice allocation table similar to the case of performing the change from the 92nd to the 100th time, control is performed so that only the continuous notice effect of “holding ball change” is executed.

(6) Further, when there is a start prize within an extremely short predetermined period (for example, 32 ms) after the start of the variable display, it may be controlled not to perform a continuous notice effect for the start prize.

(7) In addition, control is performed so that the continuous notice effect based on the non-reach losing and the determination at the time of winning is not continuously executed for a predetermined period. For example, when the continuous notice effect based on the determination at the time of winning the non-reach and the winning is finished, the next continuous notice effect based on the determination at the time of winning the non-reach and the winning until the variation display is finished 20 times or more thereafter. Control not to execute.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 deletes the first winning determination result stored in the winning determination result storage buffer (the winning determination result corresponding to the variable display executed this time) and stores the winning determination result storage buffer. The contents are shifted (step S6021). In this case, when the effect control CPU 101 extracts each winning determination result from the first winning determination result storage buffer in step S6003, the first winning determination stored in the first winning determination result storage buffer is stored. The determination result is deleted, and the content of the first winning determination result storage buffer is shifted. If each winning determination result is extracted from the second winning determination result storage buffer in step S6003, the first winning determination result stored in the second winning determination result storage buffer is deleted, 2. The contents of the determination result storage buffer at the time of winning a prize are shifted.

  FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S811). If the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) (step S813). As described above, in this embodiment, the display result designation command is transmitted even when the power failure is recovered (see step S44). However, as shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the variation pattern command has been received, the transition to the production symbol variation start processing is started and the variation display of the production symbol is started. The display will not start.

  72 and 73 are flowcharts showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 first confirms whether or not the continuous notice interrupting flag indicating that the continuous notice effect is being interrupted is set (step S8001). Note that the continuous notice interruption flag is set in step S8004 described later. If the continuous notice interruption flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 indicates that the continuous notice effect is being executed based on the determination result at the time of winning for the start winning to the first start winning opening 13. It is confirmed whether or not the first continuous notice execution flag is set (step S8002). The first continuous notice execution flag is set in step S6019 described later. If any of the first continuous notice execution flags is set (Y in step S8002), the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the second reserved memory number subtraction designation command reception flag is set ( Step S8003). If the second reserved storage number subtraction designation command reception flag is not set, the process shifts to step S8009. If the second reserved memory number subtraction designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 sets the continuous notice interruption flag (step S8004). It is to be noted that a winning determination result designation command (a winning determination result 21 designation command to a winning determination result 39 designation command; see FIG. 42 and FIG. 43) transmitted when a winning is won at the second starting prize opening 14 is received. On the basis of this, the continuous notice interruption flag may be set.

  As described above, in this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S8002 to S8004, the continuous notice effect is being executed based on the winning determination result for the start winning to the first starting winning opening 13. When the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol is interrupted, control is performed to interrupt the continuous notice effect.

  When the continuous notice interruption flag is set in step S8001, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the second reserved memory number subtraction designation command reception flag is set (step S8005). If the second reserved memory number subtraction designation command reception flag is not set (that is, when the second special symbol variation display is finished and the first special symbol variation display is returned), the continuous notice suspension flag is set. Reset is performed (step S8006). The first pending storage number subtraction designation command reception flag and the second pending storage number subtraction designation command reception flag are processed when the first pending storage number subtraction designation command and the second pending storage number subtraction designation command are received. (See steps S657 to S662A), and is reset in the effect symbol variation stop process and the jackpot end effect process when the effect symbol variation display is terminated or when the jackpot game is terminated (see steps S8310 and S888).

  Next, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the set first continuous notice execution flag is the first off-line continuous notice execution flag of the first continuous notice execution flags (step S8007). ). The first off-running continuous notice execution flag indicates that a continuous notice effect is being executed based on the determination at the time of winning when the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 becomes “non-reach out”. This flag is set as one of the first continuous notice execution flags in step S6019 described later. When the first deviation continuous notice execution flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the first deviation continuous notice execution flag (step S8008).

  On the other hand, if the flag for executing the first missed continuous advance notice is not set in step S8007 (in this case, if the start win to the first start winning opening 13 is “super reach miss” or “super reach big hit”, the prize is won. Based on the time determination, the first reach continuous notice execution flag or the first big hit continuous notice execution flag is set), the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S8009.

  As described above, when the processing of steps S8005 to S8008 is executed, the second special symbol variation display interrupts and the continuous notice effect is interrupted, and then the first special symbol variation display is restored. When the variation subject to time determination is “non-reach”, the continuous notice effect is ended without continuing the continuous notice effect. In addition, if the variation subject to determination at the time of winning is “Super reach out” or “Super reach jackpot”, after the display returns to the variation display of the first special symbol, the remaining continuous notice effect continues. Executed. With such a configuration, when returning to the continuous notice effect after the change display of the second special symbol has interrupted, at least super reach will be determined, and a big hit will be given to the player after super reach. Expectation can be raised.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 reads the variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step S8009). Next, the CPU 101 for effect control displays the display result (stop) of the effect symbol in accordance with the variation pattern command read in step S8009 and the data stored in the display result specifying command storage area (that is, the received display result specifying command). (Design) is determined (step S8010). That is, when the CPU 101 for effect control executes the process of step S8010, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stop of the effect symbol) according to the variable display pattern (variation pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means. A display result determining means for determining (design) is realized. When the pseudo-ream is specified by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 101 does not reach the chance symbol symbol (for example, “223” or “445”) as the temporary stop symbol in the pseudo-ream. The combination of the big hit symbol of the object and the symbol in which one symbol is shifted) is also determined. In addition, when it is determined that the production control CPU 101 executes the continuous production of the production mode of “change in the variation pattern at the time of design fluctuation”, the so-called chance symbol design (for example, “ The combination of symbols that do not reach, such as “223” and “445”, but which is not one reach and one symbol is shifted) is determined. The effect control CPU 101 stores data indicating the determined effect stop symbols in the effect symbol display result storage area.

  FIG. 74 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9. In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 specifies that the display result is a big hit, out of place, suddenly probable big hit, or small hit based on the received display result designation command, and responds to the specified display result. The stop symbol of the production symbol is determined. In the example shown in FIG. 74, when the received display result designation command indicates a normal jackpot (when the received display result designation command is a display result 2 designation command), the effect control CPU 101 uses the stop design as a stop symbol. A combination of effect symbols in which the three symbols are even-numbered symbols (a stop symbol that usually reminds of the occurrence of a big hit) is determined. When the received display result designation command indicates a probable big hit (when the received display result designation command is a display result 3 designation command), the production control CPU 101 uses odd symbols (probability variation) as 3 symbols as stop symbols. The combination of effect symbols arranged in a stop symbol reminiscent of the occurrence of a big hit) is determined. And in the case of detachment (when the received display result designation command is a display result 1 designation command), a combination of effect symbols other than the above is determined. However, when a reach effect is involved, a combination of effect symbols in which two left and right symbols are aligned is determined. When the received display result designation command suddenly shows a probable big hit or small hit (when the received display result designation command is a display result 4 designation command or a display result 5 designation command), the CPU 101 for effect control Determines a combination of effect symbols such as “135” as stop symbols. The combination of the three symbols derived and displayed on the effect display device 9 is the “stop symbol” of the effect symbol. The effect control CPU 101 determines that the winning symbol is a stop symbol by specifying that it is a big hit, disappointment, suddenly probable big hit or small hit based on the variation pattern command, not the display result designation command. It may be. For example, when the variation control command for big hit is received, the effect control CPU 101 determines a big hit symbol with the same symbols on the left and right sides, and suddenly receives a variation pattern command for a probable big hit / small hit. Determines a stop symbol such as “135”, and when a variation pattern command for deviation is received, a symbol other than these may be determined.

  The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the stop symbol, and uses the stop symbol determination table in which the data indicating the combination of effect symbols and numerical values are associated with each other to generate the stop symbol of the effect symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting data indicating the combination of effect symbols corresponding to the numerical value matching the extracted random number.

  As for the effect symbols, a stop symbol that recalls a big hit is called a big hit symbol. In addition, a stop symbol reminiscent of a probable big hit is called a probable big hit symbol, and a stop symbol reminiscent of a normal big hit is called a normal big hit symbol. And a stop symbol that reminds of a loss is called a loss symbol.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the continuous notice interruption flag is set (step S8011). If the continuous notice interruption flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 performs a notice effect (a notice effect other than the continuous notice effect. For example, a step-up notice effect or a mini-character notice during the effect display device 9 during the change display of the effect symbol. The notice effect setting process for determining whether or not to execute the effect and setting the effect aspect of the notice effect is executed (step S8012). If the continuous notice interruption flag is set (Y in step S8011), the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S8013 without executing step S8012.

  In this embodiment, the continuous notice interruption flag is set because the second special symbol is displayed during execution of the continuous notice effect based on the result of determination at the time of winning for the start winning to the first start winning opening 13. Is interrupted and the continuous notice effect is interrupted. Therefore, when the process of step S8011 is executed and the change display of the second special symbol is executed while interrupting in the middle of the continuous notice effect, the effect display device 9 is displayed during the change display of the second special symbol. Is controlled so as not to execute a notice effect (a notice effect other than a continuous notice effect. For example, a step-up notice effect or a mini character notice effect). Therefore, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed while interrupting in the middle of the continuous notice effect, as a result, neither the notice result of the continuous notice nor the notice effect other than the continuous notice effect is executed.

  Next, when executing the variation pattern and the notice effect, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the notice effect (step S8013). Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step S8014).

  FIG. 75 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of a process table. The process table is a table in which process data referred to when the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 101 controls effect devices (effect components) such as the effect display device 9 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table includes data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. In the display control execution data, data indicating each variation aspect constituting the variation aspect during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the effect symbols is described. Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. The process timer set value is set with a change time in the form of the change. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table and performs control to display the effect design in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value.

  The process table shown in FIG. 75 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. A process table is prepared for each variation pattern.

  If it is determined that the continuous notice effect is to be executed and the continuous notice execution flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the continuous notice effect in step S8013.

  In addition, in the process table used when effect control is executed for a variation pattern with reach effect, the left symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation, and the right symbol is stopped when a predetermined time further elapses. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the symbols is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbol, the temporary stop symbol in the pseudo-ream and the sliding effect. May be.

  In addition, the CPU 101 for effect control is based on the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, and sound number data 1). Control of the various lamps and the speaker 27 as a production component is executed (step S8015). For example, a command is output to the VDP 109 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the effect display device 9. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to perform on / off control of various lamps. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70 in order to output sound from the speaker 27. Further, for example, when executing a pseudo-ream effect or a notice effect, the movable member 78 is moved by driving the motor 86, or the effect blades 79a and 79b are moved by driving the motor 87. Is done.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 performs control so that the effect symbol is variably displayed by the change pattern corresponding to the change pattern command on a one-to-one basis. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to.

  Then, a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command is set in the variation time timer (step S8016), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation process (step S802). (Step S8017).

  FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol changing process (step S802) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol changing process, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S8101) and subtracts 1 from the value of the change time timer (step S8102). When the process timer times out (step S8103), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S8104). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data set next (step S8105). Further, for example, when executing a pseudo-ream effect or a notice effect, the movable member 78 is moved by driving the motor 86, or the effect blades 79a and 79b are moved by driving the motor 87. Is done.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether any of the continuous notice execution flags is set (step S8106). If any continuous notice execution flag is set, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the continuous notice interruption flag is set (step S8107). If the continuous notice interruption flag is not set, the CPU for effect control 101 performs “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol change”, “mode change”, according to the effect form determined in the continuous notice effect form determination process in step S6018. Control is performed to execute the continuous notice effect in the effect mode of either “countdown” or “holding ball change” (step S8108). When executing the continuous notice effect, the process of step S8108 is executed on the condition that the continuous notice effect is determined as Y in step S8106 and the continuous notice interruption flag is not set. . Then, it is repeatedly determined as Y in step S8106 until the continuous notice effect is finished, and the process of step S8108 is executed. On the other hand, if the continuous notice interruption flag is set in step S8107 (that is, if the continuous notice effect is being interrupted), the process proceeds to step S8109 without executing step S8108.

  Then, if the change time timer has timed out (step S8109), the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol change stop process (step S803) (step S8110).

  FIG. 77 is an explanatory diagram showing the handling when the change display of the second special symbol is interrupted when the continuous notice effect is executed based on the result of determination at the time of winning for the first winning winning opening 13. is there. Among these, FIG. 77 (A) shows the handling when the change display of the second special symbol is interrupted when the continuous notice effect of “change of the variation mode at the time of symbol variation” or “mode transition” is executed. Show. FIG. 77 (B) shows the handling when the change display of the second special symbol is interrupted when the continuous notice effect of “countdown” or “holding ball change” is being executed.

  In this embodiment, when the change display of the second special symbol is interrupted when the continuous notice effect is executed based on the determination result at the time of winning with respect to the start winning to the first start winning opening 13, the continuous notice effect is given. Is interrupted (see step S8004). In this case, if the change in the first special symbol for which the reason for the execution of the interrupted continuous notice effect is determined is due to the determination at the time of winning as “non-reach”, the second special symbol Even if the change display is ended and the display returns to the change display of the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 77, the continuous advance notice effect is ended without restarting the interrupted continuous notice effect (Y in step S8007). , S8008). In addition, when the variation of the first special symbol is due to the determination of winning out of “super reach loss” or “super reach jackpot”, the variation display of the second special symbol is terminated and the first special symbol is terminated. When the display returns to the fluctuation display, the remaining continuous notice effect is resumed and executed as shown in FIG. 77 (see N in step S8007). However, when the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol executed by interrupting the continuous notice effect is a big hit, as shown in FIG. 77, the interruption is performed regardless of the reason for executing the interrupted continuous notice effect. The continuous notice effect is ended as it is without restarting the continuous notice effect (see step S887 described later).

  As shown in FIG. 69 and FIG. 70, when it is determined at the time of winning that the start winning to the first starting winning opening 13 is “non-reach”, “countdown” and “change in reserved ball” There is no case where a continuous notice effect is executed. Therefore, in this case, as shown in FIG. 77 (B), the change in the first special symbol for which the reason for execution of the interrupted continuous notice effect is determined is determined to be “non-reach out” at the time of winning. Since there is no case where the continuous notice effect is executed, there is no problem that the variable display of the second special symbol is interrupted and executed.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 77, when the change display of the second special symbol interrupts during execution of the continuous notice effect, the notice effect (the relevant It is controlled so as not to execute (the effect of giving a notice for the variable display of the second special symbol) (see Y in step S8011 described later).

  FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation stop process, the effect control CPU 101 first performs control for deriving and displaying a stop symbol in accordance with data (data indicating the stop symbol) stored in the effect symbol display result storage area (step S8301). Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not it is determined to be a big hit or a small hit (step S8302). Whether it is determined to be a big hit or a small hit is confirmed, for example, by a display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area. In this embodiment, it can be confirmed whether or not it is determined to be a big hit or a small hit according to the determined stop symbol.

  If it is determined to be a big hit or a small hit, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display process (step S804) (step S8303).

  If it is determined that neither big hit nor small hit is made, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether any continuous notice execution flag is set (step S8304). If it is set, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the continuous notice interruption flag is set (step S8305). If the continuous notice interruption flag is not set, the CPU 101 for effect control subtracts 1 from the value of the variation counter (step S8306). In addition, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the variation counter after subtraction is 0 (step S8307). If the value of the variation counter is 0, the effect control CPU 101 resets the set continuous notice execution flag (first continuous notice execution flag or second continuous notice execution flag). (Step S8308). By executing such processing, in this embodiment, the continuous notice effect is executed until the display of the change one time before the start of the change subject to the determination at the time of winning, and the determination at the time of winning is determined. The continuous notice execution flag is reset at the start of the subject variable display (the continuous notice effect is not performed during the variable display subject to the winning determination). Note that the continuous notice effect may be executed even during the variable display that is the target of the determination at the time of winning.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the counter for the number of times after time reduction (step S8309). It should be noted that the effect control CPU 101 may add the value of the number-of-times-after-counter counter only when the gaming state is the time-saving state. Next, the effect control CPU 101 resets a predetermined flag (step S8310). For example, the effect control CPU 101 resets command reception flags such as a first reserved memory number subtraction designation command reception flag, a second reservation memory number subtraction designation command reception flag, and a display result designation command reception flag. The effect control CPU 101 may reset the command reception flag immediately after being referred to in the effect control process or the fourth symbol process (for example, as shown in step S811 in FIG. 71, the variation pattern). The fluctuation pattern command reception flag may be reset immediately after confirming the command reception flag). However, for example, the reserved memory count subtraction designation command is referred to in both the effect control process and the 4th symbol process, so that the effect symbol variation is stopped at the end of the variation as shown in this embodiment. It is desirable to reset in a process or the like, or to reset in a jackpot end effect process when the jackpot ends. Then, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S8311).

  FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing a jackpot display process (step S804) in the effect control process. In the jackpot display process, the effect control CPU 101 receives any jackpot start designation command reception flag (a jackpot start 1 designation command reception flag indicating that a jackpot start 1 designation command has been received, or a jackpot start 2 designation command has been received). It is confirmed whether the big hit start 2 designation command reception flag shown or the small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag) indicating that the small hit / sudden probability big hit start designation command has been received is set (step S871). . If any one of the jackpot start designation command reception flags has been set, control is performed to display a game start screen corresponding to the set flag on the effect display device 9 (step S872). Also, the set flag (big hit start 1 designation command reception flag, big hit start 2 designation command reception flag, or small hit / sudden probability sudden hit big start start command reception flag) is reset (step S873). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit game processing (step S805) (step S874).

  It should be noted that, in addition to the process for displaying a big hit, a process for displaying a small hit is provided. In the case of a small hit, for example, a predetermined period (a big prize opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds) Sufficient time (for example, 0.5 seconds) may be produced in the same manner as in the case of sudden big hit.

  In addition, in the case of a small hit or sudden probability variation big hit, the production control CPU 101 does not execute the production based on reception of the small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command. Based on the reception of the fluctuation pattern command, an effect that suggests a small hit or suddenly probable big hit may be executed for a predetermined period. In this case, the CPU 101 for effect control switches the process data for performing an effect that suggests a small hit or a sudden probability change big hit every process time, and performs the effect according to the switched process data. When the effect control CPU 101 executes a series of effects suggesting that it is a small hit or suddenly probable big hit based on receiving the variation pattern command for the small hit / suddenly probable big hit, Even if another production control command is received during execution, the production is controlled so as to continue the production suggesting that it is a small hit or suddenly probable big hit without switching the production.

  In step S872, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to display on the effect display device 9 a screen for informing the start of the big hit game.

  FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end effect process (step S806) in the effect control process. In the jackpot end effect process, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the jackpot end effect timer is set (step S880). If the big hit end effect timer is set, the process proceeds to step S885. When the jackpot end effect timer is not set, a jackpot end designation command reception flag (a jackpot end 1 designation command reception flag, a jackpot end 2 designation command reception flag, a small hit / sudden suddenly indicating that a jackpot end designation command has been received) It is confirmed whether or not the probability variation big hit end command reception flag) is set (step S881). When the jackpot end designation command reception flag is set, the jackpot end designation command reception flag (the jackpot end 1 designation command reception flag, the jackpot end 2 designation command reception flag, or the small hit / sudden probability sudden change jackpot termination designation command reception flag) ) Is reset (step S882), a value corresponding to the jackpot end display time is set in the jackpot end effect timer (step S883), and the jackpot end screen (screen for informing the end of the jackpot game) is displayed on the effect display device 9 Is displayed (step S884). Specifically, an instruction to display the big hit end screen is given to the VDP 109.

  In step S885, 1 is subtracted from the value of the big hit end effect timer. Then, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the jackpot end effect timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end effect time has elapsed (step S886). If not, the process ends. When the jackpot end effect time has elapsed, the effect control CPU 101, if set, the continuous notice execution flag (in this embodiment, the first off-line continuous notice execution flag, the first reach continuous flag). The advance notice execution flag or the first big hit continuous advance notice execution flag) and the continuous advance notice interruption flag are reset (step S887). When the process of step S887 is executed, when the change display of the second special symbol is executed in the middle of the continuous notice effect, and the change display result of the second special symbol is a big hit. Is controlled to end the continuous notice effect as it is without continuing the interrupted remaining continuous notice effect.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 resets a predetermined flag (step S888). For example, the effect control CPU 101 resets command reception flags such as a first reserved memory number subtraction designation command reception flag, a second reservation memory number subtraction designation command reception flag, and a display result designation command reception flag. Then, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S892).

  FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the fourth symbol process (step S706) in the main process shown in FIG. In the fourth symbol process, the effect control CPU 101 performs one of steps S900 to S902 according to the value of the fourth symbol process flag. In each process, the following process is executed. In the 4th symbol process, the display state of the 4th symbol display areas 9c and 9d in the effect display device 9 is controlled and variable display of the 4th symbol is realized, but synchronized with the variation of the 1st special symbol. The control related to variable display of the 4th symbol in the 4th symbol display area 9c for the 1st special symbol is also variable in the 4th symbol display area 9d for the 2nd special symbol synchronized with the variation of the 2nd special symbol. Control related to display is also executed in one fourth symbol process. The variable display of the fourth symbol synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol and the variable display of the fourth symbol synchronized with the variation of the second special symbol are executed by another fourth symbol process. May be. Further, in this case, it may be determined which special symbol variation display is being executed depending on which fourth symbol process processing is executing the variation display of the fourth symbol.

  It should be noted that the process for performing the variable display of the 4th symbol is not configured as a process process, but the display control data for the variable display of the 4th symbol is displayed as the 4th symbol as in the special symbol display control process (see FIG. 56). You may make it comprise as a 4th symbol display control process sequentially set to the output buffer for display control data setting. In this case, for example, based on the reception of the reserved memory number subtraction designation command, the display of the fourth symbol variable display is started by updating the display control data for the fourth symbol. Based on the receipt of the confirmation designation command, the display control data for displaying the 4th symbol stop symbol may be set in the output buffer to stop the symbol display. Then, the stop symbol may be stopped and displayed until the next reserved memory number subtraction designation command is received.

  Fourth symbol variation start processing (step S900): Control is performed so that variation of the fourth symbol is started upon reception of a start time command (pending storage number subtraction designation command or display result designation command). Then, the value of the fourth symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the fourth symbol variation processing (step S901).

  The start command is an effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 100 at the start of symbol variation. Specifically, the start command includes a pending storage number subtraction designation command, a variation pattern command, and a display result designation command. The production control CPU 101 may start the variable display of the 4th symbol based on the reception of all the commands, and may have received any one or more of these commands. On the basis of this, the variation display of the fourth symbol may be started.

  Fourth symbol variation process (step S901): Controls the switching timing of the variation state (variation speed) of the fourth symbol. When the symbol confirmation designation command is received, the value of the fourth symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the fourth symbol variation stop process (step S902).

  Production symbol variation stop processing (step S902): Control is performed to stop the variation of the fourth symbol and derive and display the display result (stop symbol). Then, the value of the fourth symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the fourth symbol variation start process (step S900).

  FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing a fourth symbol variation start process (step S900) in the fourth symbol process shown in FIG. In the fourth symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the first reserved storage number subtraction designation command reception flag is set (step S9001). If it is set, the CPU 101 for effect control specifies that the first special symbol variation display is performed based on the reception of the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command, and the first special A process table for variably displaying the 4th symbol in the 4th symbol display area 9c for symbols is selected (step S9002). If the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command reception flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the second reserved memory number subtraction designation command reception flag is set (step S9003). If it is set, the CPU 101 for effect control specifies that the second special symbol is displayed on the basis of receiving the second reserved memory number subtraction designation command, and the second special symbol is displayed. A process table for variably displaying the 4th symbol in the 4th symbol display area 9d for symbols is selected (step S9004).

  If the second reserved memory number subtraction designation command reception flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the display result designation command reception flag is set (step S9005). If set, the CPU 101 for effect control displays a process table for variably displaying the 4th symbol for power failure recovery (in this embodiment, the 4th symbol is displayed in both the 4th symbol display areas 9c and 9d). A process table for variably displaying is selected (step S9006).

  In this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S9001 to S9004, the variable symbol display of the fourth symbol is started based on the reception of the reserved memory number subtraction designation command as the start command. Then, based on the fact that the variable display of the 4th symbol corresponding to the received reserved memory number subtraction designation command in the two 4th symbol display areas 9c and 9d is started and the symbol confirmation designation command is received. Thus, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol corresponding to the reserved memory number subtraction designation command is stopped and displayed until the next variable display is started.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, when the power supply is resumed after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped during the symbol variation by executing the processes of steps S9005 and S9006, the variation symbol of the effect symbol is displayed. Is not resumed, but the variable display of the fourth symbol is controlled so as to be resumed. That is, in this embodiment, when the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed, the display result designation command stored in the backup RAM area is retransmitted (see step S44). Can resume the variable display of the fourth symbol based on the reception of the display result designation command.

  In this embodiment, two special symbol indicators 8a and 8b are provided, and the case where the variation display of the fourth symbol is started based on reception of the reserved memory number subtraction designation command is shown. Similarly, when a variable display of the fourth symbol is performed in a gaming machine having only one special symbol display, the variable display of the fourth symbol is started based on the reception of the reserved memory number subtraction designation command. do it. Further, in this case, the variation display of the fourth symbol may be started based on the reception of the display result designation command as the start command. In the case of a gaming machine equipped with only one special symbol display, the variation display of the fourth symbol may be started based on the reception of the variation pattern command as the start time command. However, even in this case, when the power failure is restored, the variable display of the fourth symbol may be started based on the reception of the display result designation command.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 starts a process timer in the process data 1 of the process table selected in steps S9002, S9004, and S9006 (step S9008).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs control for starting the variable display of the fourth symbol in the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d of the effect display device 9 in accordance with the contents of the process data 1 (step S9009). In this case, when the 4th symbol variation display is started in accordance with the contents of the process data 1 of the process table selected in step S9002, the 4th symbol variation is displayed in the 4th symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. Display starts. For example, in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol, display is started such that a predetermined display color (for example, blue) is repeatedly turned on and off at regular time intervals. In addition, when the variation display of the fourth symbol is started according to the contents of the process data 1 of the process table selected in step S9004, the variation display of the fourth symbol is displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol. Is started. For example, in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol, display is started such that a predetermined display color (for example, blue) is repeatedly turned on and off at regular time intervals. Further, when the variation display of the fourth symbol is started in accordance with the contents of the process data 1 of the process table selected in step S9006, the variation variation of the fourth symbol (power failure is displayed in both the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d). Fluctuation display for recovery) starts. For example, in both the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d, display is started such that display of a predetermined display color (for example, blue) is repeatedly turned on and off at regular time intervals. For example, the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are displayed in a display color such as black so as not to be assimilated with the background screen of the effect display device 9 when the fourth symbol display is blinked. In addition, it is desirable that the display of the 4th symbol is displayed in the black display color when it is not lit in the blue display color.

  In this embodiment, the fourth symbol display area 9c, 9d is displayed in both of the fourth symbol display areas 9c, 9d when the power failure is restored. However, when the power failure is restored, the fourth symbol display areas 9c, 9d are displayed. A display area different from the above may be set, and the 4th symbol variation display may be executed in the separately set display area.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the fourth symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the fourth symbol variation processing (step S901) (step S9010).

  FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the fourth symbol variation processing (step S901) in the fourth symbol process. In the fourth symbol variation processing, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not the stop symbol determined flag indicating that the stop symbol of the fourth symbol has been determined is set (step S9100A). If it has been set (that is, if the stop symbol of the fourth symbol has already been determined), the process proceeds to step S9101 as it is. If the stop symbol determined flag is not set, the CPU 101 for effect control confirms whether or not the display result designation command reception flag is set (step S9100B). If the display result designation command reception flag is set (that is, if the display result designation command is received), the production control CPU 101 stores the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, received) The display result (stop symbol) of the fourth symbol is determined according to the display result designation command) (step S9100C). Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets a stop symbol determined flag (step S9100D).

  In step S9100C, when the received display result designation command indicates a big hit of 15 rounds (probability big hit, normal big hit) (the received display result designation command is a display result 2 designation command or a display result 3 designation command). ), The effect control CPU 101 determines that the display of a predetermined jackpot display color (for example, red) is turned on in the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d as the stop symbol. In addition, when the received display result designation command indicates a hit of 2 rounds (sudden probability change big hit, small hit) (when the received display result designation command is a display result 4 designation command or a display result 5 designation command) ), The effect control CPU 101 determines to turn on the display of a predetermined display color (for example, yellow) for two rounds in the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d as the stop symbol. Note that the stop symbol of the fourth symbol may be different depending on whether suddenly a big hit or a small hit (for example, it is determined that different display colors (for example, yellow and yellow-green) are turned on) In addition, when the received display result designation command indicates a loss (when the received display result designation command is the display result 1 designation command), the effect control CPU 101 uses the first stop symbol as the stop symbol. In the four symbol display areas 9c and 9d, it is determined that the display of the display color for shift (for example, blue) is turned on.

  In step S9100C, the stop symbol corresponding to the received reserved memory number subtraction designation command is determined from the two fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d. For example, when the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command is received, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol is determined, and when the second reserved memory number subtraction designation command is received, the second symbol is designated. The stop symbol of the fourth symbol display area 9d for two special symbols is determined.

  In this embodiment, the case where the fourth symbol is variably displayed with the same display color and variation pattern in the two fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d is shown, but the fourth symbol display for the first special symbol is shown. Different display colors and variation patterns (for example, different lighting) between the case where the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed in the region 9c and the case where the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed in the fourth symbol display region 9d for the second special symbol. Further, the fluctuation display may be executed at a blinking time interval). In addition, when the 4th symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol is displayed in the 4th symbol display area 9c, and when the 4th symbol display area 9d for the 2nd special symbol is displayed in the 4th symbol display area 9d. The stop symbol of the fourth symbol (for example, display color or shape) may be varied.

  In addition, the aspect of the stop symbol of a 4th symbol is not restricted to what was shown in this embodiment. For example, even in the case of 15 round big hits, the display of different display colors is turned on in the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d depending on whether the probability big hit or the normal big hit. Also good. Further, for example, in the case of a probable big hit, the same display color display is turned on in the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d without distinguishing the probable big hit of 15 rounds from the probable big hit of 2 rounds. You may do it.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which separate fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are provided corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively, but the first special symbol and the second special symbol are provided. You may make it provide the 4th symbol display area common with a symbol. In this case, when executing the variation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol, and when executing the variation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol, For example, the display of different display colors at certain time intervals may be performed by distinguishing and executing the variation display of the fourth symbol by performing display that repeatedly turns on and off. In addition, when the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol, and when the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol, for example, The display of the fourth symbol may be distinguished and executed by performing a display that repeatedly turns on and off at different time intervals. In addition, for example, when the stop symbol is derived and displayed corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol, and when the stop symbol is derived and displayed corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol, the same big hit symbol is obtained. However, you may make it stop-display the stop symbol of a different aspect.

  In this embodiment, the case where the stop symbol of the 4th symbol is determined by the 4th symbol changing process is shown. However, for example, when a display result designation command is received in the command analysis processing (in step S617). When it is determined as Y), the same process as in step S9100C may be executed to determine the stop symbol of the fourth symbol.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S9101). When the process timer times out (step S9102), process data is switched. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S9103). Further, in accordance with the contents of the process data set next, control is performed to execute the variation display of the fourth symbol in the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d of the effect display device 9 (step S9104). In this case, when the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed according to the content of the process data of the process table selected in step S9002, the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. Is executed. For example, in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol, display is performed such that a predetermined display color (for example, blue) is repeatedly turned on and off at regular time intervals. Further, when the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed according to the contents of the process data 1 of the process table selected in step S9004, the variation display of the fourth symbol is displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol. Is executed. For example, in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol, display is performed such that a predetermined display color (for example, blue) is repeatedly turned on and off at regular time intervals. Further, when the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in accordance with the contents of the process data 1 of the process table selected in step S9006, the variation display of the fourth symbol (power failure) in both the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d. Fluctuation display for recovery) is executed. For example, the display of a predetermined display color (for example, blue) is repeatedly turned on and off at fixed time intervals in both the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not a confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received is set (step S9105). If set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the confirmation command reception flag (step S9106). Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the fourth symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the fourth symbol variation stop process (step S902) (step S9107).

  Even when the power failure is restored, the symbol determination designation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 when the variable time timer stored in the backup RAM area times out. Therefore, even when the fourth symbol variation display is started based on the reception of the display result designation command at the time of power failure recovery (see steps S9005 and S9006), the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command is confirmed in step S9105. On the basis of this, control is performed to stop the variation display of the fourth symbol.

  Even if the symbol confirmation designation command has not been received, the effect control CPU 101 can set the variation pattern command reception flag, the jackpot start designation command reception flag, or the customer waiting demonstration designation command reception flag. (Steps S9108, S9109, S9110), the process proceeds to step S9107, and the value of the fourth symbol process flag is set to a value corresponding to the fourth symbol variation stop process (step S902).

  In this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S9108 to S9110, even if the symbol confirmation designation command cannot be received, the variation pattern command, jackpot start designation command or customer waiting demonstration designation If the command is received, the change display of the 4th symbol can be stopped. Therefore, the design confirmation designation command is missed, and an unnatural effect such that the variation display of the fourth symbol continues even though the variation display of the special symbol and the effect symbol is finished. Can be prevented.

  FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing a fourth symbol variation stop process (step S902) in the fourth symbol process. In the fourth symbol variation stop process, the effect control CPU 101 first stops and displays the stop symbol determined in step S9100C in the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d (step S9201). For example, in the case of 15 big hits (probability big hit, normal big hit), the display of a predetermined big hit display color (for example, red) is turned on in the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d. In the case of two round hits (sudden probability change big hit, small hit), the display of a predetermined display color (for example, yellow) per two rounds is turned on in the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d. . Further, in the case of a deviation, the display of the display color for deviation (for example, blue) is turned on in the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d.

  It should be noted that the stop symbol of the fourth symbol stopped and displayed in step S9201 is continuously displayed in the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d until the next variable display is started.

  Then, the production control CPU 101 sets the value of the fourth symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the fourth symbol variation start process (step S900) (step S9202).

  Next, a specific example of the variation display mode of the fourth symbol will be described. 85 to 87 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the variation display mode of the fourth symbol. Among these, FIG. 85 shows a mode in which the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol. FIG. 86 shows a mode in which the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol. Moreover, FIG. 87 shows a mode in which the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed when the power failure is recovered.

  First, with reference to FIG. 85, a mode when the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol will be described. The game control microcomputer 560 transmits a first reserved memory number subtraction designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 when starting the variable display of the first special symbol (see step S60A). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 selects process data for the fourth symbol variation display corresponding to the first special symbol based on the reception of the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command (steps S9001 and S9002). 85) As shown in FIG. 85, the variable display of the fourth symbol is started in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. In this case, for example, control is performed to turn on or off the display of a predetermined display color (for example, blue) at regular time intervals in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol (see steps S9009 and S9104). . In this case, as shown in FIG. 85, the effect display device 9 also executes the variable display of the left, middle, and right effect symbols. However, regarding the variation display of the effect symbol, the effect control microcomputer 100 starts the variation display of the effect symbol based on the reception of the variation pattern command, and starts measuring the variation time specified by the variation pattern command. To do.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 when the variation time has elapsed and the variation display of the first special symbol is stopped (see step S127). Then, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command (see step S9105), the production control microcomputer 100 stops and displays the stop symbol of the fourth symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. (Refer to step S9201). In this case, for example, in the case of a deviation, as shown in FIG. 85 (A), the display of a predetermined display color (for example, blue) is displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. It stays lit. For example, in the case of a big hit, as shown in FIG. 85 (B), a display of a predetermined big hit display color (for example, red) is lit in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. It will be in a state as it is. In this case, as shown in FIG. 85, the stop symbol of the effect symbol is also stopped and displayed on the effect display device 9 at the same time. However, regarding the variation display of the production symbol, the production control microcomputer 100 stops the variation display of the production symbol based on the fact that the variation time to be measured has timed out regardless of the design confirmation designation command. Stop the stop symbol.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 86, a mode when the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol will be described. The game control microcomputer 560 transmits a second reserved memory number subtraction designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 when starting the variable display of the second special symbol (see step S60A). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 selects the process data for the fourth symbol variation display corresponding to the second special symbol based on the reception of the second reserved memory number subtraction designation command (steps S9003 and S9004). 86) As shown in FIG. 86, the variable display of the fourth symbol is started in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol. In this case, for example, control is performed to turn on or off the display of a predetermined display color (for example, blue) at regular time intervals in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol (see steps S9009 and S9104). . In this case, as shown in FIG. 86, the effect display device 9 also executes the variable display of the left, middle and right effect symbols.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 when the variation time has elapsed and the variation display of the first special symbol is stopped (see step S127). Then, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command (see step S9105), the production control microcomputer 100 stops and displays the stop symbol of the fourth symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol. (Refer to step S9201). In this case, for example, in the case of a deviation, as shown in FIG. 86 (A), the display of a predetermined display color (for example, blue) is displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol. It stays lit. For example, in the case of a big hit, as shown in FIG. 86 (B), a display of a predetermined big hit display color (for example, red) is turned on in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol. It will be in a state as it is. In this case, as shown in FIG. 86, the stop symbol of the effect symbol is also stopped and displayed on the effect display device 9 at the same time.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 87, the mode when performing the 4th symbol fluctuation display at the time of power failure recovery will be described. When the power supply is resumed after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped during the variable display, the game control microcomputer 560 uses the display result designation command stored in the backup RAM area together with the power failure recovery designation command for effect control. It transmits to the microcomputer 100 (refer step S43, S44). Then, as shown in FIG. 87, the production control microcomputer 100 causes the production display device 9 to display the power failure recovery screen and receives the display result designation command. Process data for display is selected (see steps S9005 and S9006), and as shown in FIG. 87, variable display of the fourth symbol is started in both the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d. In this case, for example, control is performed to turn on or off the display of a predetermined display color (for example, blue) at regular time intervals in both the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d (see steps S9009 and S9104). When the power failure is restored, as shown in FIG. 87, the effect display device 9 does not execute the change display of the left, middle, and right effect symbols.

  Next, when the fluctuation time timer stored in the backup RAM area times out (the fluctuation time has elapsed) and the fluctuation display of the special symbol is stopped, the game control microcomputer 560 sends a symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer. It transmits to the computer 100 (refer step S127). Then, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command (see step S9105), the production control microcomputer 100 stops and displays the stop symbol of the fourth symbol in both the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d (step S9105). (See S9201). In this case, for example, when it is out of place, as shown in FIG. 87 (A), the display of a predetermined display color (for example, blue) is turned on in both the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d. It will remain as it is. Also, for example, in the case of a big hit, as shown in FIG. 87 (B), the display of a predetermined big hit display color (for example, red) remains lit in both the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d. It becomes the state of. When the power failure is restored, the stop symbol of the effect symbol is not stopped and displayed on the effect display device 9 as shown in FIG.

  In the example shown in FIG. 87, the case where the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed in both the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d when the power failure is restored is shown. Of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, It is also possible to display only the stop symbol by performing only the variable display of the fourth symbol in the corresponding fourth symbol display area 9c, 9d.

  Next, the movable aspect of the movable member 78 provided in the effect display device 9 will be described. FIG. 88 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the movable mode of the movable member. For example, in the case of performing a pseudo-series effect or a notice effect, the effect control microcomputer 100 moves the movable member 78 by driving the motor 86 or drives the motor 87 to produce the effect blade accessory 79a. , 79b is performed (see steps S8015 and S8105). In the example shown in FIG. 88, as an example, a case where an effect of moving the movable member 78 is executed when a pseudo-continuous effect is executed is shown.

  In the example shown in FIG. 88, the case where the movable member 78 and the effect blades 79a and 79b are moved in the pseudo-continuous production is shown. 78 and directing blades 79a and 79b may be moved. For example, the movable member 78 and the stage blades 79a and 79b may be moved as a part of the continuous notice effect, and the movable member 78 and the stage blades 79a and 79b may be used as a part of the notice effect other than the continuous notice effect. It may be moved.

  As shown in FIGS. 88 (B) and 88 (E), in this embodiment, the movable member 78 blocks a part of the display area for displaying the effect symbol of the effect display device 9 in the movable state. The symbol display areas 9c and 9d are arranged at positions that are not shielded. Even if it is a case where the movable member 78 becomes movable and a part of the display area of the effect display device 9 is shielded by being arranged in such a manner, at least the display state of the fourth symbol should be confirmed. Thus, it is possible to prevent the current state from being in a state where it cannot be recognized whether or not the variation display is being performed.

  In addition, you may make it produce by providing the movable member which shields the whole instead of shielding a part of display area which displays the effect design of the effect display apparatus 9. FIG. FIG. 89 is an explanatory diagram showing another specific example of the movable mode of the movable member. In the example shown in FIG. 89, for example, the production control microcomputer 100 uses a movable member that simulates the shape of a gate (may be a movable member that simulates the shape of a shutter) during variable display. The display screen is moved from the left and right to produce an effect that covers the entire display area for displaying the design symbol. Even in such a case, as shown in FIG. 89, at least the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d need only be arranged in such a manner that they are not shielded. With such a configuration, at least the display state of the fourth symbol can be confirmed, and it can be prevented that the current state cannot be recognized as to whether or not the current state is being displayed in a variable manner.

  If the control is performed so that the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are not shielded at least during the display of the variation of the fourth symbol, the movable member is moved in a position and manner in which the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d can be shielded. It may be arranged. In this case, for example, the fourth symbol display area 9c, 9d may be shielded by moving the movable member only when the fourth symbol variation display is not being performed, and the fourth symbol variation display is being executed. In this case, the movable member may be prohibited from moving so that the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are not blocked. In addition, when the variation display of the fourth symbol is being executed in any one of the fourth symbol display areas, the other fourth symbol display area which is not executing the variation display may be shielded by the movable member. It doesn't matter. For example, when the variable display of the fourth symbol is being executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol, the variable symbol is being displayed for the fourth symbol display area 9d for the other second special symbol. Since it is not, it may be shielded by a movable member.

  Next, a specific example of the production mode of the continuous notice effect will be described. FIG. 90 to FIG. 93 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of effects of the continuous notice effect. Among these, FIG. 90 shows a specific example of the effect mode of the continuous notice effect of “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation”. FIG. 91 shows a specific example of the effect of the continuous notice effect of “mode shift”. FIG. 92 shows a specific example of the effect mode of the “countdown” continuous notice effect. FIG. 93 shows a specific example of the effect of the continuous notice effect of “reserved ball change”. 90 to 93, the aspect of the effect screen changes in the order of (1) (2) (3). In the example shown in FIGS. 90 to 93, the winning determination is made for the start winning to the first start winning opening 13, and the variation display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol. In this case, a continuous notice effect is shown, but the determination at the time of winning is made for the start winning to the second start winning opening 14, and the change of the effect symbol is synchronized with the change display of the second special symbol. Even when the continuous notice effect is performed while the display is being executed, the continuous notice effect is executed in the same effect manner.

  First, with reference to FIG. 90, a specific example of the effect mode of the continuous notice effect of “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation” will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 90, first, as shown in FIG. 90 (2), when the change display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the change display of the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 90 (1). It is assumed that there is a start prize at the first start prize opening 13. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a winning effect process based on the newly-started winning (see step S209A). Then, a winning determination result designation command corresponding to the winning determination result is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (see step S210A). In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the execution of the continuous notice effect based on the reception of the winning time determination result designation command (see step S6015), and “the time of symbol change” as the effect form of the continuous notice effect. It is assumed that the “change in the fluctuation form” is determined (see step S6018). In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a first reserved memory number addition designation command (see step S210A), and the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the received first hold as shown in FIG. 90 (2). Based on the memory number addition designation command, the display of the first reserved memory number in the first reserved memory display unit 18c is incremented by 1 (see step S653). Then, as shown in FIG. 90 (3), it is assumed that the fluctuation time has ended and the symbols are stopped and displayed (see step S8301). As shown in FIGS. 90 (1) and 90 (2), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is also executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol (step S9009, (See S9104). Then, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, as shown in FIG. 90 (3), the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol (step (See S9201).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command, the variation pattern command, and the display result designation command, and as shown in FIG. 90 (4), the first reserved memory display section 18c. 1 is reduced by 1 (see step S656), and the next effect design variable display is started. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the chance eye symbol as the stop symbol of the effect symbol based on the fact that “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation” is determined as the effect mode of the continuous notice effect. . Then, as shown in FIG. 90 (5), the variation time ends, and the chance symbol is stopped and displayed (see step S8301). Also in the case shown in FIG. 90 (4), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol (see steps S9009 and S9104). . Then, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, as shown in FIG. 90 (5), the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol (step (See S9201).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command, the variation pattern command, and the display result designation command, and, as shown in FIG. 90 (6), the first reserved memory display section 18c. 1 is reduced by 1 (see step S656), and the next effect design variable display is started. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the chance eye symbol as the stop symbol of the effect symbol based on the fact that “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation” is determined as the effect mode of the continuous notice effect. . Further, as shown in FIG. 90 (6), a predetermined effect is performed such as displaying a mode in which a flash shines above the display screen of the effect display device 9 when the effect symbol starts to change (see step S8108). 90 is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 90. For example, a movable member (for example, a character or the like) provided above, below, or on the side of the effect display device 9 is used. The movable object having the shape described above may be moved at the start of fluctuation, or a predetermined lamp may be turned on or blinked at the start of fluctuation. Further, for example, the way of starting the change of the design at the start of the change of the effect design may be made different from normal. For example, in the case where the left, middle, and right production symbols usually start to change at the same time, the left, middle, and right production symbols start to change at different timings, or once start to change upward (or downward) As shown in FIG. 5, the fluctuation may be started downward (or upward). Conversely, in FIG. 90 (5), the way of stopping the variation of the symbols may be different from the normal one. For example, the symbols may be stopped in the order of left, right, and middle, but the symbols may be stopped in the order of left, middle, and right.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 90 (7), the effect symbol variation display is executed (see step S8105), and as shown in FIG. 90 (8), the variation time ends and the chance symbol is stopped and displayed ( Step S8301). 90 (6) and (7), the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol during the variation display of the effect symbol (Step S9009). (See S9104). Then, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, as shown in FIG. 90 (8), the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol (step (See S9201).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command, the variation pattern command, and the display result designation command, and as shown in FIG. 90 (9), the first reserved memory display section 18c. 1 is reduced by 1 (see step S656), and the next effect design variable display is started. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the chance eye symbol as the stop symbol of the effect symbol based on the fact that “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation” is determined as the effect mode of the continuous notice effect. . Also, as shown in FIG. 90 (9), a predetermined effect is performed, such as displaying an aspect in which a flash shines above the display screen of the effect display device 9 when the effect symbol starts to change (see step S8108). Also in the case shown in FIG. 90 (9), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol (see steps S9009 and S9104). .

  Thereafter, the continuous notice effect is executed in the same effect manner until the variable display based on the start winning that is the object of the determination at the time of winning is started. Furthermore, the notice effect in the same effect mode may be executed when the variable display based on the start winning that is the target of the determination at the time of winning is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 90, during the execution of the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is also executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol, and the stop symbol of the effect symbol is displayed. When the stop display is performed, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is also stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. Then, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is continuously displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol until the next variable display is started. Therefore, in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol, the variation of the fourth symbol is always displayed, or the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped. This also applies to the case where the continuous notice effect is executed in the effect modes shown in FIGS. Further, when the game state is shifted to the big hit gaming state, the display in the fourth symbol display area may not be performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 91, a specific example of the production mode of the continuous notice effect of “mode shift” will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 91, first, as shown in FIG. 91 (2), when the change display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the change display of the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 91 (1). It is assumed that there is a start prize at the first start prize opening 13. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a winning effect process based on the newly-started winning (see step S209A). Then, a winning determination result designation command corresponding to the winning determination result is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (see step S210A). In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 determines execution of the continuous notice effect based on the reception of the winning determination result designation command (see step S6015) and “mode shift” as the effect form of the continuous notice effect. Is determined (see step S6018). Further, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a first reserved memory number addition designation command (see step S210A), and the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the received first hold as shown in FIG. 91 (2). Based on the memory number addition designation command, the display of the first reserved memory number in the first reserved memory display unit 18c is incremented by 1 (see step S653). Then, as shown in FIG. 91 (3), it is assumed that the fluctuation time has ended and the symbol is stopped and displayed (see step S8301). As shown in FIGS. 91 (1) and 91 (2), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is also executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol (step S9009, (See S9104). Then, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, as shown in FIG. 91 (3), the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol (step (See S9201).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command, the variation pattern command, and the display result designation command, and as shown in FIG. 91 (4), the first reserved memory display section 18c. 1 is reduced by 1 (see step S656), and the next effect design variable display is started. In this case, based on the fact that “mode shift” is determined as the effect mode of the continuous notice effect, the effect control microcomputer 100, during the effect symbol variation display, as shown in FIG. 91 (4), An effect in which another background screen is interrupted from the side of the currently displayed background screen on the display screen of the effect display device 9 and the two background screens overlap each other (for example, a sea background screen and a mountain background) An effect in such a manner that the screen is in contact with the screen is executed (see step S8108). Then, as shown in FIG. 91 (5), the variation time is finished, and an effect of an aspect that is finally pushed back to the original background screen is executed (see step S8108), and the final stop symbol (FIG. 91 ( In 5), the dissociation symbol) is stopped and displayed (see step S8301). Also in the case shown in FIG. 91 (4), the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol during the variation display of the effect symbol (see steps S9009 and S9104). . Then, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol as shown in FIG. (See S9201).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command, the variation pattern command, and the display result designation command, and as shown in FIG. 91 (6), the first reserved memory display section 18c. 1 is reduced by 1 (see step S656), and the next effect design variable display is started. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 is based on the fact that “mode shift” is determined as the effect mode, and the effect display device 9 during the effect symbol variation display as shown in FIG. 91 (6). In the display screen, the effect is such that another background screen is interrupted from the side of the currently displayed background screen and the two background screens overlap each other (for example, the sea background screen and the mountain background screen are An effect of such a mode is executed (see step S8108). Then, as shown in FIG. 91 (7), the variation time is finished, and an effect of an aspect that is finally pushed back to the original background screen is executed (see step S8108), and the final stop symbol (FIG. 91 ( In step 7), the dissociation symbol) is stopped and displayed (see step S8301). Also in the case shown in FIG. 91 (6), the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol during the variation display of the effect symbol (see steps S9009 and S9104). . Then, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol as shown in FIG. (See S9201).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command, the variation pattern command, and the display result designation command, and as shown in FIG. 91 (8), the first reserved memory display section 18c. 1 is reduced by 1 (see step S656), and the next effect design variable display is started. In this case, based on the fact that “mode shift” is determined as the effect mode, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the effect display device 9 during the effect symbol variation display as shown in FIG. 91 (8). In the display screen, the effect is such that another background screen is interrupted from the side of the currently displayed background screen and the two background screens overlap each other (for example, the sea background screen and the mountain background screen are An effect of such a mode is executed (see step S8108). Then, as shown in FIG. 91 (9), the variation time is finished, and an effect that is finally pushed back to the original background screen is executed (see step S8108), and the final stop symbol (FIG. 91 (FIG. 91)). In 9), the off symbol) is stopped and displayed (see step S8301). Also in the case shown in FIG. 91 (8), the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol during the variation display of the effect symbol (see steps S9009 and S9104). . Then, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol as shown in FIG. (See S9201).

  In the above-described manner, the continuous notice effect is executed in the same effect manner until the variable display based on the start winning that is the object of the determination at the time of winning is started. Furthermore, the notice effect in the same effect mode may be executed when the variable display based on the start winning that is the target of the determination at the time of winning is executed. In this case, when the display result of the variable display based on the start winning that is the target of the determination at the time of winning is “big hit”, for example, after performing the effect in such a manner that the two background screens overlap each other, Alternatively, the background screen that has interrupted from the side wins and the background screen is switched, and the jackpot symbol may be stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol. In addition, the mode of the continuous notice effect of “mode transition” is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. You may make it perform the effect of the aspect from which a background screen changes for every display.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 92, a specific example of the production mode of the “countdown” continuous notice effect will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 92, first, as shown in FIG. 92 (2), when the variation display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 92 (1). It is assumed that there is a start prize at the first start prize opening 13. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a winning effect process based on the newly-started winning (see step S209A). Then, a winning determination result designation command corresponding to the winning determination result is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (see step S210A). In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the execution of the continuous notice effect based on the reception of the winning determination result designation command (see step S6015) and sets “countdown” as the effect form of the continuous notice effect. It is assumed that it has been determined (see step S6018). Further, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a first reserved memory number addition designation command (see step S210A), and the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the received first hold as shown in FIG. 92 (2). Based on the memory number addition designation command, the display of the first reserved memory number in the first reserved memory display unit 18c is incremented by 1 (see step S653). Then, as shown in FIG. 92 (3), it is assumed that the fluctuation time has ended and the symbols are stopped and displayed (see step S8301). As shown in FIGS. 92 (1) and 92 (2), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is also executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol (step S9009, (See S9104). Then, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, as shown in FIG. 92 (3), the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol (step (See S9201).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command, the variation pattern command, and the display result designation command, and as shown in FIG. 92 (4), the first reserved memory display section 18c. 1 is reduced by 1 (see step S656), and the next effect design variable display is started. In this case, based on the fact that “countdown” is determined as the effect mode of the continuous notice effect, the effect control microcomputer 100 displays the effect during the effect symbol variation display as shown in FIG. 92 (4). A character string such as “Count 3!” Is displayed on the display screen of the display device 9 and an effect is performed as if the countdown was started (see step S8108). Then, after the variation time is over, as shown in FIG. 92 (5), the final stop symbol (the symbol that is off in FIG. 92 (5)) is stopped and displayed (see step S8301). In the case shown in FIG. 92 (4), the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol during the variation display of the effect symbol (see steps S9009 and S9104). . Based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, as shown in FIG. 92 (5), the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol (step (See S9201).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command, the fluctuation pattern command, and the display result designation command, and, as shown in FIG. 92 (6), the first reserved memory display section 18c. 1 is reduced by 1 (see step S656), and the next effect design variable display is started. In this case, based on the fact that “countdown” is determined as the effect mode, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the effect display device 9 during the effect symbol variation display as shown in FIG. 92 (6). On the display screen, a character string such as “Count 2!” Is displayed, and the effect of the aspect of continuously counting down is executed (see step S8108). Then, after the variation time is over, as shown in FIG. 92 (7), the final stop symbol (the symbol that is off in FIG. 92 (7)) is stopped and displayed (see step S8301). Also in the case shown in FIG. 92 (6), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol (see steps S9009 and S9104). . Then, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol as shown in FIG. (See S9201).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command, the variation pattern command, and the display result designation command, and as shown in FIG. 92 (8), the first reserved memory display section 18c. 1 is reduced by 1 (see step S656), and the next effect design variable display is started. In this case, based on the fact that “countdown” is determined as the effect mode, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the effect display device 9 during the effect symbol display as shown in FIG. 92 (8). On the display screen, a character string such as “Count 1!” Is displayed, and the effect of the aspect of continuously counting down is executed (see Step S8108). Then, after the variation time is over, as shown in FIG. 92 (9), the final stop symbol (the symbol that is off in FIG. 92 (9)) is stopped and displayed (see step S8301). Also in the case shown in FIG. 92 (8), the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol during the variation display of the effect symbol (see steps S9009 and S9104). . Then, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, as shown in FIG. 92 (9), the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol (step (See S9201).

  In the above-described manner, the continuous notice effect is executed in the same effect manner until the variable display based on the start winning that is the object of the determination at the time of winning is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 93, a specific example of the effect mode of the continuous notice effect of “reserved ball change” will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 93, first, as shown in FIG. 93 (2), when the change display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the change display of the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 93 (1). It is assumed that there is a start prize at the first start prize opening 13. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a winning effect process based on the newly-started winning (see step S209A). Then, a winning determination result designation command corresponding to the winning determination result is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (see step S210A). In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the execution of the continuous notice effect based on the reception of the winning determination result designation command (see step S6015), and “the change of the holding ball changes” as the effect form of the continuous notice effect. "Is determined (see step S6018). In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a first reserved memory number addition designation command (see step S210A), and the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the received first hold as shown in FIG. 93 (2). Based on the memory number addition designation command, the display of the first reserved memory number in the first reserved memory display unit 18c is incremented by 1 (see step S653). Then, as shown in FIG. 93 (3), it is assumed that the fluctuation time has ended and the symbols are stopped and displayed (see step S8301). As shown in FIGS. 93 (1) and 93 (2), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is also executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol (step S9009, (See S9104). Then, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol as shown in FIG. (See S9201).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command, the variation pattern command, and the display result designation command, and as shown in FIG. 93 (4), the first reserved memory display section 18c. 1 is reduced by 1 (see step S656), and the next effect design variable display is started. In this case, as shown in FIG. 93 (4), the production control microcomputer 100 displays the variation of the production symbol based on the fact that “reserved ball change” is determined as the production mode of the continuous notice production. Then, the display of the first reserved memory number that is the target of the determination at the time of winning in the first reserved memory display unit 18c is changed to a display different from the normal display (star display in the example shown in FIG. 93 (4)) ( Step S8108). In the example shown in FIG. 93, after the determination at the time of winning is made, the case where the continuous notice effect of the effect mode of “reserved ball change” is started from the time of the next start of variation display is shown. When the determination result designation command is received (at the timing when the start winning is generated), the display of the first reserved memory number that is the target of the determination at the time of winning is changed to a display different from the normal display and the continuous notice effect is performed. You may make it start. Then, after the variation time is over, as shown in FIG. 93 (5), the final stop symbol (disconnected symbol in FIG. 93 (5)) is stopped and displayed (see step S8301). In addition, as shown in FIG. 93 (5), the display of the first reserved memory number that is the object of the determination at the time of winning in the first reserved memory display unit 18c is continuously displayed in a mode different from normal (FIG. 93). 93 (5), star display). Also in the case shown in FIG. 93 (4), the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol during the variation display of the effect symbol (see steps S9009 and S9104). . Then, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol as shown in FIG. (See S9201).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command, the variation pattern command, and the display result designation command, and as shown in FIG. 93 (6), the first reserved memory display section 18c. 1 is reduced by 1 (see step S656), and the next effect design variable display is started. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 determines that the first hold is performed during the variation display of the production symbol, as shown in FIG. 93 (6), based on the fact that “holding ball change” is determined as the production mode. In the memory display unit 18c, the display of the first reserved memory number that is the object of the determination at the time of winning is continued to be displayed in a different form (star display in the example shown in FIG. 93 (6)) (see step S8108). . Then, after the variation time is over, as shown in FIG. 93 (7), the final stop symbol (the dismissed symbol in FIG. 93 (7)) is stopped and displayed (see step S8301). Note that, as shown in FIG. 93 (7), the display of the first reserved memory number that is the object of the determination at the time of winning in the first reserved memory display unit 18c is continuously displayed in a different form (FIG. 93). 93 (7) is a star display). Also in the case shown in FIG. 93 (6), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol (see steps S9009 and S9104). . Then, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, as shown in FIG. 93 (7), the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol (step (See S9201).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command, the variation pattern command, and the display result designation command, and as shown in FIG. 93 (8), the first reserved memory display section 18c. 1 is reduced by 1 (see step S656), and the next effect design variable display is started. In this case, based on the fact that the “pending ball change” is determined as the effect mode, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the first hold during the effect symbol variation display as shown in FIG. 93 (8). In the memory display unit 18c, the display of the first reserved memory number that is the object of the determination at the time of winning is continued to be displayed in a different form (star display in the example shown in FIG. 93 (8)) (see step S8108). . Then, after the variation time is over, as shown in FIG. 93 (9), the final stop symbol (the symbol that is off in FIG. 93 (9)) is stopped and displayed (see step S8301). In addition, as shown in FIG. 93 (9), the display of the first reserved memory number that is the object of the determination at the time of winning in the first reserved memory display unit 18c is continuously displayed in a different form (FIG. 93). 93 (9) is a star display). Also in the case shown in FIG. 93 (8), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol (see steps S9009 and S9104). . Then, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, as shown in FIG. 93 (9), the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol (step (See S9201).

  In the above-described manner, the continuous notice effect is executed in the same effect manner until the variable display based on the start winning that is the object of the determination at the time of winning is started.

  Further, in this embodiment, a variation pattern with pseudo-continuations as the variation pattern (non-reach PA1-4, normal PB2-1, normal PB2-2, super PA3-1, super PA3-2, normal PB2 shown in FIG. 31). -3, normal PB2-4, super PA3-3, super PA3-4, and special PG1-3) are determined, a pseudo-series effect may be executed during the variation display of the effect symbol. FIG. 94 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a pseudo-continuous rendering mode. In addition, in FIG. 94, the aspect of an effect screen changes in order of (1) (2) (3) .... In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 94, a case is shown in which pseudo-continuation is performed when the variation display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol, but the variation display of the second special symbol is performed. In the case where the pseudo-run is performed when the effect symbol variation display is executed in synchronization with the pseudo-run, the pseudo-run is executed in the same effect mode.

  In the example shown in FIG. 94, first, as shown in FIG. 94 (2), when the change display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the change display of the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 94 (1). It is assumed that there is a start prize at the first start prize opening 13. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a first reserved memory number addition designation command based on the newly received start prize (see step S210A). Further, as shown in FIG. 94 (2), the production control microcomputer 100 displays the first reserved memory number on the first reserved memory display unit 18c based on the received first reserved memory number addition designation command. Increase by 1 (see step S653). Then, as shown in FIG. 94 (3), it is assumed that the fluctuation time has ended and the symbol is stopped and displayed (see step S8301). As shown in FIGS. 94 (1) and (2), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is also executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol (step S9009, (See S9104). Then, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol as shown in FIG. (See S9201).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command, the variation pattern command, and the display result designation command, and as shown in FIG. 94 (4), the first reserved memory display section 18c. 1 is reduced by 1 (see step S656), and the next effect design variable display is started. In this case, it is assumed that the production control microcomputer 100 has received a variation pattern command for designating a variation pattern with a pseudo-ream. Further, the production control microcomputer 100 determines a chance symbol as a temporary stop symbol of the production symbol based on the reception of the variation pattern command that designates the variation pattern accompanied by the pseudo-ream. Then, as shown in FIG. 94 (5), when the temporary stop timing of the temporary stop symbol comes, the chance symbol is temporarily stopped. Also in the case shown in FIG. 94 (4), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol (see steps S9009 and S9104). . In FIG. 94 (5), since the variation is not stopped, the variation display of the fourth symbol is continued in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol without stopping the suspension symbol. Is executed (see steps S9009 and S9104).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 starts re-variation of the production symbol as shown in FIG. 94 (6). In this case, as shown in FIG. 94 (6), a predetermined effect is performed, for example, a display in which a flash is lit above the display screen of the effect display device 9 at the start of re-variation of the effect symbol. Note that the predetermined effect performed at the start of re-variation is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 94, for example, imitating a movable member (for example, a character or the like) provided above, below or on the side of the effect display device 9. A movable object having a shape) may be moved at the start of re-variation, or a predetermined lamp may be turned on or blinked at the start of re-variation. Further, for example, the way of starting the variation of the symbol at the start of re-variation may be different from the normal one. For example, in the case where the left, middle, and right production symbols usually start to change at the same time, the left, middle, and right production symbols start to change at different timings, or once start to change upward (or downward) As shown in FIG. 5, the fluctuation may be started downward (or upward). Conversely, in FIG. 94 (5), the way of temporarily stopping the fluctuation of the symbols may be different from the normal one. For example, the symbols may be temporarily stopped in the order of left, right, and middle, but the symbols may be temporarily stopped in the order of left, middle, and right. In addition, since it is not a case where a new fluctuation | variation is started, as shown in FIG. 94 (6), the display of the 1st reservation memory number in the 1st reservation memory display part 18c does not change.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 94 (7), the effect symbol variation display is executed (see step S8105), and when the temporary stop timing of the next temporary stop symbol is reached as shown in FIG. The symbol is displayed temporarily. In addition, since the variation is not stopped, the variation display of the fourth symbol is continuously executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol without stopping the suspension symbol (step S9009). , S9104).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 starts re-variation of the production symbol as shown in FIG. 94 (9). In this case, as shown in FIG. 94 (9), a predetermined effect is performed, for example, a display in which a flash is lit above the display screen of the effect display device 9 at the start of re-variation of the effect symbol.

  The pseudo-continuous effect is executed by repeatedly executing the temporary stop display and re-variation of the chance symbol in the above manner. As described above, in this embodiment, the continuous notice effect of “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation” shown in FIG. 90 and the pseudo-continuous effect shown in FIG. 94 are executed in a common effect mode. Therefore, even if the same aspect of the effect is executed, the player can be given a sense of expectation that it may be a continuous notice effect or may be a pseudo-ream, and the interest in the game can be improved. it can.

  Next, the execution timing of the continuous notice effect will be described. FIG. 95 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution timing of the continuous notice effect. In the example shown in FIG. 95, a case where a new start winning is generated during the variation display of the special symbol and the effect symbol is shown. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 95, the case where the continuous notice effect of “the change of the fluctuation pattern at the time of symbol change” is executed is shown as an example, but the execution when the continuous notice effect of another effect form is executed is shown. The timing is the same.

  When the game control microcomputer 560 detects a new start winning to the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 (see Steps S311 and S313), the winning effect processing (see Steps S209A and S209B) is performed. Execute and determine when winning. In the example shown in FIG. 95, it is assumed that there is a new start prize in the effect symbol variation display A, and the determination at the time of winning is made. In addition, when a new start winning is detected in the first start winning opening 13, it is not in the high base state (probability change state or short time state) but in the big hit gaming state (see Steps S207A and S208A). Then, the winning time effect process is executed to determine the winning time. Then, based on the determination result of the winning determination, a winning determination result designation command and a reserved memory number addition designation command (first reserved memory number addition designation command or second reserved memory number addition designation command) are transmitted (step S210A, (See S210B).

  The production control microcomputer 100 adds 1 to the reserved memory number (the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number) based on the reception of the reserved memory number addition designation command (steps S651, S652, S654, S655). reference). In the example shown in FIG. 95, it is assumed that the pending storage number before receiving the winning determination result designation command and the pending memory number addition designation command is 3, and the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the pending memory count addition designation command. Based on the reception, the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory number storage area (the first reserved memory number storage area or the second reserved memory number storage area) is incremented by 1 to 4. Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes a continuous notice effect determination process based on the received winning determination result designation command (see step S800A), and a continuous notice effect mode determination process (see step S6018). It is assumed that “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation” is determined as the production mode. Further, the production control microcomputer 100 sets the current number of reserved memories (“4” in the example shown in FIG. 95) in the variation counter (see step S6020). Thereafter, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display A ends, the value of the fluctuation number counter is decremented by 1 to 3 (see step S8306).

  Next, upon receiving a reserved memory number subtraction designation command (first reserved memory number subtraction designation command or second pending memory number subtraction designation command), a fluctuation pattern command, and a display result designation command, the next fluctuation display B is started. . In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the effect symbol based on the fact that “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation” is determined as the effect mode of the continuous notice effect in the continuous notice effect mode determination process (see step S6018). It is assumed that the chance eye symbol is determined as the stop symbol of. Then, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display B ends, and the chance symbol a is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 95 (see step S8301). Further, the production control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the variation counter and sets it to 2 (see step S8306). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 95, when a new start prize is generated during the fluctuation display A and it is decided to execute the continuous warning effect, the continuous warning effect is started from the next fluctuation display B. Is started, but the continuous notice effect is immediately started from the fluctuation display A being executed (for example, the chance symbol design is stopped and displayed when the fluctuation display A is stopped). It may be.

  Further, when starting the next variation display C, the production control microcomputer 100, based on the fact that the variation counter value is 2, as shown in FIG. The continuous notice effect is continuously executed by performing a predetermined effect b (see step S8108), such as displaying a mode in which a flash shines above the 9 display screen. Then, the variation time of the variation display C ends, and the chance symbol b is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 95 (see step S8301). Further, the production control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the variation counter and sets it to 1 (see step S8306).

  Further, when starting the next variation display D, the effect control microcomputer 100, based on the fact that the value of the variation counter is 1, as shown in FIG. The continuous notice effect is continuously executed by performing the predetermined effect c (see step S8108), such as displaying an aspect in which the flash shines above the 9 display screen. Then, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display D ends, and the chance symbol c is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 95 (see step S8301). Further, the production control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the variation counter and sets it to 0 (see step S8306). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 resets the continuous advance notice execution flag that has been set based on the fact that the value of the variation counter has become 0 (see steps S8307 and S8308), and performs the continuous advance notice effect. finish.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 95, a case where a continuous notice effect is performed during the variation display up to the variation display D immediately before the variation display E subjected to the determination at the time of winning is shown. However, the continuous notice effect may be executed even during the variation display E that is the target of the determination at the time of winning. In this embodiment, since the continuous notice effect is not executed in the variation display E that is the object of determination at the time of winning, the continuous notice effect and the super reach effect are included in one variation display E. Both are executed to prevent the production from becoming too unnatural (especially, the production is surely prevented from becoming too busy just before the end of the variable display). In addition, in the case where the continuous notice effect is executed even during the variable display E that is the target of the determination at the time of winning, the continuous notice effect is executed before the super reach effect in the variable display E is executed. It is only necessary to execute the super reach effect after the notice effect is finished.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state (low base state), the frequency of the variable winning ball device 15 is extremely low, and the gaming state is the probability change state or the short time state (high base state). ), The frequency with which the variable winning ball apparatus is opened is increased. For this reason, when the gaming state is the normal state, it is rare for the game ball to start winning a prize at the second start winning opening 14, and the first special symbol variation display is mainly executed continuously. In addition, when the gaming state is a probable change state or a short time state, the frequency at which the game ball starts and wins at the second start winning opening 14 is increased, and the variation display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed. Mainly, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed continuously. However, even if the game state is the normal state, the game ball may start and win at the second start winning port 14 at a low frequency, and the variation display of the second special symbol may be executed. In this case, if there is a start prize for the second start prize opening 14 during the execution of the continuous notice effect based on the determination result at the time of winning for the start prize to the first start prize opening 13, the middle of the continuous notice effect is given. Then, the change display of the second special symbol is interrupted. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the change display of the second special symbol interrupts during the continuous notice effect, the continuous notice effect is controlled to be interrupted.

  Hereinafter, the production timing when the continuous notice production is interrupted will be described. 96 and 97 are explanatory diagrams showing the production timing when the continuous notice production is interrupted. Among these, FIG. 96 shows the continuous notice effect that is executed based on the determination of “super reach out” or “super reach big hit” in the determination at the time of winning with respect to the start winning to the first starting winning opening 13. The production timing in the case of interruption is shown. In addition, FIG. 97 shows the production timing in the case of interrupting the continuous notice production that is executed based on the fact that it is judged as “non-reach” in the prize determination for the start winning to the first start winning opening 13. Show.

  In the example shown in FIG. 96 and FIG. 97, as an example, the case of executing the continuous notice effect of “change in the variation form at the time of symbol change” is shown, but the continuous notice effect of another effect form is executed. The production timing in this case is also the same. In the example shown in FIGS. 96 and 97, it is assumed that the start winning to the second start winning port 14 during the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined as non-reach or out of reach as a variable display result.

  First, referring to FIG. 96, the continuous advance notice is executed based on the determination of “super-reaching loss” or “super-reaching big hit” in the determination at the time of winning with respect to the starting winning at the first starting winning opening 13. The production timing when the production is interrupted will be described.

  When the game control microcomputer 560 detects a new start winning for the first start winning opening 13 (see step S311), it performs a winning effect process (see step S209A) and makes a determination at the time of winning. In the example shown in FIG. 96, it is assumed that there is a new start prize in the effect symbol variation display A, and the determination at the time of winning is made. When it is determined that “super reach loss” or “super reach big hit” is reached, a winning determination result designation command and a first reserved memory number addition designation command are transmitted (see step S210A).

  The production control microcomputer 100 adds 1 to the first reserved memory number based on the reception of the first reserved memory number addition designation command (see steps S651 and S652). In the example shown in FIG. 96, it is assumed that the number of reserved memories before receiving the winning determination result designation command and the first reserved memory number addition designation command is 3, and the effect control microcomputer 100 uses the first reserved memory number. Based on the reception of the addition designation command, the reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is incremented by 1 to be 4. Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes a continuous notice effect determination process based on the received winning determination result designation command (see step S800A), and a continuous notice effect mode determination process (see step S6018). It is assumed that “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation” is determined as the production mode. In addition, the production control microcomputer 100 sets the current reserved memory number (“4” in the example shown in FIG. 96) in the variation counter (see step S6020). Thereafter, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display A ends, the value of the fluctuation number counter is decremented by 1 to 3 (see step S8306).

  Next, the first pending storage number subtraction designation command, fluctuation pattern command, and display result designation command are received, and the next fluctuation display B is started. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the effect symbol based on the fact that “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation” is determined as the effect mode of the continuous notice effect in the continuous notice effect mode determination process (see step S6018). It is assumed that the chance eye symbol is determined as the stop symbol of. Then, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display B ends, and the chance symbol a is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 96 (see step S8301).

  Further, when the next variation display C is started, the effect control microcomputer 100 has a mode in which a flash shines above the display screen of the effect display device 9 at the start of the effect symbol change, as shown in FIG. By performing the predetermined effect b such as displaying (see step S8108), the continuous notice effect is continuously executed. Then, the variation time of the variation display C ends, and the chance symbol b is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 96 (see step S8301).

  Here, as shown in FIG. 96, it is assumed that a start winning to the second start winning opening 14 occurs during execution of the continuous notice effect (during execution of the fluctuation display C). In such a case, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 96, the change display f of the second special symbol is preferentially executed. Therefore, if the second special symbol variation display f is executed even during execution of the continuous notice effect, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets the continuous notice suspension flag as shown in FIG. Then, control is performed so that the continuous notice effect is interrupted (see steps S8003 and S8004). If the production control microcomputer 100 performs the production symbol variation display F in synchronization with the variation display f of the second special symbol during the interruption of the continuous announcement effect, the other during the variation display F Is controlled not to be executed (see Y in step S8011).

  When the variation display f of the second special symbol is finished and the state returns to the state where the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the continuous notice interruption flag is reset (see step S8006), as shown in FIG. The remaining continuous notice effects will be resumed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 96, when the effect symbol variation display D is started in synchronism with the next variation display of the first special symbol, the flash shines above the display screen of the effect display device 9. By performing the predetermined effect c such as displaying such a mode (see step S8108), the continuous notice effect is resumed. Then, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display D ends, and the chance symbol c is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 96 (see step S8301).

  Next, referring to FIG. 97, in the case of interrupting the continuous notice effect that is executed based on the fact that it is determined that “non-reach” is detected in the determination at the time of winning for the starting winning to the first starting winning opening 13 The production timing will be described.

  When the game control microcomputer 560 detects a new start winning for the first start winning opening 13 (see step S311), it performs a winning effect process (see step S209A) and makes a determination at the time of winning. In the example shown in FIG. 97, it is assumed that there is a new start prize in the change display A of the effect symbol and the determination at the time of winning is made. Then, if it is determined that “non-reach” is detected, a winning determination result designation command and a first reserved memory number addition designation command are transmitted (see step S210A).

  The production control microcomputer 100 adds 1 to the first reserved memory number based on the reception of the first reserved memory number addition designation command (see steps S651 and S652). In the example shown in FIG. 97, it is assumed that the number of reserved memories before receiving the winning determination result designation command and the first reserved memory number addition designation command is 3, and the effect control microcomputer 100 uses the first reserved memory number. Based on the reception of the addition designation command, the reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is incremented by 1 to be 4. Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes a continuous notice effect determination process based on the received winning determination result designation command (see step S800A), and a continuous notice effect mode determination process (see step S6018). It is assumed that “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation” is determined as the production mode. In addition, the production control microcomputer 100 sets the current reserved memory number (“4” in the example shown in FIG. 97) in the variation counter (see step S6020). Thereafter, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display A ends, the value of the fluctuation number counter is decremented by 1 to 3 (see step S8306).

  Next, the first pending storage number subtraction designation command, fluctuation pattern command, and display result designation command are received, and the next fluctuation display B is started. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the effect symbol based on the fact that “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation” is determined as the effect mode of the continuous notice effect in the continuous notice effect mode determination process (see step S6018). It is assumed that the chance eye symbol is determined as the stop symbol of. Then, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display B ends, and the chance symbol a is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 97 (see step S8301).

  Further, when the next variation display C is started, the effect control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 97, has a mode in which a flash shines above the display screen of the effect display device 9 when the effect symbol variation starts. By performing the predetermined effect b such as displaying (see step S8108), the continuous notice effect is continuously executed. Then, the variation time of the variation display C ends, and the chance symbol b is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 97 (see step S8301).

  Here, as shown in FIG. 97, it is assumed that a start winning to the second start winning opening 14 occurs during execution of the continuous notice effect (during execution of the fluctuation display C). In such a case, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 97, the fluctuation display f of the second special symbol is preferentially executed. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 100 sets the continuous notice interruption flag as shown in FIG. 97 when the change display f of the second special symbol is executed even while the continuous notice effect is being executed. Then, control is performed so that the continuous notice effect is interrupted (see steps S8003 and S8004). If the production control microcomputer 100 performs the production symbol variation display F in synchronization with the variation display f of the second special symbol during the interruption of the continuous announcement effect, the other during the variation display F Is controlled not to be executed (see Y in step S8011).

  Then, when the fluctuation display f of the second special symbol is finished and the state returns to the state where the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is executed, the continuous notice interruption flag is reset (see step S8006), and the first deviation is continuously continued. The advance notice flag is reset (see steps S8007 and S8008), and the continuous notice effect is controlled to end. That is, if the determination result that is the reason for executing the continuous notice effect is “non-reach”, as shown in FIG. Even if is finished, the continuous notice effect is controlled to be finished as it is without resuming the continuous notice effect in the next effect symbol variation display D.

  Next, the effect timing of the effect symbol variation display and the fourth symbol variation display will be described. In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 sets the fluctuation time timer based on the fluctuation time specified by the received fluctuation pattern command for the fluctuation display of the production symbol, and until the fluctuation time timer times out. Perform variation display of production symbols. On the other hand, for the variation display of the fourth symbol, the variation time is not measured, and the variation display of the fourth symbol is stopped and the stop symbol is stopped based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command. Control. By controlling in such a manner, with respect to the fourth symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol can be stopped and the stopped symbol can be confirmed and displayed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. On the other hand, the variation display of the production symbol is accompanied by various productions such as a specific production such as a pseudo-ream and a sliding production, and various notice productions. If the production is stopped based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command when the production is being executed, the production may end in a state where the production is interrupted. there is a possibility. In addition, for example, when the selected effect is executed by recognizing the fluctuation time shortly, if the stop symbol is fixedly displayed after waiting until the symbol confirmation designation command is received, the variable display There is a possibility that there will be a time lapse from the end of the production until the stop symbol is confirmed and displayed, and the production will be delayed, resulting in an unnatural production. Therefore, in this embodiment, the variation display of the effect symbol includes the variation display of the effect symbol based on the fact that the variation time recognized on the effect control microcomputer 100 side has passed, regardless of the symbol confirmation designation command. By controlling the production to end, a situation where the production ends in an unnatural state is prevented. In addition, it is possible to prevent an unnecessary processing load such as fluctuation of the effect symbol until the symbol confirmation designation command is received.

  FIGS. 98 to 100 are explanatory diagrams showing the effect timings of the effect symbol variation display and the fourth symbol variation display. Of these, FIG. 98 shows the effect timing when the fluctuation control time is mistakenly recognized on the effect control microcomputer side. FIG. 99 shows the production timing when the production control microcomputer erroneously recognizes the fluctuation time for a long time, and the next production is not started immediately after the special symbol fluctuation display ends. Yes. FIG. 100 shows the production timing when the production control microcomputer erroneously recognizes the fluctuation time for a long time and the next production starts immediately after the special symbol fluctuation display ends. ing.

  When the special symbol variation display is started, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the reserved memory count subtraction designation command, the variation pattern command, and the display result designation command, and starts the variation display. When starting the variable display, the production control microcomputer 100 sets the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer for the fluctuation display of the production symbol (see step S8016), and measures the fluctuation time. To start. In addition, regarding the variation display of the 4th symbol, the start time command (the reserved memory number subtraction designation command. If only one special symbol display is provided, it may be the display result designation command). Based on this, the variable display of the 4th symbol is started.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a symbol confirmation designation command when the variation time has elapsed and the variation display of the special symbol is terminated (see step S127). Then, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command (see step S9105), the production control microcomputer 100 ends the fourth symbol variation display and stops displaying the fourth symbol stop symbol (see step S9201). ). By controlling in such a manner, with respect to the fourth symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol can be stopped and the stop symbol can be stopped and displayed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  On the other hand, the production control microcomputer 100 stops the production symbol variation display for the variation display of the production symbol based on the fact that the measured variation time timer has timed out (see step S8109). The symbol is stopped and displayed (see step S8301).

  Here, since the variation time grasped on the game control microcomputer 560 side and the variation time grasped on the effect control microcomputer 100 side are the same habit, the effect design usually also includes special symbols. In synchronization with the change display, the change display of the effect symbol is stopped and the stop symbol is stopped and displayed. However, when a problem such as garbled data of the variation pattern command occurs, there is a possibility that the variation time is erroneously recognized on the production control microcomputer 100 side. In this case, for example, when the variation time is mistakenly recognized, the variation display of the special symbol or the fourth symbol is terminated based on the fact that the variation time timer has timed out as shown in FIG. Before, the variation display of the effect symbol is finished, and the stop symbol is stopped and displayed. Also, for example, when the fluctuation time is mistakenly recognized long and the next effect is not started immediately after the special symbol fluctuation display ends, the fluctuation time timer times out as shown in FIG. Based on the above, after the variation display of the special symbol and the fourth symbol is completed, the variation display of the effect symbol is terminated, and the stop symbol is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, for example, when the variation time is mistakenly recognized long and the next effect is started immediately after the variation display of the special symbol is finished, as shown in FIG. Even before the time-out, an effect control command for specifying the next effect (in the example shown in FIG. 100, a variation pattern command; the same applies to the jackpot start specification command and the customer waiting demo specification command). Based on the reception, the variation display of the effect symbols is terminated (see steps S614 to S614B, S621 to S621B, S623 to S623B, and S663 to S663C), and the process shifts to the effect specified by the received effect control command.

  Next, the operation timing of the random number circuit 509 will be described. FIG. 101 is a timing chart for explaining the operation of the random number circuit 509. Further, FIG. 101A shows a control clock CCLK generated by the control clock generation circuit 111 mounted on the main board 31. FIG. 101B shows the random number clock RCLK generated by the random number clock generation circuit 112. Note that the various signals shown in FIG. 101 are negative logic signals that are turned off at a high level and turned on at a low level. As shown in FIGS. 101A and 101B, the oscillation frequency of the control clock CCLK and the oscillation frequency of the random number clock RCLK are different from each other. It does not become an integral multiple of the other oscillation frequency.

  As shown in FIG. 101 (B), the random number clock RCLK falls from a high level to a low level at timings T10, T11, T12,. The random number clock RCLK is supplied to the random number external clock terminal ERC of the game control microcomputer 560 and input to the clock terminal CK in the clock flip-flop 552 provided in the random number circuit 509 shown in FIG. The clock flip-flop 552 responds to the falling edge of the random number clock RCLK input to the clock terminal CK with the latch clock RC0 fed back from the negative phase output terminal (inverted output terminal) Q bar to the D input terminal. Then, it is taken in (latched) and outputted as a random number update clock RGK from the positive phase output terminal (non-inverted output terminal) Q. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 101 (C), the random number update clock RGK falls from the high level to the low level at the timings T10, T12, T14,..., And is ½ of the oscillation frequency of the random number clock RCLK. The signal has an oscillation frequency of. For example, if the oscillation frequency of the random number clock RCLK is 20 MHz, the oscillation frequency of the random number update clock RGK is 10 MHz. Since the oscillation frequency of the random number clock RCLK is neither an integer multiple nor a fraction of the oscillation frequency of the control clock CCLK, the oscillation frequency of the random number update clock RGK is the oscillation frequency of the control clock CCLK. Different frequency. The random number generation circuit 553 updates the numerical data in the count value permutation RCN in response to, for example, the falling edge of the random number update clock RGK. The random number sequence change circuit 555 changes the numerical data update order in the count value permutation RCN output from the random number generation circuit 553 based on the setting of the random number update rule by the random number sequence change setting circuit 556 as a random number sequence RSN. Output. Thus, the numerical data in the random number sequence RSN is updated in response to the falling edge of the random number update clock RGK, for example, as shown in FIG.

  As described above, the oscillation frequency of the random number clock RCLK generated by the random number clock generation circuit 112 and the oscillation frequency of the control clock CCLK generated by the control clock generation circuit 111 are different from each other. One oscillation frequency does not become an integral multiple of the other oscillation frequency. Therefore, the oscillation frequency of the random number update clock RGK and the latch clock RC0 generated by the clock flip-flop 552 of the random number circuit 509 is ½ of the oscillation frequency of the random number clock RCLK, but the oscillation of the control clock CCLK. The frequency and the oscillation frequency of the internal system clock SCLK that is ½ of the oscillation frequency of the control clock CCLK are different. Thus, the control clock CCLK, the internal system clock SCLK, and the random number update clock RGK are prevented from being synchronized. It becomes difficult to specify the update timing of numerical data in the random number sequence RSN to be performed. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent aiming and the like based on the result of analyzing the update operation of numerical data serving as a random number value in the random number circuit 509 from the operation timing of the CPU 56.

  The latch clock RC0 output from the clock flip-flop 552 is an inverted signal of the random number update clock RGK, the oscillation frequency is the same as the oscillation frequency of the random number update clock RGK, and its phase is the same as the phase of the random number update clock RGK and π It differs by (= 180 °). The latch clock RC0 is branched into a latch clock RC1 and a latch clock RC2 at a branch point BR1. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 101 (E), each of the latch clocks RC0, RC1, and RC2 becomes an oscillation signal whose signal state changes in a common cycle. The latch clock RC1 is input to the clock terminal CK of the latch flip-flop 557A. The latch clock RC2 is input to the clock terminal CK of the latch flip-flop 557B.

  Thus, the oscillation frequencies of the latch clocks RC1 and RC2 generated by branching the latch clock RC0 are different from the oscillation frequencies of the control clock CCLK and the internal system clock SCLK. Therefore, the control clock CCLK, the internal system clock SCLK, and the latch clocks RC1 and RC2 are prevented from being synchronized, and the random number circuit 509 takes in numerical data as a random value from the operation timing of the CPU 56. It becomes difficult to specify the timing. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent aiming and the like based on the result of analyzing the operation of fetching numerical data as a random value in the random number circuit 509 from the operation timing of the CPU 56.

  In response to the falling edge of the latch clock RC1, the latch flip-flop 557A takes in (latches) the first start winning signal SS1 transmitted from the first start port switch 13a and supplied to the input port P0. Then, it is output from the output terminal Q as a start winning latch signal SL1. Then, if the capturing method in the random number latch selector 558A is designated as signal input to the input port P0, the start winning latch signal SL1 is output as the random number latch signal LL1. Thereby, for example, the latch clock RC1 falls in the first start winning signal SS1 whose signal state changes between the off state (high level) and the on state (low level) at the timing shown in FIG. A random number latch signal whose signal state changes between an OFF state and an ON state at timings T11 and T13 as shown in FIG. 101 (G) after being taken into the latch flip-flop 557A at timings T11, T13, T15,. LL1 is output from the random number latch selector 558A. Here, the first start winning signal SS1 transmitted from the first start opening switch 13a changes from the off state to the on state when the start winning of the game ball at the first start winning opening 13 is detected. The random number latch signal LL1 output from the latch flip-flop 557A via the random number latch selector 558A is supplied to the random number value register 559A serving as the random number value register R1D, and in the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555. Used to obtain numerical data. In this way, the latch flip-flop 557A and the random number latch selector 558A acquire numerical data as a random value using the latch clock RC1 based on the detection of the start winning of the game ball at the first start winning opening 13. The random number latch signal LL1 is generated separately from the case where the start winning of the game ball at the second start winning opening 14 is detected.

  In response to the falling edge of the latch clock RC2, the latch flip-flop 557B takes in (latches) the second start winning signal SS2 transmitted from the second start port switch 14a and supplied to the input port P1. Then, it is output from the output terminal Q as a start winning latch signal SL2. Then, if the capturing method in the random number latch selector 558B is designated as signal input to the input port P1, the start winning latch signal SL2 is output as the random number latch signal LL2. As a result, for example, in the second start winning signal SS2 whose signal state changes between the off state (high level) and the on state (low level) at the timing shown in FIG. 101 (I), the latch clock RC2 falls. A random number latch signal whose signal state changes between an OFF state and an ON state at timings T13 and T15 as shown in FIG. 101 (J) after being taken into the latch flip-flop 557B at timings T11, T13, T15,. LL2 is output from the random number latch selector 558B. Here, the second start winning signal SS2 transmitted from the second start opening switch 14a changes from the OFF state to the ON state when the start winning of the game ball at the second start winning opening 14 is detected. The random number latch signal LL2 output from the latch flip-flop 557B via the random number latch selector 558B is supplied to the random number value register 559B serving as the random number value register R2D, and the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555 Used to obtain numerical data. In this way, the latch flip-flop 557B and the random number latch selector 558B acquire numerical data as a random value using the latch clock RC2 based on the detection of the start winning of the game ball at the second start winning opening 14. The random number latch signal LL2 for generating is generated separately from the case where the start winning of the game ball at the first start winning opening 13 is detected.

  In this manner, the latch flip-flop 557A and the latch flip-flop 557B each have a common cycle by branching the latch clock RC0 generated by the common clock flip-flop 552 at the branch point BR1. Using the latch clocks RC1 and RC2 whose signal states change, a start winning latch signal SL1 and a start winning latch signal SL2 for obtaining numerical data as a random value are generated. Thereby, the circuit configuration in the random number circuit 509 can be simplified, and the manufacturing cost in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be reduced.

  The random value register 559A serving as the random value register R1D receives the numerical data in the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555 at the falling edge of the random number latch signal LL1 input from the random number latch selector 558A to the clock terminal. In response, the data is fetched (latched), and the numerical data serving as stored data is updated. The random value register 559B serving as the random value register R2D receives the numerical data in the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555 at the falling edge of the random number latch signal LL2 input from the random number latch selector 558B to the clock terminal. In response, the data is fetched (latched), and the numerical data serving as stored data is updated.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 101 (G), when a falling edge occurs in which the random number latch signal LL1 changes from the off state to the on state at timing T11, the random number sequence changing circuit 555 outputs the timing at this timing T11. As shown in FIG. 101 (H), the numerical data in the random number sequence RSN that has been read is taken into the random value register R1D and acquired as numerical data that becomes a random value. As a result, in the random value register 559A serving as the random value register R1D, the numerical data used as the random number value based on the detection of the start winning of the game ball in the first start winning opening 13 is converted into the second start winning opening 14 The game ball can be acquired and stored separately from the case where the start winning of the game ball is detected.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 101 (J), when a falling edge that changes the random number latch signal LL2 from the OFF state to the ON state occurs at the timing T13, the random number sequence change circuit 555 at the timing T13. As shown in FIG. 101 (K), the numerical data in the random number sequence RSN output from is taken into the random value register R2D and acquired as numerical data that becomes a random value. As a result, the random value register 559B serving as the random value register R2D converts the numerical data used as the random number value into the first start winning opening 13 based on the detection of the starting winning of the game ball at the second starting winning opening 14. The game ball can be acquired and stored separately from the case where the start winning of the game ball is detected.

  Thus, the random value register 559A responds to the falling edge of the start winning latch signal SL1 generated by the latch flip-flop 557A using the latch clock RC1 and the random number latch signal LL1 output from the random number latch selector 558A. The numerical data in the random value RSN is stored. The random value register 559B is responsive to the falling edge of the start winning latch signal SL2 generated by the latch flip-flop 557B using the latch clock RC2 and the random number latch signal LL2 output from the random number latch selector 558B. The numerical data in the random number sequence RSN is stored.

  As described above, in the random number circuit 509, the clock flip-flop 552, the random number generation circuit 553, the random number sequence change circuit 555, etc. acquire numerical data that becomes a random number value based on the start winning of the game ball at the first start winning opening 13. Numerical data that becomes a random number value based on the combination of the latch flip-flop 557A, the random number latch selector 558A, the random value register 559A, and the starting winning of the game ball at the second starting winning opening 14 is obtained. The latch flip-flop 557B, the random number latch selector 558B, and the combination of the random number value register 559B are shared. Therefore, the random number update clock RGK output from the clock flip-flop 552 and supplied to the random number generation circuit 553 and used for updating the numerical data in the count value permutation RCN and the numerical data in the random number sequence RSN is the first start winning opening 13. A common random number is used to acquire numerical data that is a random value based on the starting winning of the game ball in the game and a configuration that acquires numerical data that is a random value based on the starting winning of the game ball at the second starting winning opening 14. This is an update clock signal. Thereby, the circuit configuration in the random number circuit 509 can be simplified, and the manufacturing cost of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be reduced.

  In the random number latch flag register RDFM shown in FIG. 20 (A), the operation for reading and reading numerical data in the random value register 559A serving as the random value register R1D, and the numerical data in the random value register 559B serving as the random value register R2D. The corresponding bit value changes to “0” and “1” in response to the fetch operation and read operation. FIG. 102 is a timing chart for explaining changes in random number latch flag data RDFM0 and random number latch flag data RDFM1 stored in bit numbers [0] and [1] of random number latch flag register RDFM.

  As shown in FIG. 102A, at the timing T20 when the random number latch signal LL1 and the random number latch signal LL2 fall, numerical data is taken into the random value register R1D and the random value register R2D as shown in FIG. Corresponding to this, the bit values of the random number latch flag data RDFM0 and the random number latch flag data RDFM1 change from “0” to “1” as shown in FIG. For example, when numerical data is stored in the random value register R1D in response to the random number latch signal LL1 being turned on (low level) at the timing T20, the bit value of the random number latch flag data RDFM0 is “0”. By changing from “1” to “1”, the random number latch flag corresponding to the random number value register R1D is turned on. Further, when numerical data is stored in the random value register R2D in response to the random number latch signal LL2 being turned on (low level) at the timing T20, the bit value of the random number latch flag data RDFM1 is “0”. By changing from “1” to “1”, the random number latch flag corresponding to the random number value register R2D is turned on.

  When the random number latch flag is turned on in this manner, storage of new numerical data in the corresponding random number value register R1D or random number value register R2D is restricted. For example, when the bit value of the random number latch flag data RDFM0 changes from “0” to “1”, the random number latch flag corresponding to the random number value register R1D is turned on, and new numerical data is stored in the random number value register R1D. Is limited. When the bit value of the random number latch flag data RDFM1 changes from “0” to “1”, the random number latch flag corresponding to the random number value register R2D is turned on, and new numerical data is stored in the random number value register R2D. Is limited. Therefore, the random number value register R1D and / or the random number value register R2D in which the corresponding random number latch flag is in the ON state captures numerical data corresponding to the input of the first start prize signal SS1 and / or the second start prize signal SS2. Even when the random number latch signal LL1 and / or the random number latch signal LL2 are input, new numerical data included in the random number sequence RSN cannot be stored.

  Thus, after the numerical data is temporarily stored in the random value register R1D or the random value register R2D, before the numerical data is read from the CPU 56 or the like, for example, the first start winning signal SS1 or the second start winning signal SS2 Even when the signal is erroneously turned on due to noise or the like, the numerical data already stored is updated, and it is possible to prevent inaccurate random number reading. Further, the bit values of the random value acquisition specification data RDLT0 and the random value acquisition specification data RDLT1 are intentionally set to “1” from the outside, or the first start winning signal SS1 and the second starting winning signal SS2 are set. It is also possible to prevent an illegal act such as modifying already stored numerical data by intentionally turning it on from the outside. On the other hand, when the numerical data once stored in the random value register R1D or the random value register R2D is not read from the CPU 56 or the like for a long time, the first start winning signal SS1 and the second starting winning signal SS2 are thereafter normal. When the ON state is turned on, accurate numerical data corresponding to the passage (entrance) of the game ball at the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 is stored in the random value register R1D and the random value register R2D. I can't do that.

  Therefore, for example, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 executes a predetermined random value register reading process as shown in FIG. 102D when a predetermined random value reading condition is satisfied. Then, the random number value register R1D and the random number value register R2D are read to turn off the random number latch flag, thereby setting a state in which storage of new numerical data is permitted. As a random value read condition, when the CPU 56 starts executing the game control in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and / or when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 In addition, it may be sufficient if the number of reserved memories of the special figure game has reached a predetermined upper limit. In the operation example shown in FIG. 102, in response to the completion of the random value register read processing shown in FIG. 102B at timing T25, the random number latch flag data RDFM0 and the random number latch are shown in FIG. The bit value of the flag data RDFM1 is updated from “1” to “0”, and the corresponding random number latch flag is set to the off state.

  As an example, the CPU 56 executes a predetermined security check process and the like from the ROM 54 when the system reset of the game control microcomputer 560 is canceled based on the start of power supply in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and then the user program is read from the ROM 54. The control code indicating (game control game control program for game control) is read and the execution of the game control is started. At this time, the CPU 56 executes the process of step S5006 shown in FIG. 26 as the random value register read process, thereby reading the numerical data stored in the random value register R1D and the random value register R2D and setting the corresponding random number latch flag. Turn off. In the process of step S5006 shown in FIG. 26, the CPU 56 determines whether the random number latch flag is in the ON state based on the result of checking the bit values of the random number latch flag data RDFM1 and the random number latch flag data RDFM0. May be read out only. Alternatively, each random number latch flag may be turned off by reading numerical data from both the random value register R1D and the random value register R2D regardless of whether the random number latch flag is on.

  When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, various power supply voltages gradually rise to specified values, such as the power supply voltage VSL and the power supply voltage VCC shown in FIGS. While such a power supply voltage is rising, some of the various circuits, such as a built-in circuit of the game control microcomputer 560, operate normally, while other parts may not be able to operate normally. As an example, when the power supply voltage is unstable, the first start prize signal SS1 and the second start prize signal SS2 are erroneously turned on, and the random number circuit 509 causes the random value register R1D and the random value register R2D to There is a possibility that numerical data is captured and stored, and the corresponding random number latch flag is turned on, which limits the storage of new numerical data. In addition, after the execution of game control by the CPU 56 or the like is started and before the switch process of step S21 shown in FIG. 28 is executed, the random number latch signal LL1 and the random number latch signal LL2 are stored at the random value register R1D and the random number latch signal LL2 at a predetermined timing. By inputting to the random value register R2D, there is a possibility that an illegal act of acquiring numerical data indicating a big hit determination random number (random R) with the special figure display result as “big hit” and controlling it to the big hit gaming state may be performed. is there. As described above, when the storage of new numerical data is restricted when the random number latch flag is turned on, the game ball passes through the start winning opening such as the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14. While it is possible to prevent erroneous numerical data from being taken in and stored in the random value register R1D or the random value register R2D due to noise or the like after the occurrence of the start winning to enter (incoming), the power supply voltage is reduced before the start winning occurs. When numerical data is taken into and stored in the random value register R1D or the random value register R2D due to a malfunction or fraud due to stability, even if a start winning occurs thereafter, it is already before the start winning occurrence timing. There is a possibility that the stored numerical data is acquired as a random value and used for determination of the special figure display result.

  Therefore, when the system reset in the game control microcomputer 560 is released and the game control is started, the random number latch flag is set to the off state to allow the storage of new numerical data. As a result, for example, the numerical data stored in the random value register R1D or the random value register R2D in error when the power supply voltage is unstable, such as when the power is turned on in the pachinko gaming machine 1, is acquired as a random value, and the game control It can be prevented from being used for various decisions. Further, after the execution of the game control is started, an illegal act of inputting a random number latch signal and controlling it to the big hit game state before the state of the first start port switch 13a or the second start port switch 14a is checked. Can be prevented.

  As another example, an on-state power-off signal is output from the power supply monitoring circuit 303 mounted on the power supply board 910 based on a decrease in the predetermined power supply voltage in the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the power supply voltage VSL. The CPU 56 outputs an on-state power-off signal in step S450 in FIG. 29 (Y in step S450), and further, after the backup monitoring timer value reaches the backup determination value in step S453, the CPU 56 performs steps S454 to S481. By executing the above process to prepare for the unstable operation or operation stop of the pachinko gaming machine 1 due to the decrease in the power supply voltage, the process of step S482 is repeatedly executed until the game control microcomputer 560 is in the operation stop state. The input state of the power-off signal is repeatedly determined. Thereafter, when it is determined during the process of step S482 that the power-off signal is off and is not input, the CPU 56 executes the process of step S487 and then ends the power-off process and the game. By returning from the control timer interrupt process, the execution of the game control is started from the head of the control code indicating the user program (game control process program for game control) stored in the ROM 54. Here, after it is determined in step S482 that the power-off signal has been turned off and has not been input, before the power-off processing is terminated and the execution of game control is started from the beginning of the control code, By executing the processing from step S483 to step S486 as the random value register read processing, the numerical data stored in the random value register R1D or the random value register R2D is read, and the corresponding random number latch flag is set to the OFF state.

  FIG. 103 is a timing chart showing an operation example when the power supply voltage VSL decreases during the execution of the game control. First, based on the start of power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, at timing T30 before timing T31 when the power supply voltage VSL shown in FIG. 103 (A) reaches the predetermined value VSL1, FIG. The power supply voltage VCC shown in (B) reaches a predetermined value VCC1. At this timing T30, the reset signal illustrated in FIG. 103C is changed from the on state to the off state. Subsequently, when the power supply voltage VSL reaches the predetermined value VSL1 at the timing T31, the power-off signal shown in FIG. Thereafter, for example, at timing T32, the bit value of the random number latch flag data RDFM0 shown in FIG. By changing from “1” to “1”, the random number latch flag corresponding to the random number register R1D is turned on.

  After the numerical data is stored in the random value register R1D at the timing T32 in this way, the power supply voltage VSL shown in FIG. 103A becomes the predetermined value VSL1 at the timing T33 before the numerical data is read by the CPU 56 or the like. Suppose that it is lower. At this time, based on the determination that the power-off signal shown in FIG. 103D is on (Y in step S450 in FIG. 29), is the power-off signal on in step S482? It is repeatedly determined whether or not. Thereafter, for example, at timing T34, when the power supply voltage VSL shown in FIG. 103A returns to the predetermined value VSL1, it is determined in step S482 shown in FIG. 29 that the power-off signal is in an off state and is not input. (N in step S482). In addition, based on the determination that the bit value of the random number latch flag data RDFM0 is “1” and the random number latch flag is on in step S483 shown in FIG. 29, the process of step S484 is executed. Then, the numerical data stored in the random value register R1D is read, the bit value of the random number latch flag data RDFM0 is updated from “1” to “0”, and the random number latch flag corresponding to the random value register R1D is turned off. Set to state. Thereafter, when the power-off process is terminated, for example, based on the contents specified in the power-off recovery vector table set in step S487 shown in FIG. By starting the execution of the game control from the beginning of the control code indicating the (game control processing program), the main process as shown in FIG. 25 is executed from the beginning.

  In the random number circuit 509, numerical data that becomes a random number value is captured and stored in the random value register R1D or the random value register R2D in response to the rising edge of the first start winning signal SS1 or the second start winning signal SS2. In this case, for example, when the switch operating power supply voltage VDD drops below a predetermined switch voltage after the process of step S482 shown in FIG. 30 is repeatedly performed, the normal voltage value is restored. During the restoration to the value, rising edges of the first start winning signal SS1 and the second starting winning signal SS2 occur, and numerical data is captured and stored in all of the random value register R1D and the random value register R2D. May turn on. If such an ON state of the random number latch flag is left unattended, when the game ball passes (enters) through the first start winning port 13 and the second starting winning port 14 after the power supply voltage is restored, the random number latch flag is set. Since it is on, storage of new numerical data is restricted, and the special figure display result is determined based on the numerical data captured during power supply voltage recovery, etc. There is a problem that determination using numerical data fetched at completely different timing is performed. Therefore, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 reads the random number value register R1D and the random number value register R2D in step S5006 shown in FIG. 26 and step S484 and / or step S486 shown in FIG. The above-described problem can be solved by starting (resuming) the execution of the game control after turning off.

  As another example of the random value read condition, the number of reserved memories of the special game reaches a predetermined upper limit value when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14. There is a case. Here, for example, after it is determined in step S311 shown in FIG. 44 that the first start port switch 13a is in the ON state, in step S201A shown in FIG. 4 ") or more, if it is determined that it is equal to or greater than that, the hold data is stored in all entries (for example, entries corresponding to the hold numbers" 1 "to" 4 ") in the first hold storage buffer, Since the number of stored pending data in the first pending storage buffer has reached the upper limit stored number, new pending data cannot be stored in the first pending storage buffer. Further, for example, after it is determined in step S313 shown in FIG. 44 that the second start port switch 14a is in the on state, in step S201B shown in FIG. 46, the second reserved storage number is greater than or equal to a predetermined upper limit value. If it is determined, the pending data is stored in all entries in the second pending storage buffer, and the number of pending data stored in the second pending storage buffer has reached the upper limit stored number. The pending data cannot be stored in the second pending storage buffer. In such a case, in general, the game ball is invalid without satisfying the start condition of the special game based on the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14, and the winning ball Only payouts are made.

  For this reason, it may be considered not to read out numerical data that is a random value generated by the random number circuit 509. However, in the random number circuit 509, the random number value register R1D and the random number value register in response to the first start winning signal SS1 and the second starting winning signal SS2 being turned on, regardless of the number of reserved memories. Numerical data as a random value is fetched and stored in R2D, and the corresponding random number latch flag is turned on. Then, when the game ball passes (enters) through the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14, the first start winning signal SS1 and the second start winning signal SS2 are turned on and input. However, since the storage of new numerical data in the random value register R1D and the random value register R2D is restricted, it is impossible to acquire an accurate random value corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 determines in steps S201A and S201B shown in FIG. 46 that the number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than a predetermined upper limit value (Y in steps S201A and S201B). The processing of steps S211A and S211B is executed to read the numerical data stored in the random value register R1D and the random value register R2D, thereby turning off the corresponding random number latch flag, and the start port switch passing process is terminated.

  In the main board 31, the security check program 54A stored in the ROM 54 or the like is stored in the ROM 54 or the like when the initial power is supplied from the power board 910 (when power is turned on without a backup power supply) or when the system 56 is restarted after a system reset occurs. Is read and executed, the game control microcomputer 560 enters the security mode. At this time, as a process corresponding to the security check program 54A, for example, a security check process as shown in FIG. 24 is executed. Here, the security time when the game control microcomputer 560 is in the security mode is set in advance in the bit number [2-0] or bit number [4-3] of the security time setting KSES stored in the program management area of the ROM 54. Depending on the stored bit value, a time component different from the fixed time can be included.

  For example, if the bit value in the bit number [2-0] of the security time setting KSES is a value other than “000” (N in step S1002 shown in FIG. 24), the setting contents shown in FIG. Correspondingly, any one of a plurality of extension times that can be selected in advance in addition to the fixed time can be set as a time component included in the security time (step S1004). If the bit value in the bit number [4-3] of the security time setting KSES is a value other than “00” (N in step S1006), it corresponds to the short mode or the long mode as shown in FIG. Then, a variable setting time that changes in a predetermined time range each time the initial setting process is executed based on system reset or power-on can be set as a time component included in the security time (step S1008).

  Until the security time set in this way has elapsed (N in step S1014), execution of the main process by the user program stored in the ROM 54 is not started. Then, the operation of generating numerical data to be a random number value by the random number circuit 509 may not be started during the period in which the game control microcomputer 560 is in the security mode. As a result, it becomes difficult to specify the operation start timing of the random number circuit 509 or the numerical data to be updated from the operation start timing due to power-on of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or system reset, and the analysis result of the game control processing program By connecting a so-called “hanging board” and inputting a fraud signal at a predetermined timing, it is possible to reliably prevent acts such as illegally generating a big hit gaming state.

  As an example, the bit value in the bit number [2-0] of the security time setting KSES is set to a different value for each model of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In this case, the extension time set in step S1004 shown in FIG. 24 can be made different for each model of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the operation start timing of the random number circuit 509 is determined from the operation start timing of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It becomes difficult to specify. Further, by setting the bit value in the bit number [4-3] of the security time setting KSES to “01” or “10”, the variable setting time set in step S1008 is changed for each system reset. This makes it extremely difficult to specify the operation start timing of the random number circuit 509 from the operation start timing of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  When it is determined in step S1014 shown in FIG. 24 that the security time has elapsed (Y in step S1014), the CPU 56 reads the user program stored in the ROM 54, and the main process as shown in FIG. 25 is executed. The For example, the setting process in step S14A includes a random number circuit setting process as shown in FIG. Here, if the bit value in the bit number [0] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 as shown in FIG. 10B is set to “1”, the random number circuit 509 is instructed by the processing in step S5005 shown in FIG. The start value of the numerical data, which is a random value generated in this way, can be changed every time the system is reset. Thereby, even if the operation start timing of the random number circuit 509 can be specified, it becomes difficult to specify numerical data read from the random value register 559A and the random value register 559B included in the random number circuit 509. Aiming based on the analysis result of the control processing program, or connecting a so-called `` hanging board '' and inputting an illegal signal at a predetermined timing can reliably prevent acts such as illegally generating a big hit gaming state it can.

  The random number circuit 509 and the like are provided with a free-run counter 554A that updates a count value serving as initial value determination data separately from the operation of the CPU 56. When the bit value [0] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 is “1”, the free run counter 554A is set at the initial setting based on the setting by the start value initial setting circuit 554 of the random number circuit 509. The start value is randomly determined by using the count value as it is, or by using a value obtained by substituting the count value into a predetermined arithmetic function (for example, a hash function). As a result, it becomes difficult to specify the numerical data that will be the start value in the random number circuit 509 from the operation mode of the CPU 56, and aiming based on the analysis result of the game control processing program or connecting a so-called “hanging board” to a predetermined timing By inputting the fraud signal at, actions such as illegally generating a big hit gaming state can be reliably prevented.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 is common to the case where the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol are performed. 80XX (H) fluctuation pattern command is transmitted. On the other hand, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command shown in FIG. 39 when displaying the variation of the first special symbol, and shows the variation shown in FIG. 39 when displaying the variation of the second special symbol. A second reserved memory number subtraction designation command is transmitted. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 identifies which one of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number has decreased based on the received reserved memory number subtraction designation command, and stores the first reserved memory. The number of reserved memories displayed on the display unit 18c and the second reserved memory display unit 18d is updated. Therefore, an increase in the number of commands can be prevented by using a common variation pattern command when performing the variation display of the first special symbol and when performing the variation display of the second special symbol. Therefore, in a gaming machine provided with a plurality of variable display portions, the data capacity can be reduced.

  In addition, regarding the process of updating the display of the number of reserved memories displayed on the first reserved memory display unit 18c and the second reserved memory display unit 18d, the effect control microcomputer 100 uses the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command and Based on which of the second reserved memory number subtraction designation command is received, the display of the reserved memory number corresponding to the received pending memory number subtraction designation command may be updated, and the processing load for one command Can be prevented, and the occurrence of processing failure can be prevented. For example, as with the variation pattern command, the reserved memory number subtraction designation command may be shared between the case where the first special symbol variation display is performed and the case where the second special symbol variation display is performed. The production control microcomputer 100 determines which of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number has decreased based on one common reserved memory number subtraction designation command. In addition to the process of specifying, the process of updating the display of the number of reserved memories must be executed. As a result, the processing load for one reserved memory number subtraction designation command becomes large, and processing loss tends to occur. Therefore, in this embodiment, with respect to the reserved memory number subtraction designation command, separate commands are transmitted for the case of performing the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of performing the variable display of the second special symbol, Such an increase in processing load is prevented, and the occurrence of processing failures is also prevented. In addition, regarding the variation pattern command, the production control microcomputer 100 has to perform many processes such as a process for specifying the presence / absence of the announcement effect and a process for identifying the variation pattern used for the variation display of the effect symbol. By using the reserved memory count subtraction command, the processing to identify the special symbol for the variable display target and the pending memory count subtraction process are performed, thereby reducing the occurrence of processing failures due to an increase in processing for one command. can do.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the random number circuit 590 includes the random number generation circuit 553 and the random number sequence change circuit 555 that update and output numerical data according to a predetermined procedure, and the output numerical data as a random value. A random number generation circuit based on random number value registers 559A (R1D) and random number value registers 559B (R2D) to be captured and stored, and random number latch signals LL1 and LL2 based on the first start winning signal SS1 and the second starting winning signal SS2. On the other hand, when the numerical data output from the 553 or the random number sequence changing circuit 555 is stored in the random value register 559A (R1D) or the random value register 559B (R2D), it is turned on to restrict the storage of new numerical data. Numerical data stored in the random value register 559A (R1D) or the random value register 559B (R2D) Random latch flag RDFM0 which is turned off to allow the storage of new numerical data when read by CPU56 at read timing of the random number value, and a RDFM1. Further, the game control microcomputer 560 turns off the random number latch flags RDFM0 and RDFM1 when the game control by the CPU 56 is started. Therefore, according to such a configuration, numerical data stored in the random value register 559A (R1D) or the random value register 559B (R2D) is acquired as an accurate random value based on the input of the random number latch signals LL1 and LL2. can do. In addition, it is possible to prevent a situation in which numerical data stored in the random value register 559A (R1D) or the random value register 559B (R2D) is erroneously acquired when the power supplied to the gaming machine is unstable. .

  Further, according to this embodiment, when the system reset of the game control microcomputer 560 is released and the execution of the game control by the CPU 56 is started, the random number latch flags RDFM0 and RDFM1 are turned off. Therefore, for example, the numerical data stored in the random value register 559A (R1D) or the random value register 559B (R2D) is erroneously acquired as a random value when the power supply voltage is unstable, such as when the power is turned on. Can be prevented.

  Also, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 repeatedly determines the input state of the detection signal until the operation stop state after the detection signal is output from the power supply monitoring circuit 920, and the detection signal When it is determined that is not input, execution of game control is started from the beginning of the game control processing program. In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 turns off the random number latch flags RDFM0 and RDFM1 after it is determined that the detection signal is not input and before the execution of the game control is started from the head of the game control processing program. Put it in a state. Therefore, for example, numerical data stored in the random value register 559A (R1D) or the random value register 559B (R2D) by mistake when the power supply voltage is unstable such as when the predetermined power supply voltage drops is obtained as a random value. Can be prevented.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the random number generation circuit 553 and the random number sequence change circuit 555 cyclically numerical data from a predetermined update initial value to a predetermined update final value within a predetermined range in which the numerical data can be updated. Update. Further, the game control microcomputer 560 can variably set a predetermined update initial value every time the game control microcomputer is reset. For this reason, it becomes difficult to specify numerical data that becomes a random value after the occurrence of a system reset, and it is possible to reliably prevent fraudulent acts such as aiming.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, after the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the free run counter 554A that counts the numerical value separately from the operation of the CPU 56 is provided. In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 determines a predetermined update initial value using the numerical value counted by the free-run counter 554A. Therefore, it becomes difficult to specify numerical data that is a random number value from the operation mode of the CPU 56, and it is possible to reliably prevent fraudulent acts such as aiming.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, game control microcomputer 560 includes internal resource access control circuit 501A for restricting external reading of nonvolatile memory (ROM 54) by other than CPU 56. Therefore, it becomes difficult to read out the control program stored in the non-volatile memory (ROM 54) from the outside of the game control microcomputer 560 and analyze it, and so on. Unauthorized acts caused by connecting the “hanging board” can be surely prevented.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the random number clock generation circuit 112 that generates a random number clock signal outside the game control microcomputer 560 and supplies the random number clock signal to the random number circuit, and the control clock supplied to the CPU 56 A control clock generation circuit 111 and a clock circuit 502 that generate signals are provided. The game control microcomputer 560 compares the input state of the random number clock signal supplied from the random number clock generation circuit 112 with the control clock signal generated by the control clock generation circuit 111 or the clock circuit 502. Thus, it is determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the input state of the random number clock signal. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game control from being executed in a state where an abnormality has occurred in the operation of updating the numerical data that becomes the random value.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a security check that checks whether or not the storage content of the nonvolatile memory (ROM 54) has been changed in a predetermined initial setting. The game control microcomputer 560 is configured to be able to variably set the security check execution time. Therefore, it becomes difficult to specify the execution start timing of the game control, and it is possible to reliably prevent a sniper based on an analysis result such as an initial setting operation or an illegal act by connecting a so-called “hanging board”. .

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 has a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4) of the number of reserved memories in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer at the read timing of the random number value. Is reached, the random number latch flags RDFM0 and RDFM1 are turned off by reading the numerical data stored in the random value register 559A (R1D) and the random value register 559B (R2D). Therefore, the random number latch based on the first start prize signal SS1 or the second start prize signal SS2 is reached when the read timing of the random number value comes after the reserved memory number reaches the predetermined upper limit number and becomes less than the upper limit number. An accurate random value based on the input of the signals LL1 and LL2 can be acquired.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs control to execute the effect symbol variation display in the effect display device 9 based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command. Further, the production control microcomputer 100 is based on the winning determination result specified by the winning determination result designation command and the number of reserved memories specified by the reserved memory number addition designation command or the reserved memory number subtraction designation command. Thus, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice effect is to be executed in a plurality of variable displays that are started before the variable display subjected to the winning determination is executed. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 executes the continuous notice effect based on the decision to execute the continuous notice effect.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started during execution of the continuous effect (continuous notice effect) for the variable display of the first special symbol that is not in the reach state, The first reserved memory that is started before the variable display of the first special symbol that is the target of the continuous effect (continuous notice effect) that is executed after the variable display of the second special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol. In the variable display of the first special symbol, execution of a continuous effect (continuous notice effect) is prohibited. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the continuity of the continuous production (continuous notice effect) is impaired due to the variable display of the other second special symbol being interrupted during the continuous effect (continuous notice effect). It is possible to prevent a situation in which the production mode of production is not suitable. Therefore, in a gaming machine provided with a plurality of special symbol indicators 8a and 8b, it is possible to prevent the contents of the effects from becoming unnatural without increasing the processing burden when performing the continuous effects (continuous notice effects). it can. In addition, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started during the execution of the continuous effect (continuous notice effect) for the variable display of the first special symbol that is not in the reach state, the continuous effect (continuous notice effect) is continued as it is. By ending, it is possible to notify the player early that it will not reach the reach state.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol that does not become a big hit is started during the execution of the continuous effect (continuous notice effect) for the variable display of the first special symbol that is in the reach state. Sometimes, the variable display of the second special symbol prohibits the execution of the continuous effect (continuous notice effect), while the continuous effect (continuous notice effect) executed after the variable display of the second special symbol ends. In addition, in the variable display of the first special symbol stored in the first reserved memory that is started before the variable display of the first special symbol, the execution of the continuous effect (continuous notice effect) is resumed. Further, when the variable display of the second special symbol that is a big hit is started during the execution of the continuous effect (continuous notice effect) for the variable display of the first special symbol that is in the reach state, the second special symbol of the second special symbol is displayed. The first special symbol in the first reserved memory that is started before the variable display of the first special symbol that is the target of the continuous effect (continuous notice effect) executed after the variable display and the variable display of the second special symbol are finished. In the variable display, continuous execution (continuous notice effect) is prohibited. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the continuity of the continuous production (continuous notice effect) is impaired due to the variable display of the other second special symbol being interrupted during the continuous effect (continuous notice effect). It is possible to prevent a situation in which the production mode of production is not suitable. Therefore, in a gaming machine provided with a plurality of special symbol indicators 8a and 8b, it is possible to prevent the contents of the effects from becoming unnatural without increasing the processing burden when performing the continuous effects (continuous notice effects). it can. Further, if the continuous effect (continuous notice effect) is resumed after the variable display of the second special symbol is completed, it is determined that the reach state is reached, and the interest in the game can be improved. Further, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the continuous performance (continuous notice performance) being continued unnecessarily after the big hit.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when the variable display of the second special symbol that does not become a big hit is started during the execution of the continuous presentation (continuous notice effect) for the variable display of the first special symbol that is a big hit. In the variable display of the second special symbol, the execution of the continuous effect (continuous notice effect) is prohibited, while the continuous effect (continuous notice effect) executed after the variable display of the second special symbol is ended. In the variable display of the first special symbol stored in the first reserved memory that is started before the variable display of the first special symbol, the execution of the continuous effect (continuous notice effect) is resumed. When the variable display of the second special symbol that is a big hit is started during the execution of the continuous effect (continuous notice effect) for the variable display of the first special symbol that is a big hit, the variable of the second special symbol is started. The first special symbol in the first reserved memory that is started before the variable display of the first special symbol that is the target of the continuous effect (continuous notice effect) executed after the display and the variable display of the second special symbol is finished. In variable display, execution of a continuous effect (continuous notice effect) is prohibited. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the continuity of the continuous production (continuous notice effect) is impaired due to the variable display of the other second special symbol being interrupted during the continuous effect (continuous notice effect). It is possible to prevent a situation in which the production mode of production is not suitable. Therefore, in a gaming machine provided with a plurality of special symbol indicators 8a and 8b, it is possible to prevent the contents of the effects from becoming unnatural without increasing the processing burden when performing the continuous effects (continuous notice effects). it can. Further, if the continuous effect (continuous notice effect) is resumed after the variable display of the second special symbol is ended, the expectation of a big hit is increased, so that the interest in the game can be improved. Further, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the continuous performance (continuous notice performance) being continued unnecessarily after the big hit.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started during the execution of the continuous effect (continuous notice effect) for the variable display of the first special symbol, the notice effect is executed. Ban. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a continuous effect (continuous notice effect) and another notice effect are executed in a mixed manner and confuse the player.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 corresponds to the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the production display device 9 based on the start command (variation pattern command). Control to start the production including the variation display of the production symbol is performed. Further, based on the fact that the variation time specified by the variation pattern command has elapsed, the effect display device 9 stops the effect including the variation display of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Take control. Further, based on the start command (pending stored number subtraction designation command), control is performed to start the variable display of the fourth symbol in the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d. Further, based on the symbol confirmation designation command, control is performed to stop the variation display of the fourth symbol in the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d. For this reason, since the effect display device 9 stops the effect including the variation display of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the fact that the variation time has elapsed, the effect corresponding to the variation display Can be prevented from being interrupted and causing discomfort, and discomfort to the player can be prevented. Further, since the variation display of the fourth symbol is stopped based on the symbol confirmation designation command, the variation display can be synchronized between the game control microcomputer 560 and the effect control microcomputer 100. Therefore, it is possible to synchronize the fluctuating display between the game control microcomputer 560 and the effect control microcomputer 100 without preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable and causing discomfort to the player. Can improve the interest of the game.

  In this embodiment, the display of the variation of the fourth symbol is started based on the reception of the reserved memory number subtraction designation command as the start command, and the variation pattern command is received as the start command. Although the case where the variation display of the effect symbol is started has been shown, the start of variation based on any start command is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, for the variation display of the production symbol, the production is started based on the reception of the reserved memory number subtraction designation command, and then the content of the production is determined based on the received variation pattern command, and the production symbol variation Various effects such as display and accompanying notice may be executed.

  In the case where only one special symbol display is provided, the variable display of the fourth symbol may be started based on the reception of the display result designation command. You may make it start the fluctuation display of both effect designs based on having received the fluctuation pattern command.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the case where the variation display of the effect symbol is executed as the effect on the liquid crystal screen performed by the effect display device 9 is shown, but the effect performed on the liquid crystal screen includes the variation of the effect symbol. The display may not be included, or only an effect such as a notice effect by displaying a character or a motif may be executed.

  Further, according to this embodiment, a pending storage number subtraction designation command, a fluctuation pattern command, and a display result designation command are transmitted as the start time command. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 performs control to start the variable display of the fourth symbol in the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d based on the symbol confirmation designation command. Therefore, by separating the reserved memory count subtraction designation command and the variation pattern command as the start command, the processing for starting the variation display of the fourth symbol and the processing for specifying the variation time can be distributed. It is possible to prevent a situation where a plurality of processes are concentrated in a short processing time with respect to a command, and to prevent an increase in the processing load of the production control microcomputer 100.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when the design control microcomputer 100 fails to receive the symbol confirmation designation command, the variation pattern command other than the symbol confirmation designation command or the big hit start is received from the game control microcomputer 560. Based on the reception of the designation command and the customer waiting demonstration designation command, control is performed to stop the variation display of the fourth symbol in the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d. For this reason, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the variation display of the fourth symbol is continued when the symbol determination designation command cannot be received due to an abnormality in the transmission / reception of the command.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 performs control to execute the variable display of the fourth symbol by causing the fourth symbol to be operated in the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d. Therefore, regardless of the timing at which the symbol confirmation designation command is received, the variation display of the fourth symbol can be stopped without a sense of incongruity.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 is based on the display result designation command when the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. In the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d, the control for resuming the variable display of the fourth symbol is performed. In addition, when the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the variation display of the fourth symbol is displayed in the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d based on the symbol confirmation designation command. Control to stop. On the other hand, when the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed on the effect display device 9 based on the display result designation command. The effect including the change display of the effect symbol corresponding to the change display is not resumed. Therefore, after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, when the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed, at least the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being executed. It is possible to make the player recognize and prevent the player from feeling distrust.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the gaming machine includes the movable member 78 movable so as to shield the effect display device 9, and the fourth symbol display areas 9 c and 9 d are provided by the movable member 78. Even if it is a case where becomes a shielding state, it is arrange | positioned in the position which can be visually recognized. Therefore, it is possible for the player to always recognize whether or not the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being displayed, and to prevent a situation in which the player is confused. .

  Further, according to this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 receives a prize based on the number of executions of the variable display stored in the RAM (no power backup) when the gaming state is controlled to the short-time state. In the variable display performed by the right (holding storage) that is the determination target of the time determination, the remaining number of the variable display executed until the time-short state is ended is equal to or less than the upper limit number (for example, “8”) of the holding storage. If it is determined that the variable display is executed based on the right (start-up storage) that has been won in the period, whether or not the pre-reading notice is executed using the continuous notice allocation table D that restricts the execution of the pre-reading notice To decide. Therefore, when there are few remaining times in the short-time state, prevent the situation where the judgment result at the time of winning is inconsistent with the decision result at the start of actual fluctuation and prevent the situation where the pre-reading notice cannot be performed properly. Can do.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the winning determination based on the number of executions of the variable display stored in the RAM (without power backup) after the time reduction state is ended. The right to start winning in the period until the number of executions of the variable display executed after the short-time state ends becomes the upper limit number of the reserved memory (for example, “8”) If it is determined that the variable display is executed based on (holding storage), it is determined whether or not to perform the prefetching notice using the continuous notice allocation table E that restricts the execution of the prefetching notice. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the continuity of the prefetching notice is impaired when it is immediately after the end of the time-saving state, and to prevent a situation in which the prefetching notice cannot be appropriately performed.

  Furthermore, according to this embodiment, when the gaming state is controlled to the short-time state, the production control microcomputer 100 is configured such that when the power supply is resumed after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. Then, it is determined whether or not to execute the prefetching notice using the continuous notice allocation table D in which the execution of the prefetching notice is restricted until the time saving state is completed. For this reason, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the determination result at the time of winning a prize is not consistent with the determination result at the start of actual fluctuation at the time of power failure recovery, and a situation in which the prefetching advance notice cannot be performed appropriately can be prevented.

  Therefore, according to this embodiment, even when the remaining number of time reduction states is small, immediately after the completion of the time reduction state, or when a power failure is restored, the player's expectation is not impaired. A pre-reading notice can be made.

  Further, according to this embodiment, it is determined that the continuous notice allocation tables A to C other than the continuous notice distribution tables D and E that restrict the execution of the prefetch notice become a variation pattern with super reach according to the determination at the time of winning. In such a case, the “countdown” effect mode is assigned so as to be determined as the effect mode of the pre-reading notice. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by providing a pre-reading notice of the “countdown” effect mode that is determined to be super reach. In addition, even if the continuous notice allocation tables D and E that restrict the execution of the prefetch notice are determined to be a super reach variation pattern by the determination at the time of winning a prize, the effect of “countdown” is produced as the prefetch notice presentation mode. Aspects are assigned indeterminately. For this reason, when the remaining number of short-time states is small or when a power failure is restored, inconsistency occurs in which the variable display with super reach is not executed even when the pre-reading notice of the “countdown” effect mode is executed. This can be prevented. Furthermore, even when the number of remaining times in the short-time state is small or when a power failure is restored, the pre-reading notice is not stopped at all. There is a case where the pre-reading notice is executed in an effect mode other than the “countdown” effect mode (for example, an effect mode of “holding ball change”). Therefore, it can be prevented that the player's expectation is unnecessarily impaired.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the winning determination for all the variable displays executed until the variable display performed by one right (holding storage) is started. A pre-reading notice (continuous notice effect) is executed on the condition that it is determined that “non-reach” will occur. Therefore, even when complicated processing to change the variation pattern and the table for selecting the variation pattern (variation pattern type determination table or variation pattern determination table) is not performed, reach is performed during the pre-reading notice (continuous notice effect). It is possible to prevent a situation in which the effect display is interrupted and the continuity of the pre-reading notice (continuous notice effect) is impaired. Therefore, the player's sense of expectation for the big hit can be increased without complicating the process of determining the variation pattern.

  For example, in order to prevent a situation in which the continuity of the pre-reading notice (continuous notice effect) is impaired, after it is decided to execute the pre-reading notice (continuous notice effect), the target variable display is started. It is also conceivable that the variation pattern is determined by changing the variation pattern type determination table or the variation pattern determination table so that the reach effect is not performed in the variation display executed before. However, in such a configuration, change processing of the variation pattern type determination table and the variation pattern determination table occurs, and the variation pattern determination processing becomes complicated. On the other hand, according to this embodiment, the pre-reading notice (continuous notice) is provided on the condition that all the fluctuation displays before starting the fluctuation display subject to the determination at the time of winning are “non-reach”. Since the change pattern type determination table and the change pattern determination table are not required to be changed. Therefore, the player's sense of expectation for the big hit can be increased without complicating the process of determining the variation pattern.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, when the game ball starts and wins at the first start winning opening 13, does the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol performed for the first reserved memory become a big hit? It is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol performed for the second reserved memory is a big hit when the game ball is won at the second start winning opening 14 To do. In addition, when one hold memory is stored as the first hold memory or the second hold memory, until the variable display performed on the one hold memory is started, when winning the prize for the one hold memory Based on the determination result of the determination, a pre-reading notice (continuous notice effect) for the one hold storage is executed using predetermined effect means (for example, effect display device 9) provided in the gaming machine. In this case, in this embodiment, in the big hit gaming state, control is performed so as to limit the execution of the winning determination based on the start winning winning in the first starting winning opening 13. Further, even in the high base state (probability change state or short time state), control is performed so as to limit the execution of the determination at the time of winning based on starting winning at the first starting winning port 13. Therefore, the variable display of the first special symbol determined to be a big hit by making it impossible to recognize the possibility that the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol will be a big hit during the big hit gaming state or the high base state It is possible to prevent the variable display of the second special symbol from being continuously executed in a state where the player is stocked, and to prevent excessive stimulation of the player's euphoria.

  For example, as shown in this embodiment, it is provided with a plurality of special symbol indicators 8a and 8b, and after the big hit game is finished, it shifts to a high base state (probability variation state or short time state), and priority is given to the variation display of the second special symbol. In the case of execution, if the pre-reading notice (continuous notice effect) is configured to be executable, the pre-reading notice is executed based on the fact that the game ball has started and won the first start winning opening 13 during the big hit game or the high base state. If this happens, the player will recognize that the variation display result of the first special symbol is likely to be a big hit. In this embodiment, when the game shifts to the high base state after the big hit game is finished, the start winning to the second starting winning opening 14 becomes easy and the change display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed. From the above, continuously display the variation display of the second special symbol so that the start winning to the second starting winning port 14 is not interrupted while keeping the reserved memory which becomes a big hit for the first special symbol. Can do. In other words, it becomes possible to continue the game while stocking the jackpot that was recognized by executing the prefetching notice, and it acts as a stock effect indicating that the prefetching notice stocks the jackpot. End up. Then, if there is a big hit for the second special symbol without interrupting the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, it will be confirmed that it will be a continuous big hit together with the big hit for the first special symbol in the stock state. Resulting in. In this way, if the reserved memory for the second special symbol is not interrupted, the game can be continued with a big hit if the gaming state is a high base state. A situation will occur where the heart is beaten more than necessary. Therefore, in this embodiment, the player's gambling feeling is required by making it impossible to recognize the possibility that the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol will be a big hit during the big hit gaming state or the high base state. It prevents the above.

  In this embodiment, the winning determination is not performed in the big hit gaming state or the high base state (steps S207A and S208A), so that the big hit gaming state or the high base state is in effect. In some cases, the pre-reading notice (continuous notice effect) is not performed so that the possibility of a big hit cannot be recognized, but even in the case of a big hit gaming state or a high base state A determination at the time of winning may be performed and a determination result specifying command at the time of winning may be transmitted. Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the big hit gaming state or the high base state is in effect. If the big hit gaming state or the high base state, the winning determination result designation is made. Even when a command is received, it may be controlled not to perform a pre-reading notice (continuous notice effect).

  Further, according to this embodiment, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started during the execution of the continuous effect (continuous notice effect) for the variable display of the first special symbol, the notice effect is executed. Ban. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a continuous effect (continuous notice effect) and another notice effect are executed in a mixed manner and confuse the player.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed based on the start winning at the first start winning opening 13, the second winning based on the start winning at the second starting winning opening 14 is performed. Compared to the case where the special symbol variation display is executed, it is decided to make a small hit at a high rate. Therefore, by suppressing the occurrence frequency of the small hit game based on the start winning to the second start winning opening 14, it can be understood that it was a small hit game despite expecting a sudden probability change big hit game in the high base state. It is possible to suppress a situation in which a situation in which the player is discouraged more than necessary is prevented, and a situation in which the player is disadvantaged more than necessary can be prevented.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 uses the variation pattern type determination table for detachment to change the variation pattern type of the effect symbol to the variation pattern type including the variation pattern with super reach, It is determined as one of a plurality of variation pattern types including a variation pattern type that does not include a variation pattern with super reach. Then, the variation pattern of the effect design is determined from the variation patterns included in the determined variation pattern type. In this case, the deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A and 135B indicate that the common determination value (for the variation pattern type (super CA2-7) including the variation pattern with super reach, regardless of the total number of pending storages ( 230 to 251) are allocated. Moreover, the variation pattern type tables 135A and 135B for loss used when the gaming state is the normal state are common to the non-reach variation pattern types (non-reach CA2-1) regardless of the total number of pending storages. Determination values (1 to 79) are assigned. Therefore, in the case of executing a pre-reading notice (continuous notice effect) based on the determination that the super reach is reached, it is possible to prevent inconsistency depending on the number of reserved memories. In addition, the distribution of the variation pattern with super reach and other variation patterns can be easily changed at the design stage.

  For example, in this embodiment, it is premised that the variation pattern is determined at the start of variation of the special symbol and the effect symbol, and the variation display is performed according to the determined variation pattern, but is read into the holding buffer at the timing when the start winning is detected. If the random number for determining the variation pattern type (random 2) includes a random value corresponding to the super reach with high reliability for the big hit, the variation display for the super reach is performed before the variation display is executed. A continuous notice effect is executed. In this case, if the deviation variation pattern type determination table is designed as in this embodiment, when a continuous notice effect is executed, a change with a super reach corresponding to the noticed change pattern type is always performed. Since the display is executed, a notice effect corresponding to the variation pattern type can be executed in advance.

  For example, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-278663, it is described that a variation pattern type is first determined and then one of the variation patterns included in the variation pattern type is determined. There are variation patterns that are included between a plurality of variation pattern types. For this reason, even when the continuous notice effect is executed in advance, other effects such as normal reach may be executed, which may cause distrust to the player. If you try not to give distrust to the player, you can only perform a notice effect that the reach will occur at best (you can not give a more reliable notice such as super reach) ), The effect of the notice effect will be significantly reduced. On the other hand, according to this embodiment, a common determination value is assigned to a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach regardless of the total number of pending storages. Therefore, it is possible to reliably execute a continuous notice effect with higher reliability, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the notice effect without giving distrust to the player.

  In addition, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-278663 includes a variation pattern that exists in common among the variation pattern types. For this reason, it is complicated to distribute a specific variation pattern such as a super reach variation pattern and other variation patterns at the design stage. That is, even if it is desired to change only the selection ratio of a specific fluctuation pattern without changing the selection ratio of each fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation pattern type, the selection ratios within a plurality of fluctuation pattern types Therefore, the appearance rate of the variation pattern differs between the variation pattern types. On the other hand, according to this embodiment, a specific variation pattern such as a variation pattern of super reach and other variation patterns are configured not to exist in common among a plurality of variation pattern types. The appearance rate of the variation pattern can be easily changed.

  Further, in this embodiment, the variation pattern type determination table for detachment has different determination values depending on the total number of pending storages for variation pattern types including variation patterns (normal reach and non-reach) other than super reach. Assigned. For example, in this embodiment, only the variation pattern type determination table for shortening (for shortening) 135B (see FIG. 35B) selected when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more is selected as the variation pattern for shortening variation. A variation pattern type (non-reach CA2-3) including (non-reach PA1-2) is selected. Therefore, when the number of reserved memories (in this example, the total number of reserved memories) is large, the operating rate can be improved by shortening the fluctuation time by averaging. That is, if many variable displays with a long variable time such as super reach are executed while the reserved memory is accumulated, the reserved memory is not easily consumed, and there is a possibility that useless start winning (invalid start) may occur. However, when the number of reserved memories is large, the operating time is improved by shortening the fluctuation time on average. On the other hand, when there is a small amount of reserved memory, if the fluctuation time is short, the reserved memory is quickly consumed and the variable display is interrupted. For this reason, in this embodiment, when the number of reserved storage is small, the variation display is not performed by shortening the variation so that the variation time is averaged and lengthened. Therefore, in this embodiment, inconsistency does not occur depending on the number of reserved storages while making it difficult for the variable display to be interrupted.

  Further, according to this embodiment, after the display of the effect symbols is started and the display result is derived and displayed, the effect symbols that have been temporarily stopped are temporarily stopped, and then the effect symbols are variablely displayed again. A plurality of types of quasi-continuous variation patterns (non-reach PA1-4, normal PB2-1, normal PB2-2, super PA3-1, super PA3-2, normal PB2-3, which execute re-variation once or multiple times, Normal PB2-4, super PA3-3, super PA3-4, and special PG1-3). Then, the pre-reading notice (continuous notice effect) is executed in the same manner as when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed. For this reason, even when an effect of the same effect mode is executed, it is possible to expect the possibility of both a case where a pseudo-ream effect is executed and a case where a pre-reading notice is executed. Can improve interest in

  Moreover, according to this embodiment, after one reserved memory is stored as the first reserved memory or the second reserved memory, a plurality of effect symbols until the variable display performed by the one reserved memory is started. The pre-reading notice (continuous notice effect) is executed over the variable display. Then, the chance effect symbol is derived and displayed as a variable display result of the effect symbol until the variable display performed by the one hold memory is started, and the next effect until the variable display performed by the one hold memory is started. A predetermined effect (for example, display in such a manner that a flash shines above the display screen of the effect display device 9 at the start of effect symbol variation) is performed when symbol variation display is started. Therefore, it is necessary to make time adjustments such as stopping the chance eye symbol early when executing the pre-reading advance notice (continuous notice effect) of the effect mode using the derivation display of the chance eye symbol and the execution of the predetermined effect. It is possible to eliminate such a situation that the process of deriving and displaying the chance symbol and the process of executing the predetermined effect overlap to cause a lack of processing. For example, in order to perform an effect similar to the above, during a single variation display, first the chance symbol is stopped and displayed, and then a predetermined effect (for example, the display screen of the effect display device 9 at the start of the variation of the effect symbol) 90 is executed to finish the variable display, a continuous notice effect similar to that in FIG. 90 can be executed. However, such control requires processing such as temporarily stopping the chance symbol display slightly earlier than the end time of the variable display, and requires time adjustment until the end time of the variable display. Therefore, in this embodiment, by performing the predetermined effect at the start of the next variable display during the continuous notice effect, the continuous notice effect of the effect mode shown in FIG. It is possible to execute without doing.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 variably displays the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b. The variation pattern type is determined according to a common process when displaying. The game control microcomputer 560 is common when the first special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol indicator 8a and when the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol indicator 8b. According to the process, the variation pattern of the effect design is determined from the variation patterns included in the determined variation pattern type. Therefore, in a gaming machine equipped with a plurality of special symbol displays, the capacity of a storage area for storing a program and data for determining a variation pattern can be reduced.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether it is a big hit or not, a normal big hit which is a 15-round big hit, or a probable big hit and a sudden probable big hit which is a 2-round big hit. Is determined before the derivation display of the display result. Then, when the first special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the big hits of 15 rounds and big hits of 2 rounds are different. And decide which of the transitions. Therefore, the game value of the game state to be transferred can be varied depending on which special symbol variable display is executed, and the progress of the game can be diversified.

  Further, according to this embodiment, at the time of the start winning prize before the start of the change, the game control microcomputer 560 determines in advance whether or not the change pattern of the effect pattern becomes a change pattern with super reach. . Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines that it becomes super reach before the variable display of the production symbol determined to be super reach is started based on the determination at the time of winning when super reach is reached. An effect to be notified can be executed. For this reason, it is possible to notify that it will be super reach before the variable display corresponding to the start winning prize, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 determines the variation pattern by determining the variation pattern type using the deviation variation pattern type determination table. In this case, in the deviation variation pattern type determination table, a common determination value (230 to 251) is assigned to a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach regardless of the total number of pending storages. . Further, in the variation pattern type determination table for loss, different determination values are assigned to the variation pattern types including variation patterns other than super reach (normal reach and non-reach) according to the total number of pending storage. Therefore, by assigning the ratio of the determination value to the variation pattern type including the variation pattern having a short variable display time as the total number of pending storage increases, the operating rate of the variable display decreases. It can be prevented as much as possible.

  FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram showing a state of assignment of determination values in the deviation variation pattern type determination table. In this embodiment, when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the variation pattern type determination table 135B for loss shown in FIG. 35B is used, and the total number of pending storages is 0 to 2 (3 or less). In this case, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135A shown in FIG. 35A is used (see steps S96 to S98). As shown in FIG. 79, when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the ratio is less (normal reach, super reach) than when the total number of pending storages is 0-2. When the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, as shown in FIG. 35 (B), the non-reach CA 2-2 variation pattern type is selected and the non-reach PA 1-2 is a variation pattern of shortened variation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the situation in which the operation rate of the variable display is reduced as much as possible by shortening the average fluctuation time as the total number of pending storage increases.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 104, regardless of the total number of pending storage, a common determination value (230˜) is used for the variation pattern type with super reach (super reach A, super reach B). 251). Therefore, at the time of starting winning, it is possible to easily determine in advance whether or not it will be super reach if only the value of the extracted random number for variation pattern type determination (random 2) is confirmed. Accordingly, it is possible to notify that the super reach is reached before the variable display corresponding to the start winning prize, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

  In this embodiment, the case where the distribution of the determination values of the variation pattern type determination table for detachment is different for the two types of the total pending storage number being 0 to 2 or 3 or more is shown. The method of differentiating the determination values in the deviation variation pattern type determination table is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, the distribution may be made more finely stepwise according to the total number of pending storage. In this case, for example, the deviation variation pattern type determination table for the total pending storage number 0, 1 and the offset for the total pending storage count 2, the total pending storage count 3 and the total pending storage count 4 A variation pattern type determination table may be prepared in advance, and the distribution of the variation pattern type with reach and the variation pattern type of the shortened variation may be further varied in stages. In addition to such an example, various combinations of the deviation variation pattern type determination table prepared in advance are conceivable. For example, a separate deviation variation pattern type determination table may be provided for each value of the total pending storage number (that is, for the total pending storage number 0, for the total pending storage number 1, for the total pending storage number 2) , The deviation variation pattern type determination table for the total pending storage number 3, for the total pending storage number 4... May be used separately). Further, for example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table for the total pending storage number 0 to 2, the total pending storage number 3, the total pending storage number 4... May be used.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, a completely common determination value (230 to 251) is assigned to the variation pattern type with super reach (super reach A, super reach B) regardless of the total number of pending storage. However, the determination value for super reach in one of the deviation variation pattern type determination table may include the determination value for super reach in the other variation pattern type determination table for deviation. . FIG. 105 is an explanatory diagram of another example of determination value assignment states in the deviation variation pattern type determination table.

  In the modification shown in FIG. 105, when the total reserved memory number is 3 or more, the determination values 230 to 251 are assigned to the variation pattern types with super reach, whereas the total reserved memory number 0 to In the case of 2, determination values 200 to 251 are assigned to the variation pattern types with super reach. However, even in such a case, if the value of the extracted variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) is in the range of at least 230 to 251 at the time of starting winning, it becomes easy to become super reach beforehand. Can be determined. Accordingly, it is possible to notify that the super reach is reached before the variable display corresponding to the start winning prize, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 105, among the determination values 0 to 199 assigned to the non-reach variation pattern type when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the range of the determination values 100 to 199 Are not included in the range 0 to 99 of the determination value assigned to the non-reachable variation pattern type when the total pending storage number is 0 to 2. On the other hand, the range 230 to 251 of the determination value assigned to the variation pattern type with super reach when the total pending storage number is 3 or more indicates the super value when the total pending storage number is 0 to 2. All of the determination value ranges 200 to 251 assigned to the variation pattern types with reach are included. Therefore, when the value of the extracted variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) is in the range of at least 230 to 251 at the time of starting winning a prize, it can be easily determined in advance that it will be super reach.

  In the modification shown in FIG. 105, when the total pending storage number is 0 to 2, determination values 100 to 199 are assigned to the variation pattern types with normal reach, and when the total pending storage number is 3 or more. The determination values 200 to 229 are assigned to the variation pattern types with normal reach, and the ranges to which the determination values are assigned to the variation patterns with normal reach are not overlapped. The range of determination values assigned to the variation pattern types with normal reach may be overlapped between the case and three or more cases. For example, when the total pending storage number is 0 to 2, the determination values 100 to 199 are assigned to the variation pattern type with normal reach, and when the total pending storage number is 3 or more, the variation pattern type with normal reach is assigned. On the other hand, the determination values 180 to 229 may be assigned. Even in the case of such a configuration, some of the determination values 180 to 229 among the determination values 180 to 229 assigned to the variation pattern type with normal reach when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more. Only the range of 199 is included in the range of determination values 100 to 199 assigned to the variation pattern type with normal reach when the combined pending storage number is 0 to 2.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case has been shown in which a variation pattern type with a super reach is used as a collective variation pattern type, and a variation pattern type determination table for deviation is configured. However, for each super reach type (for example, super reach A and The variation pattern type may be divided into super reach B). FIG. 106 is an explanatory diagram showing still another example of the determination value assignment state in the deviation variation pattern type determination table.

  In the modification shown in FIG. 106, determination values 230 to 237 are assigned to the variation pattern type with super reach A regardless of the total number of pending storages, and the variation pattern type with super reach B is assigned. Determination values 237 to 251 are assigned. However, even in such a case, if the value of the extracted variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) is in the range of 230 to 251 at the time of starting winning, it is easily determined in advance that it will be super reach can do. Accordingly, it is possible to notify that the super reach is reached before the variable display corresponding to the start winning prize, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

  Further, even when the deviation variation pattern type determination table is configured as shown in FIG. 106, the distribution of determination values between the super reach A and the super reach B may be different for each table. As in the modification shown in FIG. 4, for example, the determination value for super reach A and B in one deviation variation pattern type determination table is the determination value for super reach A and B in the other variation pattern type determination table for deviation. It may be included. Moreover, you may comprise so that allocation of the judgment value with respect to the super reach A and the super reach B may partially overlap between tables. This can be similarly applied to both this embodiment and each modification shown in this embodiment.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the variation pattern other than the variation pattern with super reach includes the variation pattern with pseudo-continuity. Therefore, even when the effect of notifying that it will be a super reach is not executed, the variable display with the pseudo-ream can be performed, so that the expectation for becoming a big hit gaming state can be increased, and the interest in the game can be enhanced. Can be improved.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when determining a variation pattern with pseudo-continuations as a variation pattern other than the variation pattern with super reach, when the total number of pending storage is small, In comparison, a variation pattern having a large number of pseudo-variation re-variation execution times is determined. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which variable display accompanied by a pseudo-ream with a large number of re-variations is performed when the total number of reserved storage is large (when the stored storage is accumulated), and the variable display operating rate Can be further prevented.

  FIG. 107 shows the assignment state of the determination value in the variation pattern type determination table for deviation when looking at a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with a pseudo-continuity as a variation pattern other than the variation pattern with super reach. It is explanatory drawing shown. In this embodiment, when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, based on the determination value being in the range of 215 to 229 as the variation pattern type including the variation pattern other than the variation pattern with super reach. Then, the variation pattern type of normal CA2-6 is selected (see FIG. 35B). Then, as shown in FIG. 107, the fluctuation pattern of the normal PB2-1 with the pseudo-ream with one revariation is selected (see FIGS. 37 and 31). On the other hand, when the total pending storage number is 0 to 2, normal CA2 based on the determination value being in the range of 170 to 229 as the variation pattern type including the variation pattern other than the variation pattern with super reach. A variation pattern type of −5 is selected (see FIG. 35A). Then, as shown in FIG. 107, the variation pattern of the normal PB2-2 with the pseudo-ream with the number of revariations of 2 is selected (see FIGS. 37 and 31).

  As shown in FIG. 107, even if the effect of notifying that it will be super reach is not executed, there is a case where variable display with pseudo-ream may be performed, so that the expectation for becoming a big hit gaming state is increased. Can improve the interest of the game. As shown in FIG. 107, when variable display with pseudo-continuations is performed, when the total number of pending storages is as small as 0 to 2, variable display with two re-variation pseudo-continuations is executed. When the number of reserved memories is as large as 3 or more, variable display with a pseudo-continuity with a small number of re-variations is performed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a situation in which variable display accompanied by a pseudo-ream with a large number of re-variation execution times is frequently performed when the total number of reserved storage is large (when the stored storage is accumulated), It is possible to prevent a situation in which the operation rate of variable display is lowered.

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern type with super reach assigned to the range of determination values 230 to 251 includes a variation pattern with pseudo-continuity and a variation without pseudo-continuation as a specific variable display pattern. Patterns are included (see super CA2-7 in FIGS. 31 and 37), but the variation pattern type with super reach assigned to the range of determination values 230 to 251 only involves super reach. And a variation pattern that does not involve pseudo-continuations may be included. Further, even when a variation pattern with pseudo-ream is used together with super reach, the range of determination values 230 to 251 includes a variation pattern that has only super reach and does not involve pseudo ream as a specific variable display pattern. Variation pattern types that include only quasi-continuous and super-reach and quasi-continuous variation patterns, normal reach and quasi-continuous variation pattern types, and non-reach and variability pattern types that involve quasi-continuation. May be assigned to a range other than the determination values 230 to 251 as a variation pattern type including a variable display pattern other than a specific variable display pattern.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when a variation pattern with a pseudo-ream is determined as a variation pattern with super reach, the number of re-variation executions is not less than a predetermined number (three in this embodiment). It is possible to determine a variation pattern with a pseudo-ream. In addition, when a variation pattern with a pseudo-continuity is determined as a variation pattern other than the variation pattern with super reach, the number of re-variation executions is less than a predetermined number (one or two in this embodiment). It is possible to determine the variation pattern with ream Therefore, by executing a quasi-ream whose number of re-variations is greater than or equal to a predetermined number (for example, 3 times), the player can have a sense of expectation that it may become super reach. Can be improved.

  FIG. 108 is an explanatory diagram showing an assignment state of determination values in the deviation variation pattern type determination table when attention is paid to a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with pseudo-continuations. In this embodiment, the super CA 2-7 variation pattern type with super reach is selected based on the determination value being in the range of 230 to 251 regardless of the total number of pending storage (see FIG. 35). . Then, as shown in FIG. 107, super PA3-1 to super PA3-2, which is a fluctuation pattern with a pseudo-continuity with three re-variations, may be selected (see FIGS. 37 and 31). On the other hand, when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the variation pattern type of normal CA 2-6 that does not become super reach is selected based on the determination value being in the range of 215 to 229 (FIG. 35 ( B)). Then, as shown in FIG. 107, a normal PB2-1 that is a variation pattern with a pseudo-continuation with one revariation count may be selected (see FIGS. 37 and 31). When the total pending storage number is 0 to 2, the variation pattern type of normal CA 2-5 that does not become super reach is selected based on the determination value being in the range of 170 to 229 (FIG. 35). (See (A)). Then, as shown in FIG. 107, the normal PB2-2, which is a variation pattern with a pseudo-continuity with two revariations, may be selected (see FIGS. 37 and 31).

  As shown in FIG. 108, by executing the pseudo-ream with the number of re-variations of 3 or more, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that it may become a super reach, and to have an interest in the game. Can be improved.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 108, the variation pattern type with super reach assigned to the range of the determination values 230 to 251 includes three pseudo-variations as a specific variable display pattern. A variation pattern with reaming is included, and a variation pattern with one or two re-variations is included as a variable display pattern other than a specific variable display pattern in a range other than that. This shows a case where the display pattern and a variable display pattern other than a specific variable display pattern include a variation pattern with a pseudo-series that does not overlap the number of re-variations. May be. For example, the variation pattern type with super reach assigned to the range of determination values 230 to 251 includes a variation pattern with re-variation 3 to 5 pseudo-continuations as a specific variable display pattern. A variable pattern other than the specific variable display pattern may be included in a range other than that including a variation pattern with re-variation 1 to 3 pseudo-continuations.

  It should be noted that any variation pattern with any type of super reach within the range to which the variation pattern type with super reach in the deviation variation pattern type determination table (the range to which the determination values 230 to 251 are allocated) is assigned. It is not limited to what is shown in this embodiment whether it is assigned or how much the fluctuation pattern with pseudo-continuous is assigned. FIG. 109 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of assignment in a range in which a variation pattern type with super reach is assigned.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 109 (A), not all types of reach are allocated, but among the reach with high reliability for some jackpots (for example, super reach C in super reach A to C). Those with pseudo-continuations and having a large number of pseudo-continuations (for example, four times) may be collectively assigned to the range of determination values 230 to 251. Also, for example, as shown in FIG. 109 (B), regardless of the type of reach, all reach (for example, super reach A to super reach C) is accompanied by a pseudo run, and the number of pseudo runs. Those having a large number may be collectively assigned to a range of determination values 230 to 251. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 109 (C), in addition to the fluctuation pattern of only super reach (for example, super reach A and not accompanied by pseudo-continuations), the pseudo-ream is associated with the number of pseudo-continuations. Many variation patterns may be assigned to a range of determination values 230 to 251 as specific variation patterns.

  In this embodiment, the case of using two types of reach, that is, super reach A and super reach B, is shown as the super reach. You may comprise so that a super reach may be performed. For example, when the super reach C is configured to be executed in addition to the super reach A and B as shown in FIG. 109, the game control microcomputer 560 first performs the process similar to that of this embodiment according to the processing shown in FIG. Super CA 3-3, which is a variation pattern type for super reach, from the variation pattern type determination table for jackpots shown in (A) and (B) and the variation pattern type determination table for loss shown in FIGS. And Super CA2-7 will be decided. Then, the super CA 3-3 and the super CA 2-7, which are the variation patterns for super reach, are each configured to include the variation patterns with super reach A to C, and the super reach is determined based on the determined variation pattern types. A variation pattern involving any one of A to C may be determined.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when it is determined to be a big hit, it is a fluctuation pattern with a super reach at a higher rate than when it is determined not to be a big hit. For example, as shown in FIG. 35, when it is determined to be out of place, the determination value is assigned only to a narrow range of 230 to 251 for super reach, whereas FIGS. As shown in (2), when it is determined to be a big hit, a determination value is assigned to a super reach over a wide range of 150 to 251 or 80 to 251. Therefore, the expectation to the big hit gaming state when variable display with super reach is performed can be enhanced, and the interest in gaming can be further improved.

  Further, according to this embodiment, it is determined that the variation pattern other than the variation pattern with super reach is a variation pattern with normal reach or a non-reach variation pattern. Therefore, even when variable display with super reach is not performed, variable display with normal reach can be executed, giving a sense of expectation that it may be a big hit gaming state. Further improvement can be achieved.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the variation pattern type to include a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach or a variation pattern type not including a variation pattern with super reach. Decide on. Then, when it is determined that the variable display pattern type of the effect symbol is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach, it is determined that the variation pattern of the effect symbol is a variation pattern with super reach. Therefore, the distribution between the variation pattern with super reach and the variation pattern other than that can be easily changed at the design stage only by changing the distribution of the variation pattern type.

  In the above-described embodiment, the production control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as the boards on which the circuit for controlling the production apparatus is mounted. You may mount on one board | substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 and the like is mounted and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 27, etc.) are mounted. You may make it provide two board | substrates with two production | presentation control boards.

  In the above-described embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 100. However, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits another command (for example, FIG. 3). The sound output board 70 and the lamp driver board 35 shown in FIG. 5 or the sound / lamp board having the function of the circuit mounted on the sound output board 70 and the function of the circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35). A control command may be transmitted and transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 on the effect control board 80 via another board. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or the sound output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound / lamp board are equipped with control means such as a microcomputer, and the control means receives the command. In response to this, control related to sound control and lamp control is executed, and the received command is changed as it is or, for example, to a simplified command to control the effect display device 9. You may make it transmit to. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the display control in accordance with the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 560 in the above-described embodiment. Display control can be performed in accordance with commands received from the board 35 or the sound / lamp board.

  Moreover, in embodiment shown above, the characteristic structure of the gaming machine as shown to the following (1)-(10) is also shown.

(1) After a game medium (for example, a game ball) passes through the first start area (for example, the first start winning opening 13), a start condition that allows the start of variable display is satisfied (for example, the first special A plurality of types of first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) that can be distinguished from each other on the basis of the variable display of neither the symbol nor the second special symbol being executed and the big hit gaming state) The game medium has passed through the first variable display section (for example, the first special symbol display 8a) that starts variable display and derives and displays the display result, and the second start area (for example, the second start winning opening 14). Later, a plurality of types that can be distinguished from each other on the basis that the start condition is satisfied (for example, neither variable display of the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is executed, nor is the big hit gaming state) Second identification information (example For example, a second variable display unit (for example, a second special symbol display unit 8b) that starts variable display of the second special symbol and derives and displays the display result is provided, and the first variable display unit or the second variable display unit is provided. Game control for controlling the progress of a game in a gaming machine that is in a specific gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) based on the display result derived and displayed on the display unit being a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) The execution of the presentation corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information is controlled based on the command from the microcomputer (for example, the game control microcomputer 560) and the game control microcomputer An effect control microcomputer (for example, an effect control microcomputer 100), and a game control microcomputer First, for determining whether or not at least the display result of the variable display of the first identification information in the first variable display unit is the specific display result based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the first start area. First display result determination numerical data (for example, jackpot determination random number (random R), jackpot type determination random number (random 1) including specific game state determination numerical data (for example, jackpot determination random number (random R)) ) And first variable display determination numerical data for determining the variable display pattern of the first identification information (for example, random number for variation pattern type determination (random 2), random number for variation pattern determination (random 3)). The first numerical data extracting means (for example, the part executing step S205A in the game control microcomputer 560) to be extracted and the game medium pass through the second start area. Based on what has been missed, at least second specific game state determination numerical data (for example, for determining whether or not the display result of the variable display of the second identification information in the first variable display unit is the specific display result) , Second display result determination numerical data (for example, big hit determination random number (random R), big hit type determination random number (random 1)) including the big hit determination random number (random R)) and variable of the second identification information Second numerical data extraction means for extracting second variable display determining numerical data (for example, random number for variation pattern type determination (random 2), random number for variation pattern determination (random 3)) for determining a display pattern ( For example, the part for executing step S205B in the game control microcomputer 560) and the start condition even though the game medium passes through the first start area. For the variable display of the first identification information that is not established, the first display result determination numerical data and the first variable display determination are extracted by the first numerical data extraction means up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4). First hold storage means (for example, a first hold storage buffer) that stores numerical data as hold storage, and second identification information that does not satisfy the start condition even though the game medium passes through the second start area For the variable display, the second display result determination numerical data and the second variable display determination numerical data extracted by the second numerical data extraction means are stored as reserved storage up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4). Using the second hold storage means (for example, the second hold storage buffer) and the first display result determination numerical data stored in the first hold storage means based on the start condition being satisfied, First pre-determining means for deciding whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first identification information in the one variable display unit is the specific display result before the display result of the variable display of the first identification information is derived and displayed ( For example, the step of executing step S61 after executing step S54 in the game control microcomputer 560) and the second display result determining numerical data stored in the second holding storage means based on the start condition being satisfied Is used to determine whether the display result of the variable display of the second identification information in the second variable display unit is the specific display result before the display result of the variable display of the second identification information is derived and displayed. 2 pre-determining means (for example, the part that executes step S61 after executing step S53 in the game control microcomputer 560), and first pre-determining means Based on the determination result, the first variable display determination numerical data and a determination value table in which determination values are set for a plurality of types of variable display patterns (for example, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135A shown in FIG. 35). , 135B), a first variable display pattern determining means (for example, a game control microcomputer) that determines a variable display pattern (for example, a variable pattern) of the first identification information from among a plurality of types of variable display patterns. Step S54 in Step 560 and Steps S91 to S105) and the second variable display determination numerical data and the determination value table based on the determination result of the second pre-determining means. Second variable display pattern determination for determining a variable display pattern of identification information from among a plurality of types of variable display patterns When the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is started (for example, the part that executes steps S91 to S105 after executing step S53 in the game control microcomputer 560), the first variable display A variable display pattern command (for example, a variation pattern command) capable of specifying the variable display pattern determined by the pattern determining means or the second variable display pattern determining means, and the first identification information or the second variable display in the first variable display section The reserved memory decrease command (for example, the first reserved memory indicating that the number of reserved memories stored in the first reserved memory means or the second reserved memory means has decreased by starting the variable display of the second identification information in the unit. Number subtraction specification command. Second reserved memory number subtraction designation command. ) As a start time command (for example, a part for executing steps S60A and S107 in the game control microcomputer 560), and when the game medium passes through the first start area, Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the first starting area before the determination by the one variable display pattern determination means, the first variable display determination random number and the determination value extracted by the first numerical data extraction means are used. , Start-up determination means for determining whether or not the variable display pattern of the first identification information is a specific variable display pattern (for example, a variable pattern with super reach) among a plurality of types of variable display patterns (for example, a game Part of the control microcomputer 560 for executing steps S209A and S209B) and the first predetermining means Before starting, a command command transmission means for starting (for example, a microcomputer for game control) that transmits a determination result command (for example, a determination result specifying command for winning prize) that can specify the determination result of the start time determining means to the effect control microcomputer The command transmission means at the start is variable when the variable display pattern is determined by the first variable display pattern determining means and when the variable display pattern is determined by the second variable display pattern determining means. A common variable display pattern command is transmitted when the display pattern is determined (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 performs variable display of the first special symbol and variable display of the second special symbol). The change pattern command of 80XX (H) shown in FIG. And a command for reducing a reserved memory is transmitted so that it can be specified which one of the first reserved memory means and the second reserved memory means stores the number of reserved memories (for example, a game control micro The computer 560 transmits the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command shown in FIG. 39 when performing the variable display of the first special symbol, and subtracts the second reserved memory number illustrated in FIG. 39 when performing the variable display of the second special symbol. (The designation command is transmitted), and the production control microcomputer is capable of distinguishing the number of reserved memories stored in the first reserved storage means from the number of reserved memories stored in the second reserved storage means ( For example, the stored memory number display control means (for example, the production control microcomputer 100) that controls the display on the first reserved memory display unit 18c and the second reserved memory display unit 18d). Part of executing steps S653, S656, S659, S662), and which of the first reserved storage means and the second reserved storage means stores the number of reserved memories based on the reserved memory reduction command Is specified, and the number of reserved memories displayed on the reserved memory number display unit is updated (for example, in the production control microcomputer 100, the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command is received in step S657). Step S659 is executed when it is determined, and step S662 is executed when it is determined that the second reserved memory number subtraction designation command is received at Step S669) and the determination result specified by the determination result command. Before the variable display of the first identification information subject to determination by the start time determination means is executed In the variable display of the first identification information to be started, the notice effect determining means for determining whether or not the notice effect (for example, continuous notice effect) is executed (for example, the part for executing step S800A in the effect control microcomputer 100). 90 to FIG. 90 by executing the notice effect executing means for executing the notice effect based on the decision to execute the notice effect by the notice effect determining means (for example, executing step S8108 in the microcomputer 100 for effect control). The determination value table for the specific variable display pattern, regardless of the number of reserved memories stored in the first reserved storage means, A common determination value is set, and a variable display pattern other than a specific variable display pattern has a first value. Different judgment values are set according to the number of reserved memories stored in the storage unit (for example, as shown in FIGS. 35 (A), (B) and 104), is the total number of reserved memories being 0-2? Regardless of whether it is 3 or more, determination values in the range of 230 to 251 are assigned to the variation pattern types (super CA2-7) including the variation pattern with super reach. Different variation values are assigned to variation pattern types including variation patterns with non-reach and normal reach other than super reach depending on whether the total number of pending storage is 0 to 2 or 3 or more. The variable display pattern other than the specific variable display pattern is a variable display pattern in which the reach state is not established, and the variable display pattern of the first identification information or the second identification information is started in comparison with the specific variable display pattern. A variable display pattern for shortening the variable display time from when the display result is derived and displayed, and the first variable display pattern determining means stores the hold storage stored in the first hold storage means when the start condition is satisfied. When the number is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the number of determination values corresponding to the variable display pattern for shortening is larger than when the number of the reserved storage is less than the predetermined number. Gaming machine and determines the variable display pattern using a constant has been determined value. With such a configuration, when the variable display pattern is determined by the first variable display pattern determination means and when the variable display pattern is determined by the second variable display pattern determination means, the variable display pattern command of the common mode By using, an increase in the number of commands can be prevented. Therefore, in a gaming machine provided with a plurality of variable display portions, the data capacity can be reduced. Further, in the case where a continuous effect is executed based on the determination that a specific variable display pattern is obtained, inconsistency does not occur depending on the number of reserved memories stored in the first reserved memory means or the second reserved memory means. Can do. Also,
By varying the variable display time according to the number of reserved memories stored in the first reserved storage means or the second reserved storage means, it is possible to prevent the situation where the variable display operating rate is reduced as much as possible.

(2) The game control microcomputer has a built-in control CPU (for example, CPU 56) that executes game control in the game machine based on the stored contents of the nonvolatile memory (for example, ROM 54) after executing predetermined initial settings. And a random number circuit (for example, a random number circuit 4509) that is built in or externally attached to a game control microcomputer (for example, the game control microcomputer 560) and generates numerical data to be a random number value. Numerical value updating means (for example, random number generation circuit 553 or random number sequence changing circuit 555) that updates and outputs data according to a predetermined procedure, and randomness that takes numerical data output from numerical value updating means as a random value and stores it Numerical value storage means (for example, random value register 559A (R1D) or random value register 559B) R2D)) and predetermined data (for example, random number latch signals LL1 and LL2 based on the first start winning signal SS1 and the second starting winning signal SS2), the numerical data output from the numerical value updating means is stored as a random value. When the numerical data stored in the random number storage means is read out by the control CPU at the read timing of the random number value while being turned on to limit the storage of new numerical data when stored in the means And a predetermined flag (for example, random number latch flags RDFM0 and RDFM1) that is allowed to store new numerical data, and the first reserved storage means and the second reserved storage means Based on the read random number value, the first display result determination numerical data or the second display result determination numerical data is stored as a pending storage (example) For example, the numerical data extracted from the random value register R1D in step S205A is stored in step S206A as the big hit determination random number (random R) in the first reserved storage buffer, and the random value is stored in step S205B in the second reserved storage buffer. The numerical data extracted from the register R2D is stored as a big hit determination random number (random R) in step S206B), and the game control microcomputer sets a predetermined flag when game control by the control CPU is started. Game control start processing means to be turned off (for example, a part for executing step S5006 in the game control microcomputer 560 to clear the random number latch flags RDFM0 and RDFM1. Performing steps S484 and S486 in the game control microcomputer 560) To clear the random number latch flags RDFM0 and RDFM1. ) May be included. According to such a configuration, the numerical data stored in the random value storage unit based on the input of the predetermined signal can be acquired as an accurate random value. In addition, it is possible to prevent a situation in which numerical data stored in the random value storage means is erroneously acquired in a state where the power supplied to the gaming machine is unstable.

(3) The game control start time processing means is a system reset time processing for turning off a predetermined flag when the system reset of the game control microcomputer is released and the execution of the game control by the control CPU is started. Means (for example, a part for executing step S5006 in the game control microcomputer 560 to clear the random number latch flags RDFM0 and RDFM1) may be included. According to such a configuration, for example, it is possible to prevent the numerical data stored in the random number storage means from being erroneously acquired as a random value when the power supply voltage is unstable when the power is turned on. .

(4) The gaming machine monitors a predetermined power supply voltage generated based on power supply to the gaming machine, and outputs a detection signal (for example, a power-off signal) based on the decrease in the predetermined power supply voltage A detection judgment provided with monitoring means (for example, a power supply monitoring circuit 920), wherein the game control microcomputer repeatedly determines the input state of the detection signal until the operation stop state after the detection signal is output from the power supply monitoring means. When the determination that the detection signal is not input by the means (for example, the part for executing step S482 in the game control microcomputer 560) and the detection determination means, the game control processing program starts from the beginning. The power failure recovery control means for starting execution (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 executes step S487. After the determination that the detection signal is not input by the detection determination means, the game control start time processing means performs control at the time of power interruption recovery. Before the means starts executing the game control from the beginning of the game control processing program, the power failure recovery processing means for turning off a predetermined flag (for example, executing steps S484 and S486 in the game control microcomputer 560) And a portion for clearing the random number latch flags RDFM0 and RDFM1). According to such a configuration, for example, it is possible to prevent the numerical data stored in the random value storage means from being erroneously acquired as a random value when the power supply voltage is unstable, for example, when the predetermined power supply voltage is lowered. be able to.

(5) The numerical value updating means circularly updates the numerical data from a predetermined update initial value to a predetermined update final value within a predetermined range in which the numerical data can be updated (for example, the random number generation circuit 553 or the random number sequence change) The part for generating a random number sequence RSN as shown in FIG. 15 or FIG. 16 in the circuit 555), the game control microcomputer variably sets a predetermined update initial value every time the game control microcomputer is system reset. Possible random number initial value setting means (for example, a part for executing step S5005 in the game control microcomputer 560) may be included. According to such a configuration, it becomes difficult to specify numerical data that becomes a random number value after the occurrence of a system reset, and it is possible to reliably prevent an illegal act due to a shooting or the like.

(6) The gaming machine includes a counting unit (for example, a free-run counter 554A) that counts a numerical value separately from the operation of the control CPU after power supply to the gaming machine is started, and a random number initial value setting unit Uses the numerical value counted by the counting means to determine a predetermined update initial value (for example, the start value setting circuit 554 sets the start value based on the processing of step S5005 by the game control microcomputer 560). (Part)). According to such a configuration, it becomes difficult to specify numerical data that is a random number value from the operation mode of the control CPU, and it is possible to reliably prevent fraudulent acts such as aiming.

(7) The nonvolatile memory is built in the game control microcomputer, and the game control microcomputer restricts external reading of the nonvolatile memory other than the control CPU (for example, the internal resource access control circuit 501A). ) May be included. According to such a configuration, it becomes difficult to read out and analyze the control program stored in the non-volatile memory from the outside of the game control microcomputer, and aiming based on the analysis result of the control program, etc. It is possible to surely prevent an illegal act by connecting a so-called “hanging board”.

(8) The gaming machine generates a random number clock signal outside the gaming control microcomputer and supplies the random number clock signal to the random number circuit (for example, the random number clock generation circuit 112), and a control CPU And a control clock generation circuit (for example, the control clock generation circuit 111 or the clock circuit 502) that generates a control clock signal supplied to the game control microcomputer. The microcomputer for microcomputer changes the input state of the random number clock signal supplied from the random number clock generation circuit to the input state of the random number clock signal by comparing the input state of the random number clock signal with the control clock signal generated by the control clock generation circuit. Random number clock abnormality determination means (for example, frequency monitoring circuit 551, It may be configured so as to include a portion) for performing the steps S562~S566 in fine gaming control microcomputer 560. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game control from being executed in a state where an abnormality has occurred in the operation of updating the numerical data that is the random value.

(9) The game control microcomputer performs security check to check whether or not the storage contents of the nonvolatile memory have been changed in a predetermined initial setting (for example, step S1009 in the game control microcomputer 560). To S1014) and security time setting means that can variably set the execution time of the security check by the security check means (for example, based on the bit number [2-0] of the security time setting KSES) The part which performs step S1001-S1004 in computer 560. Based on bit number [4-3] of security time setting KSES, step S1005-S in game control microcomputer 560 008 and the portion to be executed), may be configured to include. According to such a configuration, it becomes difficult to specify the execution start timing of the game control, and it is possible to reliably perform a sniper based on an analysis result such as an initial setting operation or an illegal act by connecting a so-called “hanging board”. Can be prevented.

(10) The game control microcomputer uses the random number value storage means when the number of reserved memories in the first reserved storage means or the second reserved storage means reaches a predetermined upper limit number at the read timing of the random number value. Upper limit storage reading means for turning off a predetermined flag by reading stored numerical data (for example, a part for executing steps S211A and S211B in the game control microcomputer 560 to clear the random number latch flags RDFM0 and RDFM1) May be included. According to such a configuration, an accurate random number value based on an input of a predetermined signal when the number of reserved memories reaches a predetermined upper limit number and becomes a random number read timing after the number becomes less than the upper limit number. Can be obtained.

  The present invention can be applied to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, and in particular, each can be identified based on the fact that a start condition that allows the start of variable display is satisfied after the game medium passes through the start area. A variable display unit that starts variable display of multiple types of identification information and derives and displays the display result is specified based on the display result derived and displayed in the variable display unit based on a predetermined display result. It is preferably applied to a gaming machine that is in a gaming state.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 8a 1st special symbol display device 8b 2nd special symbol display device 9 Production display device 13 1st starting winning port 14 2nd starting winning port 20 Special variable winning ball device 31 Game control board (main board)
56 CPU
501 External bus interface 501A Internal resource access control circuit 502 Clock circuit 503 Specific information storage circuit 504 Reset / interrupt controller 508 CTC
509 Random number circuit 510 PIP
511 Serial communication circuit 512 Address decoding circuit 551 Frequency monitoring circuit 552 Clock flip-flop 553 Random number generation circuit 554 Start value setting circuit 554A Free-run counter 555 Random number sequence change circuit 556 Random number sequence change setting circuit 557A, 557B Latch flip-flop 558A, 558B Random number latch selector 559A, 559B Random value register 560 Game control microcomputer 80 Production control board 100 Production control microcomputer 101 Production control CPU
109 VDP

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that performs variable display of identification information in the first variable display means or the second variable display means and can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
Production variable display means for performing variable display of production identification information corresponding to variable display of identification information in the first variable display means and the second variable display means;
Storage means capable of holding stored contents including information about variable display time for a predetermined period even when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped;
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game;
Production control means for controlling the production variable display means based on a command from the game control means,
The game control means,
After the power supply to the gaming machine in the variable display of the identification information is stopped, when the power supply to the gaming machine is restored, based on the stored contents of said storage means to store, resume variable display of the identification information Possible recovery measures ,
Special state control means that can be controlled to a special state in which variable display of identification information is easily performed ,
When the power supply to the gaming machine is restored after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped during the variable display of the production identification information, the production control means does not resume the variable display of the production identification information. Including a recovery screen display means for displaying the recovery screen,
Extracting means for extracting a random number for determining an advantageous state for determining whether to control the advantageous state and a random number for determining a variable display for determining a variable display pattern of the identification information for presentation;
With respect to variable display of identification information that has not yet started, the storage unit for storing the random number for determining the advantageous state and the random number for determining the variable display extracted by the extraction unit as a limit storage,
Determining means for determining whether to control to the advantageous state using the random number for determining the advantageous state;
The determination result of the determining means, the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved storage means when starting variable display of identification information, the value of the random number for determining variable display extracted by the extracting means, and a determination value Based on the variable display pattern determining means for determining the variable display pattern of the identification information for presentation,
Before determining by the variable display pattern determining means, it is determined whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state based on the value of the advantageous state determining random number extracted by the extracting means, and at least by the extracting means Determination means for determining whether or not a specific variable display pattern is obtained based on the extracted value of the variable display determination random number and the determination value;
When it is determined by the determination means that the advantageous state is controlled, or when it is determined that the specific variable display pattern is to be obtained, a notice effect is provided before the variable display of the identification information as the determination target is started. Notice effect execution means that can be executed;
The power supply to the gaming machine is stopped when the special state is controlled, and when the power supply to the gaming machine is restored, the limiting means for limiting the execution of the notice effect,
At least a part of the determination values corresponding to the specific variable display pattern is set to the same determination value regardless of the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved storage means when starting variable display of identification information ,
Before Symbol judging means, by which the value of the variable display determination random number extracted by the extraction means to determine whether they meet the same determination value, it is determined whether a particular variable display pattern A gaming machine characterized by

Images